新人教版九年级英语全册精品教案+期中测试题+期末试题

新人教版九年级英语全册精品教案+期中测试题+期末试题

新人教版九年级英语 全册精品教案+期中测试题+期末试题 全册精品教案 Unit 1 How can we become good learners?‎ 学习目标 ‎ 认知目标： ‎ ‎ 1. Talk about how to study. 学会讨论各种学习方法和策略。 ‎ ‎ 2. Find out your suitable learning methods. 找出适合自己的学习方法。‎ ‎ 情感目标：‎ ‎ 通过对学习方法的学习，培养学生用正确而科学的方法做事的能力，明白“一份耕耘，一份收获”。‎ ‎ 技能目标：‎ ‎ （1）熟练掌握下列词汇： aloud pronunciation discover repeat note pronounce increase speed partner create active connect review knowledge wisely born attention ‎ （2）熟练掌握下列短语： work with friends ask the teacher for help ‎ read aloud look up practice pronunciation ‎ ‎ connect…with… pay attention to ‎ ‎（3）掌握下列句型： ‎ How do you study English? ‎ I learn by working with a group. ‎ ‎ Do you learn English by reading aloud? ‎ Yes, I do. It helps my pronunciation.‎ ‎ How can I read faster? ‎ You can read faster by reading word groups.‎ ‎ How can I improve my pronunciation? ‎ One way is by listening to tapes.‎ But whether or not you can do this well depends on your learning habits. ‎ 重点、难点（Key points and difficulties） ‎ ‎ 1. 学会运用how来询问做事方式 ‎ ‎2. 学会运用by + doing的结构表达做事方式。by 介词，表示“通过……方法 或途径”，译成“靠、通过”。by后面可以加名词或动名词短语。‎ ‎ 3. 动名词的构成： ‎ ‎ 动词后加动名词doing，相当于名词，在句子中可以做主语、宾语、表语 定语等。‎ 课时划分 Period 1 Section A 1 (1a-2d)‎ Period 2 Section A 2 (3a-3b)‎ Period 3 Section A 3 (Grammar Focus—4c)‎ Period 4 Section B 1 (1a-2e)‎ Period 5 Section B 2 (3a-selfcheck)‎ Section A 1 (1a-2d)‎ Step 1 Warming up ‎ T: How do you study English? Do you study English by the following ways? (Show some pictures and present the important phrases.)‎ ‎ T: How do you study English?‎ S: I study English by ______.‎ ‎ by working with friends.‎ by making word cards.‎ by asking the teacher for help.‎ by reading the textbook.‎ by working with a group.‎ by listening tapes.‎ Step 2 1a Check the ways you study English. Then add other ways you sometimes study.‎ ‎___ a. by working with friends.‎ ‎___ b. by making word card.‎ ‎___ c. by reading the textbook.‎ ‎___ d. by listening to tapes ‎___ e. by asking the teacher for help.‎ ‎…‎ Step 3 Listening ‎ ‎1) Listen. How do these students study for a test? Write letters from 1a above.‎ ‎2) Check the answers: b (Meiping); e (Peter); d (Tony)‎ Step 4 Guess ‎ Show some pictures. ‎ Guess: How does he/she study English? He/She studies English by…‎ ‎ How do they study English? They study English by…‎ Step 5 Pairwork ‎ 1c Make conversations about how you study for a test.‎ ‎ A: How do you study for a test?‎ ‎ B: I study by working with a group.‎ ‎ A: How do you study for a test?‎ ‎ B: I study by…‎ Step 6 Listening ‎ ‎ 2a Listen and check the questions you hear.‎ ‎1 ____ Does anyone learn English by watching videos?‎ ‎2 ____ Do you have conversations with friends in English?‎ ‎3 ____ What about listening to tapes?‎ ‎4 ____ What about reading aloud to practice pronunciation?‎ ‎5 ____ Have you ever studied with a group?‎ ‎ Answers: 1, 2, 4, 5‎ ‎2b Listen again. Match each answer below with a question above.‎ ‎ a. Yes, I have. I’ve learned a lot that way.‎ b. Oh, yes. It really improves my speaking skills.‎ c. I do that sometimes. I think it helps.‎ d. No. It’s too hard to understand spoken English.‎ ‎ Answers: d, b, c, a Step 7 Pairwork ‎1. 2c Make conversations using the information in 2a and 2b ‎ A: Have you ever studied with a group?‎ ‎ B: Yes, I have. I’ve learned a lot that way.‎ ‎ Show some pictures.‎ ‎1) A: Do you learn English by watching movies?‎ ‎ B: Yes, it’s a very interesting way.‎ ‎ C: No, it’s too hard to understand spoken English.‎ ‎ 2) A: What about writing letters to a pen pal in America?‎ ‎ B: Yes, it helps to improve my writing skills and know a lot about ‎ America.‎ ‎ 3) A: Do you have conversations with friends in English?‎ ‎ B: Of course, we can talk about plenty of things like school, pets, ‎ movies, and our parents.‎ ‎ 2. 2c Role-play the conversation.‎ Step 8 Summary ‎ How do you study English?‎ ‎ 1. by working with friends ‎2. by watching English movies. ‎ ‎3. by making word cards. ‎ ‎4. by reading the textbook.‎ ‎5. by listening to tapes. ‎ ‎6. by asking the teacher for help. ‎ ‎7. by reading aloud.‎ ‎ …‎ Step 9 Language points ‎ 1. I study by working with a group.‎ ‎ 我通过小组活动来学习。‎ ‎ by作为介词，用法很多。请仔细观察下面的例句，分析by的用法，然后补 全结论部分所缺的内容。‎ ‎【例句】‎ ‎1) Come and sit by us.‎ ‎2) Peter goes to work by bus every day.‎ ‎3) Tony will come back by 10:00 pm.‎ ‎4) English is spoken by lots of people.‎ ‎5) My brother studies history by working with a group.‎ ‎【结论】‎ ‎1) by可表示位置，(1) “__________”，如句1。也有“从……旁边（经过）”之意。‎ ‎2) by可表示交通、传递等的方式，如句2。‎ ‎3) by可表示时间，“到（某时）之前；不迟于”，如句3。‎ ‎4) by可用于构成(2) ________，“被，由”，如句4。‎ ‎5) by可表示方式或手段，(3) “____________”结构在句中作方式状语，“通过……方式（方法）”或“借助……手段”，如句5。‎ ‎ Answers: (1) 在……旁边 (2) 被动语态 (3) by + V-ing形式 ‎ 【运用】根据提示，用含有by的短语完成各句。 1) Annie went to Beijing _______ (乘火车) yesterday.‎ ‎2) His grandfather made a living _________ (靠卖水果) in the past.‎ ‎ 3) The scientists have to arrive at the village _________ (八月以前). 4) Allen goes _______________ (经过邮局) on his way to school every ‎ morning. 5) The book was written ____________ (由几个工程师).‎ ‎ Answers: 1) by train 2) by selling fruits 3) by August 4) by the post office 5) by several engineers ‎ 2. What about reading aloud to practice pronunciation?‎ ‎ 大声朗读来练习发音怎么样？‎ 辨析aloud, loud和loudly aloud出声地；大声地。常与read/ call等词连用, 不用于比较级。‎ ‎ e.g. Don’t read aloud in the library. 不要在图书馆大声朗读。‎ ‎ loud 大声地；喧闹地。指说话声和笑声，常与talk/ speak/ laugh/ sing等词连用, 常用比较级。‎ ‎ e.g. We can’t hear you. Please speak louder. ‎ 我们听不到你的声音。请再大声点。‎ loudly 高声地；喧闹地。可以和loud互换，含有“吵闹”的意思，不悦耳。‎ ‎ What about/ How about…? ‎ ‎ 后跟名词，代词或v.-ing。用于征求意见。 ‎ e.g. What about a cup of tea? 喝杯茶怎么样？‎ ‎ How about you? 你呢？ ‎ ‎ What /How about going to the zoo this afternoon? ‎ 今天下午去动物园怎么样？ ‎ ‎ 3. It’s too hard to understand spoken English. ‎ ‎ 句中的it是形式主语, 不定式短语to understand spoken English是真正的主语。该句句型为: It’s+too+adj.+ (for sb.)+to do sth. 意思是“(对某人来说)做某事是……的”。如：‎ ‎ It’s too important to keep healthy.‎ ‎ It’s difficult for him to learn two languages.‎ ‎【链接】‎ ‎ too ... to ... 结构常表示“太……而不能……”, too后面接形容词或副词, to后面接动词原形。如：‎ ‎ The room is too dirty to live in.‎ ‎ He walks too slowly to get there on time.‎ ‎【运用】‎ ‎ 将下面的句子翻译成英语。‎ ‎ 1) 孩子们在那条河里游泳是危险的。‎ ‎ It’s dangerous for the children to swim in that river.‎ ‎ 2) 晚饭后散步太有必要了。‎ ‎ It’s too necessary to take a walk after supper.‎ ‎ 3) 水太烫, 不能喝。‎ ‎ The water is too hot to drink.‎ Step 10 Exercises ‎ Ⅰ. Choose the best answer.‎ ‎1. He goes to school ____ bike. ‎ ‎ A. by B. on C. in D. at ‎ ‎2. — How do you study English so well? ‎ ‎ — By ____ lots of books. ‎ ‎ A. read B. look C. watching D. reading ‎ ‎ Answers: A, D ‎ Ⅱ. Complete the following sentences.‎ ‎1. 大声朗读来练习发音怎么样？ ‎ ‎ What about ____________ to practice pronunciation? ‎ ‎2. 她通过读课本来学习英语。 ‎ ‎ She studies English __________ the textbook.‎ ‎3. She improves her English _______________ (通过加入英语俱乐部).‎ ‎ Answers: 1. reading aloud 2. by reading 3. by joining an English club ‎ Ⅲ. Translation.‎ ‎1. 老师要求我大声朗读课文。 ‎ ‎2. 不要这么大声。婴儿在睡觉。 ‎ ‎3. 我爸爸经常开车去上班。‎ ‎ Answers: 1. The teacher asked me to read aloud the text.‎ ‎ 2. Don’t talk so loudly. The baby is sleeping.‎ ‎ 3. My father often goes to work by car.‎ Step 11 Homework How do you study English? What about physics and Chinese?‎ Make a list.‎ ‎ ‎ Section A 2 (3a-3b)‎ Step 1 Revision ‎ Give the students some pictures, then let them talk about:‎ ‎ How do you study English?‎ ‎ I study by ______________.‎ Step 2 Reading ‎ 1. Warming up ‎ Look at the picture on page 3, then let the students talk about:‎ The girl is Wei Fen. What is she doing? Can you guess how she studies ‎ English ?‎ ‎ 2. Reading Finish 3a: Read the passage about Wei Fen and answer the questions.‎ ‎1) Why did Wei Fen find it difficult to learn English?‎ ‎2) What did she do in English class?‎ ‎3) What is the secret to language learning?‎ secret n. 秘密; 秘诀 adj. 秘密的; 保密的 Answers:‎ ‎1) The teacher spoke too quickly and Weifen did not understand her most of the time, but she was afraid to ask questions of her poor pronunciation.‎ ‎2) She hid behind her textbook and never said anything.‎ ‎3) For Wei Fen, the secret to language learning is listening to something interesting.‎ ‎ Finish 3b: Complete the sentences with what Wei Fen learned from watching movies. Use words and phrases from the passage.‎ ‎ 1) I can understand the meaning by watching their ______________ and the ‎ ‎__________ on their faces.‎ ‎2) I can get the meaning by listening for just the _________.‎ ‎3) My pronunciation improved by listening to the _____________ in English ‎ movies.‎ ‎4) I learned ______ sentences like “It’s a piece of cake” by watching the ‎ movies.‎ ‎5) I can find the meaning of the new words by looking them up in a _______.‎ Answers: body language expressions key words ‎ conversations useful dictionary expression n. 表情; 表示; 表达方式 Step 3 Language points ‎ ‎ 1. Why did Wei Fen find it difficult to learn English? ‎ ‎ find it difficult/hard to do sth. 发现做某事很困难 ‎ 【find用法归纳】‎ ‎ find sb. doing sth. 发现某人做某事 ‎ ‎ find it + adj. + to do sth. 发现做某事很……‎ find it + adj. to do sth.中的it是形式宾语, adj.做宾补, to do sth.是真正的宾语。同类的动词还有think, feel, consider等。‎ ‎ 【活学活用】‎ ‎1) I found it __________ (interest) to talk with my grandfather ‎2) I found it hard for me ___________ (improve) spoken English.‎ Answers: interesting, to improve ‎ 2. But I was afraid to ask questions because of my poor pronunciation. ‎ ‎ be afraid to do sth. 害怕去做某事 ‎ 【afraid用法归纳】‎ ‎ be afraid of sth./doing sth. 害怕做某事(担心出现某种不良后果)‎ ‎ be afraid to do sth. 害怕去做某事(“怕” 或“不敢”去做某事) ‎ ‎ be afraid +that 恐怕……(礼貌地说出令人不快、失望或感到遗憾的事) ‎ ‎【活学活用】‎ ‎ Tina is so shy that she is afraid of ____ in front of a group. ‎ ‎ A. to speak B. speak ‎ ‎ C. speaking D. spoke ‎ Answer: C ‎3. Then one day I watched an English movie called Toy Story. ‎ ‎ called=named 叫做 ‎ ‎ 【call用法归纳】‎ ‎ call sb.=telephone sb. =phone sb. =give sb. a call =ring sb. up ‎ ‎ 给某人打电话 ‎ ‎ call on sb. 拜访某人 ‎ ‎4. I discovered that listening to something interesting is the secret to language learning. ‎ ‎ discover v. 发现; 发觉 ‎ 指偶然或经过努力发现原来客观存在但不为人所知的事物。‎ ‎ e.g. Columbus discovered America in 1492. 哥伦布于1492年发现了美洲。 ‎ ‎5. I also learned useful sentences like “It’s ‎ ‎ a piece of cake” or “It serves you right.” ‎ ‎ a piece of cake和serves sb. right是英语中的两个习惯用语, 也可称作习语idiom(s)。同汉语中的成语类似, 习语是人们在长期的语言运用中约定俗成的一种固定表达方式, 其意思往往不是字面所表达的含义。‎ 如: a piece of cake表示事情非常简单、易于解决, 相当于汉语的“小菜一碟; 小事一桩”; serves sb. right则相当于汉语说某人“活该”。‎ ‎6. But because I wanted to understand the story, I looked them up in a dictionary.‎ ‎ look up (在词典、参考书中或通过电脑)查阅; 抬头看 ‎ 【look用法归纳】‎ ‎ look after 照顾 ‎ ‎ look like 看起来像 ‎ look out 当心, 小心 ‎ look through 浏览 ‎ look for 寻找 ‎ look forward to 期待 ‎ look around 向四周看 ‎ have/take a look 看一看 ‎ look over 检查 ‎ Step 4 Summary ‎ 发现做某事很难 find it difficult to do sth.‎ 语言学习的秘密 the secret to language learning 害怕做某事 be afraid to do sth.‎ 爱上 fall in love with 肢体语言 body language 脸上的表情 the expressions on the faces 关健词 key words 对……感兴趣 be interested in ‎ 语言学习的秘密 look up the word in the dictionary Step 5 Homework ‎ 1. Recite the important sentences in the passage on page 3.‎ ‎2. Remember the words and phrases in this lesson.‎ Section A3 (Grammar Focus—4c)‎ Step 1 Free talk Talk about the ways you learn other subjects. You can use the following phrases and sentences.‎ How do you learn Chinese/ math /physics/chemistry?‎ Do you learn history and geography by___________?‎ Step 2 4a Answer the questions. Then match the questions and answers.‎ ‎1. How do you practice speaking? 2. How do you learn new words? 3. How do you improve your writing? 4. How do you practice listening? 5. How do you improve your pronunciation? ‎ ‎6. How do you learn grammar?‎ a. By watching English programs.‎ b. By listening to a tape and repeating out loud.‎ c. By having conversations with friends.‎ d. By taking notes, doing exercises and reading a lot.‎ e. By making word cards.‎ f. By writing e-mails to my pen pals.‎ Step 3 4b Complete these statements. Use information that is true for you.‎ match physics chemistry Chinese history geography e.g. I usually practice my English by taking notes / reading books and newspapers / speaking English with my classmates / memorizing sentence patterns.‎ a. I usually practice my math by______. ‎ b. I usually practice my physics by_______. c. I usually practice my chemistry by____.‎ d. I usually practice my Chinese by _____.‎ e. I usually practice my history and geography by ________. ‎ Step 4 4c Check what you do to learn English . Then interview your partner.‎ A: Do you learn English by doing grammar exercises?‎ B: Yes, I do.‎ A: How often do you do them?‎ B:…‎ I learn English by…‎ My partner learns English by…‎ ‎ yes no how often yes no ‎ how often doing grammar exercises.‎ taking notes in English.‎ reading English magazines.‎ keeping a diary in English. ‎ using an English dictionary.‎ ‎…‎ Step 5 Grammar ‎ How do you learn English? I learn by studying with a group.‎ Do you learn English by reading aloud? Yes, 1 do. It helps my pronunciation.‎ How can I read faster? You can read faster by reading word groups.‎ How can I improve my pronunciation? One way is by listening to tapes.‎ 动名词 定义: 它是一种兼有动词和名词特征的非谓语动词形式。‎ 基本形式: V-ing 作用: 动名词具有名词的性质，在句中可以做主语、表语、宾语、定语等。‎ 动名词的基本用法 ‎1. 用作主语 所表动作比较抽象，或者泛指习惯性的动作。‎ e.g. Playing with fire is dangerous.‎ 注意：动名词做主语，有时先用it作形式主语，把动名词置于句末。这种用法在习惯句型中常用。 ‎ ‎1) It is no use/ good / useless + doing…‎ ‎2) It is a waste of time + doing …‎ ‎3) It is fun + doing …‎ 在以上结构中常用动名词作主语。‎ e.g. It’s no use crying over spilt milk. (覆水难收）‎ ‎ There is no joking about the matter.‎ It is fun playing with children. 和孩子们一起玩真好。 ‎ ‎2. 用作宾语 ‎1) 作动词的宾语 ‎ 常见的此类动词有：practise, enjoy, finish, give up, cannot help, keep, keep on, mind, miss, put off, depend on, think about, succeed in, worry about, be used to, get used to, look forward to, pay attention to等。‎ e.g. How do you practice speaking?‎ ‎ I have to finish reading a book and give a report.‎ ‎2) 作介词的宾语 ‎ ‎1. I learn English by doing grammar exercises.‎ ‎2. Shall we have a rest or get down to doing our work? ‎ ‎3. He was late again because of getting up late.‎ ‎4. Lock the doors and windows before going out. ‎ ‎5. What/How about the two of us playing games？‎ 活学活用 ‎1. She can’t help ________ (cry) after _________ (hear) the bad news.‎ ‎2. Do you feel like _______ (have) a break?‎ ‎3) 既可接动名词又可接不定式的常用动词有：remember, forget, regret, mean, try等，但表达的意义不同。‎ e.g. I remember seeing her at the hotel. ‎ ‎ 我记得在宾馆见过她。(动作发生了)‎ ‎ I will remember to see her at the hotel. ‎ ‎ 我记着要去宾馆见她。(动作尚未发生)‎ ‎ remember/forget/ regret to do 动作尚未发生 ‎ doing动作已经发生 try to do 设法、努力去做，尽力 doing 试试去做（看有何结果）‎ mean to do 打算做（主语一般是人）‎ doing意味着（主语一般是物）‎ regret to do 对将要做的事抱歉 doing 对已经发生的事感到后悔 stop to do停下去做另外一件事 doing停止做手头的事情 ‎3. 作表语 动名词作表语时句子主语常是表示无生命的事物的名词或what引导的名词性从句。表语动名词与主语通常是对等的关系，表示主语的内容，主语、表语可互换位置。 ‎ e.g. Your task is cleaning the windows. ‎ ‎ 你的任务就是擦窗户。‎ ‎ (Cleaning the windows is your task.) What I hate most is being laughed at. 我最痛恨的就是被别人嘲笑。 ‎ ‎ (Being laughed at is what I hate most.) ‎ 动名词有时态和语态的变化。‎ 动名词的时态和语态的基本形式：（以write为例）‎ ‎ 时态 语态 一般时 完成时 主动语态 writing ‎ having written ‎ 被动语态 being written ‎ having been written ‎ 注意：动名词的否定形式是：not writing ‎ 动名词的复合结构：‎ 动名词的逻辑主语＋动名词＝动名词的复合结构 Would you mind _____（我开窗户吗）？‎ Would you mind my / me opening the window?‎ my/ me 称为动名词的逻辑主语。‎ I can’t understand Jack /Jack’s leaving his wife.‎ I can’t understand his/him leaving his wife.‎ Jack’s/ His leaving his wife is unbelievable.‎ Step 6 Exercises ‎ ‎1. My watch needs ________, but I have no time to go to town to have it _______.‎ ‎ A. to repair; repaired ‎ ‎ B. to be repaired; repairing ‎ C. repairing; repaired ‎ ‎ D. being repaired; repaired ‎2. You should apologize to your sister for _____ her the truth.‎ ‎ A. telling B. not telling C. telling not D. not tell ‎3. ---The light in the office is still on.‎ ‎ ---Oh, I forgot ___________ it off.‎ ‎ A. turning B. turn C. to turn D. having turned ‎4. Hearing the bad news, the mother couldn’t help ________.‎ ‎ A. to cry B. crying C. cry D. cries ‎5. Our teacher told us to spend some time _______ English every day.‎ ‎ A. to practise speaking ‎ ‎ B. practising speaking ‎ C. to practise to speak ‎ ‎ D. practising to speak ‎6. It is no use _______ without doing.‎ A. to promise B. promising ‎ ‎ C. promise D. to be promised Step 7 Homework Write a short composition about how to learn English.‎ Section B 1 (1a-2e)‎ Step 1 Discussion Do you have difficulty in learning English? What things are difficult for you?‎ ‎1a Learning English can be difficult. What things are difficult for you? Read the list. Check (✓) the statements that are true for you.‎ ‎ ____ I can't pronounce some of the words.‎ ‎____ I can't always understand spoken English.‎ ‎____I don't know how to increase my reading speed.‎ ‎____I can't spell some English words.‎ ‎____I often make mistakes in grammar.‎ 注解: ‎ ‎1. I can’t always understand spoken English. ‎ ‎【解析】speak →spoke →spoken v.说 ‎ ‎【注意】部分动词的过去分词也可做该词的形容词：spoken 口语的 broken 坏掉的written 写作的 ‎2. I don’t know how to increase my reading speed. ‎ ‎【解析】“疑问词+动词不定式”作宾语 ‎【注意】what to do后不需要跟宾语 ‎ how to do后必须跟宾语 ‎【拓展】“疑问词+动词不定式”结构：‎ know，tell, wonder,‎ ask, find ‎ out, learn+‎ what, which, when, where,‎ how +‎ 动词不定式（to do）‎ ‎1b What other things are difficult for you? Make a list.‎ ‎1. I don’t know enough words to write well.‎ ‎2.____________________________________‎ ‎3.____________________________________‎ Step 2 Listening and speaking ‎ ‎ 1c Paul finds it difficult to learn English. Listen and complete the learning challenges he talks about.‎ Challenges ‎1. He can’t get the _____________ right.‎ ‎2 He ________ a lot of new words.‎ ‎3. He can’t always __________ when people talk to him.‎ ‎4. He doesn’t get much ________ practice.‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ Answers: pronunciation, forgets, understand, writing ‎1d Listen again. Complete the solutions.‎ Solutions ‎1. __________ can help.‎ ‎2. He can always ____________________ in his notebook and study them at home.‎ ‎3. He can __________________________ to practice speaking.‎ ‎4. He should find a ________ to practice writing.‎ Answers: Listening, write the new words, join an English language club, pen pal ‎1e Role-play conversations using the information in 1c and 1d.‎ ‎ A: I don’t have a partner to practice English with.‎ B: Maybe you should join an English club.‎ 注解: Maybe you should join an English club. ‎ ‎【解析】‎ join/join in/take part in ‎ ‎(1) join=be a member of 参加, 指加入某种组织，并成为其中的一员。‎ ‎ join the army / party 入伍/党 ‎ join the club 加入俱乐部 ‎◆ join in 后接活动名称 ‎◆ join sb. 加入到某个人群之中 ‎(2) take part in参加，指加入群体活动中并在活动中发挥重要作用。‎ Step 3 Discussion ‎2a What good learning habits can you think of? Make a list and discuss them with your partner.‎ Step 4 Reading ‎ ‎2b Read the passage quickly. Which four habits of successful learners are mentioned?‎ ‎2c Read the passage again and answer the questions.‎ ‎ 1. Does the writer think that everyone is born with the ability to learn well? Do you agree? Why or why not?‎ ‎ 2. Why is it a good idea to connect something you need to learn with something you are interested in?‎ ‎ 3. What do the sayings "use it or lose it" and "practice makes perfect" mean? Do you agree with them?‎ ‎4. Do good learners learn from mistakes or are they afraid of making mistakes?‎ ‎5. What study skills does the writer talk about? Do you have those study skills?‎ ‎6. Do you agree that learning is a lifelong journey? Why or why not? ‎ Step 5 Language points ‎ ‎1. It is also easier for you to pay attention to it for a long time. ‎ 该句句型是It is adj. for sb. to do sth.‎ ‎【注】若形容词表示事物特征的，如：easy, difficult, hard, important等，须用介词for。 ‎ It’s +adj. (kind, honest, friendly) + (of sb.) to do sth. ‎ ‎【注】若形容词表示人的性格、品质与特点，如：good, kind, nice, wrong等，用介词of。‎ ‎【中考链接】‎ It’s very convenient ___ us to buy train tickets now because we can buy them either ‎ from the station or on the Internet. (2012山东东营)‎ A. to  B. of  C. by  D. for Answer: D ‎ ‎2. Good learners often connect what they need to learn with something interesting. ‎ connect v. 意为“连接；与……有联系”‎ 当表示把两个物体（A和B）连接起来时，常用结构是connect A to / with / and B，其中to表示把A接到B上，多用来指动作而不指状态。‎ e.g. Connect the speaker to / with the record player, please.‎ ‎ The subway connects the train station and / with the airport.‎ ‎3. Good learners think about what they are good at and what they need to practice ‎ more.‎ ‎【think相关短语】‎ think about 想起，考虑 think of 想到，认为 think over 仔细考虑 think out 考虑好 think up 想出来 think through 认真地考虑 ‎4. Even if you learn something well, you will forget it unless you use it.‎ even though=even if 即使, 引导让步状语从句 ‎【注】even though 引导让步状语从句时，不能与but连用。‎ ‎【中考链接】‎ ‎—This dress was last year’s style. ‎ ‎— I think it still looks perfect ______ it has gone out this year.  (2012青海)‎ A. so that  B. as if ‎ C. even though  D. ever since ‎ Answer: C ‎5. …, they are not afraid of making mistakes.‎ ‎(1) be afraid of sth/doing sth害怕做某事，担心（出现某种不良后果）。 ‎ ‎(2) be afraid to do sth 害怕去做…, “怕” 或“不敢”去做某事。‎ ‎(3) be afraid +that 恐怕…, 用于礼貌地表达可能令人不愉快的消息。‎ ‎(4) 回答别人的提问时，可用省略形式I’m afraid so (not)。‎ ‎6. They even ask each other and try to find out the answers.‎ ‎(1) try on 试穿 ‎ ‎(2) try to do sth. 努力做某事，侧重尽力做 ‎(3) try doing sth. 试图做某事，侧重尝试做 ‎(4) try one’s best to do sth.= do one’s best to do sth. 尽某人最大努力做某事 find out寻找，查明 ‎【拓展】find/look for/find out 找 ‎(1) find v. 找到，强调找到的结果 ‎ ‎(2) look for 寻找，强调找东西的过程 ‎(3) find out 查明，找到，指经过调查，询问等弄清事实的真相 ‎7. But whether or not you can do this well depends on your learning habits. ‎ ‎1) 此句中whether or not you can do it well是个从句，用作整个句子的主语。这种从句叫作“主语从句”。又如：‎ ‎ Whether you did it right or wrong isn’t so important. What’s important is the ‎ ‎ experience you gained. ‎ ‎2) whether or not 是英语从句的一个连词结构，意思和功能相当于whether, 表示“是否”，常出现在宾语从句，主语从句中。使用时，也可把whether和or not分开，or not放到句尾。 例如:‎ ‎ I can’t tell whether or not the teacher likes me. 此句也可以写成: I can’t tell whether the teacher likes me or not.‎ ‎8. Knowledge comes from questioning. question在句子中作动词，是“质疑；质问；‎ 提问”的意思。例如：‎ ‎ I just accepted what he told me. I never thought to question it.‎ ‎ 当question用作动词，表示对某人或事物进行提问时，是一种十分正式的用法，有“提问；询问；审问”的意思。例如：‎ ‎ The police questioned him for three hours before letting him go.‎ Step 6 Groupwork ‎2e Do you think you are a good learner? What learning habits do you think are ‎ ‎ useful? Discuss with your group and share your ideas with the class.‎ ‎ A: I think another way to become a successful learner is by trying to think about ‎ the same thing in different ways.‎ B: I agree. I believe that…‎ Step 7 Exercise I. 写出下列短语 ‎1. 注意，关注 ‎2. 把…和…联系起来 ‎3. 天生具有…‎ ‎4. 取决于 ‎5. 即使 ‎6. 害怕 ‎7. 犯错误 ‎8. 向…学习 ‎9. 熟能生巧 II. 完成句子 ‎1. 好的学习者时常把他们需要学习的和有趣的东西联系起来。‎ ‎  Good learners often _______ what they need __ _____ ____ something ‎ interesting. ‎ ‎2. 即使你学得一些东西好，但你如果不用它将会忘记。‎ ‎ _____ __ you learn something well, you will forget it ______ you use it. ‎ ‎3. 好的学习者也不害怕犯错误。‎ ‎ Good learners are also ___ _____ __ making __________. ‎ Step 8 Homework Write a sentence using each word in the box.‎ brain n. connect v. overnight adv.‎ ‎ attention n review v. knowledge n.‎ ‎ ability n. active adj. wisely adv.‎ Section B 2 (3a-selfcheck)‎ Step 1 Free talk Talk about how we can learn English well with your partner.‎ How can we learn English well?‎ by taking part in relevant activities in English by reading English story book by listening to tapes over and over again by making word cards by watching videos Step 2 3a-3b ‎3a Your friend wants to improve his/her English and asks you for help. What are ‎ the three best ways to learn and why? Make some notes in the chart.‎ Best ways to learn Reasons ‎ Examples ‎1. Being interested in what you do If you are interested in something, your brain will be more active and …‎ If you like music, you can learn English by listening to English songs.‎ Taking part in relevant activities in English ‎ practice oral English by doing English game ‎ Reading some books improve your reading speed by reading English story books ‎3b Write a letter to your friend. Give him /her some advice about the best ways ‎ to learn English. Use your notes in 3a.‎ Use the following expressions to help you:‎ There are three good ways to …‎ I think you should…‎ If you do this, you will…‎ It is also a good idea to …because…‎ You could try to improve your English by…‎ This will help you to…‎ Sample ‎ Dear...,‎ ‎ There are three good ways to learn English. You can learn by making word cards, reading story books, listening to tapes and so on. I think you should learn English by reading some English story books. If you do this, you will improve your reading speed. …‎ Your friend, …‎ Step 3 Self check 1. Fill in the blanks with the words in the box.‎ practice develop remember prepare ‎ take notes until worry about everything Are you stressed out each time you have a test? You don’t have to be if you __________ smart study skills. Remember to ___________ in class and review them on your own or with friends after class. Then __________ what you learned by doing exercises. Try to study and _________ information bit by bit instead of waiting ________ the last minute to study ___________ at once. If you __________ well for a test, then there’s nothing to ___________!‎ ‎2. Number these sentences in order to make a conversation.‎ ‎_____What’s the matter?‎ ‎_____ Well, I practice my listening by listening to the tape over and over again until I can understand everything.‎ ‎_____ So you want to practice your listening?‎ ‎_____ Hi, Jake. I need your help.‎ ‎_____ Uh-huh. Do you have any advice?‎ ‎_____OK, I’ll try that.‎ ‎_____ I have a listening test next week.‎ ‎3. Give advice to these people.‎ ‎1. Jane is a very slow reader.‎ ‎ She should improve her reading speed _________________________________.‎ ‎2. Li Ming wants to improve his listening.‎ ‎ He could practice his listening __________________________________.‎ ‎3. Meiping doesn’t know many English words.‎ ‎ She could learn more words ____________________________.‎ Step 4 Exercises 单项选择题。‎ ‎1. Good learners often ask ____ because they know knowledge comes from_____.‎ ‎ A. question, question B. questions, questions ‎ ‎ C. questions, questioning D. questioning, questioning ‎ ‎2. I sometimes learn English by _______ English-language videos.‎ ‎ A. Watch B. watching ‎ ‎ C. looking D. looking at ‎3. —____ do you study for an English test?‎ ‎ —By making vocabulary lists.‎ ‎ A. What B. When ‎ ‎ C. How D. Who ‎4. Jean practices English by ________ English-language videos.‎ ‎ A. read aloud B. reading aloudly ‎ ‎ C. read aloudly D. reading aloud ‎5. My pronunciation is not good._______ reading aloud to practice pronunciation?‎ ‎ A. How B. What ‎ ‎ C. What about D. Can ‎6. ______ the English club at school is the best way to improve our English. ‎ ‎ A. Join B. Joined ‎ ‎ C. Joining D. Joins ‎7. If you don’t know a word, you must ______ in a dictionary. ‎ ‎ A. look it up B. look up it ‎ ‎ C. look over it D. look it out ‎ Step 5 Homework Make a conversation with your partner about how can we learn English well.‎ Unit 2 I think that mooncakes are delicious!‎ 教学目标：‎ ‎1语言目标：掌握本单元词汇，听懂、掌握谈论中外不同国家文化的语言材料。 ‎ ‎2 技能目标：能听懂语言材料，掌握听的技巧；能读懂介绍中外不同文化的文章。‎ ‎3 情感目标：通过开展角色表演等活动，培养学生阅读兴趣。通过本单元的阅读，培养学生的文化意识，陶冶思想情操。‎ 教学重点：‎ ‎(1) 短语:‎ Section A 1‎ the Water Festival, the Dragon Boat Festival, Spring Festival, the Lantern Festival, watch the races, a little crowded, like best, go…for one’s vacation, enjoy doing sth., eat out, five meals a day, put on, in two weeks, sound like, from…to…, be similar to, throw water at each other, wash away, have good luck, in the new year Section A 2 ‎ celebrate Middle-Autumn Festival, the shape of, carry …to…, shoot down, plan to do sth., try to do sth., refuse to do sth., fly up, so…that…,call out, lay out, start the tradition of Section A 3 ‎ one…, the other…, give…to…,take out, more and more popular Section B 1‎ dress up, care about, make money, used to, end up, warn sb. to do sth., expect sb. to do sth., wake up, find out, decide to do sth., promise to do sth., in need, ‎ Section B 2 ‎ introduce sb., make sb. do sth., give birth to life, not only…but also…‎ ‎(2) 句子:‎ Section A 1‎ Bill thinks that the races were not that interesting to watch.‎ Bill wonders whether they’ll have the sweet rice dumplings again next year.‎ What do you like best about the Dragon Boat Festival?‎ What did you do on your vacation?‎ But I believe that April is the hottest month of the year there.‎ I wonder if it’s similar to the water festival of Dai people in Yunnan Province.‎ Section A 2‎ Chinese people have been celebrating Middle-Autumn Festival and enjoying mooncakes for centuries.‎ They carry people’s wishes to the families they love and miss. ‎ However, most people think that the story of Chang’e is the most touching.‎ Whoever drank this could live forever.‎ Hou Yi was so sad that he called out her name to the moon every night.‎ How he wished that Chang’e could come back!‎ Section A 3‎ Do you know that there are two special days for parents in America?‎ I believe that there are many ways to show our love.‎ It is also a good idea to help parents to do something instead. ‎ Section B 1‎ Many would agree that when we think of Christmas, we probably think of gifts, Christmas trees and Santa Claus.‎ A Christmas Carol is a famous novel written by Charles Dickens.‎ He just cares about whether he can make more money.‎ Marley used to be just like Scrooge, so he was punished after he died.‎ He now treats everyone with kindness and warmth, spreading love and joy everywhere he goes.‎ Section B 2‎ Not only do people spread them around in different hiding places for an egg hunt, but they also give out these treats as gifts.‎ 教学难点：‎ ‎1. 学会运用宾语从句来表达句子。‎ ‎2. 学会运用what和how表达对某事物的感叹。‎ 课时划分 Period 1 Section A1 1a – 2d Period 2 Section A2 3a-3c Period 3 Grammar Focus - 4c Period 4 Section B1 1a-2e Period 5 Section B2 3a-3b self check Summary Section A 1 (1a – 2d)‎ Step 1: Warming-up ‎ What festivals do you like best?‎ What do you like best about your favourite festival?‎ Step 2: Presentation ‎1 .1a Look at the pictures and guess what festivals they are. Match the pictures with the descriptions.‎ ‎1. ___ The Water Festival in Thailand ‎2. ___ The Dragon Boat Festival in Hong Kong ‎3. ___ The Chinese Spring Festival in Beijing ‎4. ___ The Lantern Festival in Jiangxi ‎ Step 3 Listening ‎1b Listen and tell true or false.‎ ‎1. Bill thinks that the races were not that interesting to watch. T F ‎2. Mary thinks that the teams were fantastic. T F ‎3. Bill wonders whether they’ll have zongzi again next year. T F ‎4. Bill and Mary believe that they’ll be back next year to watch the races. T F Step 4 Speaking ‎1c Talk about the pictures in 1a. ‎ Make conversations.‎ Examples A: What do you like best about the Dragon Boat Festival?‎ B: I love the races. I think they’re fun to watch.‎ Step 5 Pair Work A: What do you like best about the …?‎ B: I love the ... I think that they’re...‎ Step 6 Listening ‎2a Listen to the conversation between Wu Ming and Harry and circle the correct words in sentences.‎ ‎1. Wu Ming and Harry are cousins/ strangers / friends.‎ ‎2. Wu Ming went to Singapore/ Hong Kong / Macao for his vacation.‎ ‎3. Wu Ming visited his relatives / friends / classmates.‎ ‎4. Wu Ming liked eating out / shopping / the Dragon Boat Festival best.‎ ‎2b Wu Ming did a lot of fun activities, but there were also downsides. Listen again and fill in the chart.‎ Fun activities Downsides Eating out Shopping Dragon Boat Festival in June Step 7 Speaking ‎ ‎2c Role play the conversations between Wu Ming and Harry. ‎ A: What did you do on your vacation?‎ B: I visited my cousins. I think that we ate five meals a day! I’ve put on five pounds. ‎ A: I guess the food was delicious, right?‎ Step 8 Role –play ‎ Watch the video and learn Water Festival. ‎ Read the conversation and tell “True” or “False”.‎ ‎1. Ben is going to Chiang Mai in two weeks. ( )‎ ‎2. Clara believes that April is the hottest month of the year there. ( )‎ ‎3. The Water Festival in Thailand is from April 13th to 15th. ( )‎ ‎4. The Thai new year is a time for cleaning and washing bad things. ( )‎ Role –play the conversation Step 8 Language points and summary ‎1. stranger n. 陌生人（可数名词）‎ ‎ strange adj. 陌生的，奇怪的 ‎ e.g. Don’t talk to strangers. 不要和陌生人说话。‎ ‎ There is nothing strange in the room. 房间里没有奇怪的东西。‎ ‎2. relative n. 亲属，亲戚 （可数名词）‎ ‎ e.g. They have a lot of relatives. 他们有许多亲戚。‎ ‎3. put on 增加（体重）；发胖；穿上 ‎ e.g. They’ve put on five pounds. 他们体重增加了5磅。‎ ‎ It’s cold outside. Please put on your coat. 外面冷，请穿上大衣。‎ ‎4. pound n. 磅；英镑（可数名词）‎ e.g. The desk weighs 5 pounds. 这张课桌重5磅。‎ ‎5. People go on the streets to throw water at each other.‎ ‎ throw at 抛向；泼向；洒向 ‎ 动词throw后接所投掷的物体，用介词at引入泼洒的对象。‎ ‎ e.g. On our way here, someone threw a stone at our car, but fortunately we were not hit.‎ ‎ 在我们来的路上，有人向我们的车投掷石块，所幸的是我们没被砸中。‎ ‎ It’s the first snow of the year, and the children are happily throwing snowballs at each other.‎ 这是今年的第一场雪，孩子们高兴地拿雪球相互抛着。‎ 短语: ‎ the Water Festival, the Dragon Boat Festival, the Chinese Spring Festival, the Lantern Festival, watch the races, a little, like…best, go…for one’s vacation, enjoy doing sth., eat out, five meals a day, put on, in two weeks, sound like, from…to…, be similar to, throw … at …, wash away, have good luck, in the new year 句子: ‎ Bill thinks that the races were not that interesting to watch.‎ Bill wonders whether they’ll have the sweet rice dumplings again next year.‎ What do you like best about the Dragon Boat Festival?‎ What did you do on your vacation?‎ But I believe that April is the hottest month of the year there.‎ I wonder if it’s similar to the water festival of Dai people in Yunnan Province.‎ Step 9 Grammar ‎ Grammar: 宾语从句 在复合句中，由一个句子充当宾语，这个句子叫做宾语从句。宾语从句由“关联词+主语+谓语”构成。引导宾语从句的常见关联词有that, if, whether, what, who, where, why和how等。‎ 从句原形 关联词 例句 陈述句 that（在口语或非正式文体中常省略）‎ I think (that) Halloween is a fun festival. ‎ Mary thinks (that) the teams were just fantastic. ‎ Many think (that) sharks are too strong to be ‎ endangered.‎ 一般疑问句 whether, if（在口语中 常用if）‎ I wonder if/whether they’ll have the races again next year. ‎ Ben wonders if/whether April is a good time to visit Thailand.‎ 特殊疑问句 who, what, which, ‎ when, where, how, why Could you please tell me where the restrooms are? ‎ Do you know when the bookstore closes today? ‎ Can you tell me who she is?‎ Step 10 Exercises ‎1. ( )—Do you know ____ Jane visits her grandparents?‎ ‎ —Once a week. ‎ ‎ A. how soon B. how often C. how long D. how far ‎2. ( ) —I want to know .‎ ‎ —Sorry. I’ve no idea. But she was here just now.‎ ‎ A. where is Ann B. where Ann is ‎ ‎ C. where was Ann D. where Ann was ‎3. ( ) —Hi, Bruce. Here is a letter for you. ‎ ‎ — Thanks. I wonder . A. who the letter was from B. who was from the letter C. who was the letter from D. who from the letter was ‎ ‎4. ( ) —Do you know_____?‎ ‎ —He is a dentist.‎ ‎ A. where he is from B. where is he from ‎ C. what does his father do D. what his father is ‎5. ( ) Could you tell me _____the cool T-shirt?‎ ‎ A. where you buy B. where do you buy ‎ C. where did you buy D. where you bought ‎6. ( ) Please tell me _____ to improve my English. ‎ ‎ A. how I can do B. what can I do ‎ ‎ C. what I can do D. how can I do 根据所给汉语填空 ‎1. Can you see the _________ (灯笼)over there? How beautiful they are!‎ ‎2. Parents often tell their children not to speak to _________ (陌生人). ‎ ‎3. I got a lot of gifts from my _________ (亲戚) on my birthday.‎ ‎4. Don’t eat too much, or you’ll _______ (增加) your weight.‎ ‎5. The car cost him 2000 ________ (英镑).‎ Step 11 Homework.‎ ‎1. Learn the new words and expressions by heart.‎ ‎2. Copy the sentences with the Objective Clause and learn them by heart.‎ Section A2 (3a – 3c)‎ Step1 Warming up ‎ Look at the picture. What festival do you think of? What do you know about the festival?‎ ‎ ‎ Step 2 Reading ‎3a Read the passage about Mid-Autumn Festival and answer the questions.‎ ‎ How do people celebrate the Middle-Autumn Festival?‎ ‎ What story is the reading about?‎ ‎3b Read the passage again. Put the events in the correct order.‎ ‎ ___ Feng Meng tried to steal the medicine.‎ ‎___ A goddess thanked Hou Yi by giving him magic medicine.‎ ‎___ Chang’e refused to give Feng Meng the medicine and drank it all.‎ ‎ 1 Hou Yi shot down the nine suns and saved the people on the earth.‎ ‎___ Hou Yi was very sad and watched the moon at night, and wished his wife could come back.‎ ‎___ As a result, Chang’e became light and flew up to the sky.‎ ‎___ Hou Yi planned to drink the medicine with his wife.‎ ‎ Answers: 4251763‎ ‎ 3c Without looking at the passage, try to complete the sentences with the correct ‎ words.‎ ‎ 1. People like to a_____ the full moon on Mid-Autumn night.‎ ‎2. The story of Chang’e is one of many t_________ folk stories.‎ ‎3. Hou Yi got m____ medicine for shooting down the nine suns.‎ ‎ 4. Feng Meng wanted to s____ the medicine.‎ ‎5. Hou Yi l___ out fruits and desserts in the garden.‎ ‎ Answers: admire, traditional, magic, steal, laid Step 3 Languages points ‎ ‎1. Chinese people have been celebrating Middle-Autumn Festival and enjoying ‎ mooncakes for centuries.‎ ‎ for centuries 几百年 ‎2. They carry people’s wishes to the families they love and miss. ‎ ‎ 它们把人们的祝愿带给他们热爱和想念的家人。‎ ‎ they love and miss是定语从句，修饰the families。‎ ‎3. However, most people think that the story of Chang’e is the most touching.‎ ‎ (1) the story of Chang’e is the most touching是宾语从句，关联词是that。‎ ‎ (2) 第一个most是“大多数”之意，第二个most在touching前面构成最高级。‎ ‎4. Whoever drank this could live forever.‎ ‎ 无论谁喝了这个都会长生不老。‎ ‎ whoever意为“无论谁，不管什么人”。类似的词有：whatever意为“无论什么”，whenever意为“无论何时”，wherever意为“无论在哪里”，‎ ‎ however意为“无论怎样”。它们等同于“no matter + wh⁃”结构。 ‎ ‎ Whoever drank this是主语从句，在句中作主语。‎ ‎5. Hou Yi was so sad that he called out her name to the moon every night.‎ ‎ 后羿那么伤心以至于他每天晚上对着月亮大喊她的名字。‎ ‎1) so …that …“如此 ……以至于 ……”，so是副词，其后跟形容词或副词，that后跟句子。如：‎ ‎ He was so happy that he jumped up.‎ ‎ 他那么高兴以至于跳了起来。 ‎ ‎2) call out … to… 对着……大喊……‎ ‎6. He quickly laid out her favourite fruits and desserts in the garden. ‎ Lay的用法：‎ 单词 意义 ‎(原形→单数第三人称形式→现在分词→过去式→过去分词)‎ lay 下(蛋)；产(卵)‎ lay→lays→laying→laid→laid lay out 铺开，摆开 e.g. He laid the map out on the table. ‎ ‎7. How he wished that Chang’e could come back！他多么希望嫦娥能回来呀！‎ ‎ 这是一个感叹句，其中Chang’e could come back是宾语从句。‎ Step 4 短语归纳 celebrate Mid-Autumn Festival, the shape of, carry …to…,shoot down, plan to do sth., try to do sth., refuse to do sth., fly up, so…that…,call out, lay out, start the tradition of Step 5 Homework ‎1. Learn the new words and expressions by heart.‎ ‎2. Retell the story of Chang’e.‎ ‎ Section A 3 (Grammar Focus-4c)‎ Step 1 Revision ‎ 宾语从句和感叹句 Step 2 Grammar focus ‎1. Pay attention to these objective clauses.‎ ‎1. I know that the Water Festival is really fun.‎ ‎2. I wonder if they’ll have the races again next year.‎ ‎3. I wonder whether June is a good time to visit Hong Kong.‎ ‎4. I believe that April is the hottest month in Thailand.‎ ‎2. Pay attention to these exclamatory statements.‎ ‎1. What fun the Water Festival is!‎ ‎2. How fantastic the dragon boat teams were!‎ ‎3. How pretty the dragon boats were!‎ ‎4. How delicious the food is in Hong Kong!‎ Step 3 Grammar ‎（一）宾语从句 ‎ 用作宾语的从句叫做宾语从句。掌握宾语从句的引导词、时态及语序是学习宾语从句的关键。仔细观察下面的例句，然后补全结论部分所缺的内容。 ‎ ‎【例句】‎ ‎1. She said (that) she would leave a note on the desk.‎ ‎2. He wants to know if/ whether you are a doctor.‎ ‎3. Do you know when he bought this pencil-box?‎ ‎4. Teresa told her son that leaves turn yellow in autumn.‎ ‎【结论】‎ A. 当宾语从句具有陈述意义时，用____引导。它在句子中只起引导作用，在口语中常可省略。当宾语从句具有疑问意义时，可用____或whether引导。它们在句子中的意思是____（如果 / 是否）。或者用连接代词（what, who, which等）或连接副词（when, where, how, why等）引导。‎ B. 宾语从句的时态一般受主句时态的影响。当主句是__________或一般将来时，宾语从句可以根据具体情况用适当的时态；当主句是一般过去时，从句要用相应的________。但当从句表示的是名言、客观真理或自然现象等时，一般_____ (不受/ 受)主句时态的限制，均用一般现在时。‎ C. 宾语从句要用_____ (陈述 / 疑问) 语序。‎ ‎ Answers: that，if，是否；一般现在时，过去时态，不受；陈述 Exercises:‎ Ⅰ. 把下列句子改为宾语从句的复合句。‎ ‎1. He said, “I have been to America”. He said _____ _____ _____ _____ to America.‎ ‎2. Is there a hotel near here? Do you know?‎ ‎ Do you know _________ _____ ____ a hotel near here?‎ ‎3. What sport do you like best?  Could you please tell me?‎ ‎ Could you please tell me _____ _______ ____ _____ ____?‎ ‎4. “The earth moves around the sun”, our English teacher told us.‎ ‎ Our English teacher told us that the earth ______ _______ the sun.‎ Answers: 1. that he had been; 2: if /whether there is; 3. what sport you like best; 4. moves around Ⅱ. 根据汉语意思完成句子。  ‎ ‎1. 我想知道你昨晚是怎么回家的。‎ ‎ I want to know __________________________.‎ ‎2. 王红告诉我昨天早上六点她正在做饭。‎ ‎ Wang Hong told me ___________________________________________.‎ ‎3. 我想知道我能否从你那里得到一些建议。‎ ‎ I wonder ____________________________________.‎ ‎4. 我们地理老师说地球围绕太阳转。‎ ‎ Our geography teacher said ____________________________.‎ Answers: 1. how you got home last night; 2. that she was cooking at 6:00 yesterday morning; 3. if/ whether I can get some advice from you; 4. that the earth goes around the sun ‎（二）感叹句 ‎ 用来表达喜、怒、哀、乐等强烈感情的句子叫感叹句。感叹句一般用what或how引导，句末用感叹号。what修饰名词，how修饰形容词或副词。 ‎ ‎1. what引导的感叹句:‎ ‎1) What + a/ an + adj. + 可数单数(+主谓语)! ‎ ‎ e.g. What a brave boy (Tom is)!‎ ‎ What an excellent idea (it is)!‎ ‎2) What + adj. + 可数名词复数(+主谓语)! ‎ ‎ e.g. What beautiful pictures (they are)!‎ ‎3) What + adj. + 不可数名词(+主谓语)! ‎ ‎ e.g. What delicious food (it is)!‎ ‎2. how引导的感叹句：‎ How + adj. / adv. + 主语 + 谓语! ‎ e.g. How happy the children were!‎ ‎ How carefully he is reading! ‎ 注意：一般情况下，以what和how开头的感叹句可以相互转换，转换后意义不变。‎ e.g. What a tall building it is! = How tall the building is! ‎ Exercises:‎ Ⅰ. 根据句意选出恰当的一项填空。‎ ‎1. ______ (What / What a) delicious chicken we are having!‎ ‎2. ______ (What / How) warm it is in the classroom! ‎ ‎3. ______ (What / What a) nice shirt you bought!‎ ‎4. _____ (What / How) fast the young man is walking!‎ ‎ Answers: What, How, What a, How Ⅱ. 将下列句子改为感叹句。‎ ‎1. The girl is very clever. _____ ______ the girl is!‎ ‎2. It is a wonderful experience. _____ ______ wonderful experience it is!‎ ‎3. The wind is blowing strongly. _____ _______ the wind is blowing!‎ ‎4. The news is exciting. _____ _______ news it is!‎ ‎5. The sweaters are very nice. _____ ______ sweaters they are!‎ ‎ Answers: 1. How clever; 2. What a; 3. How strongly; 4. What exiting; 5. What nice Step 4 Practice ‎4a Write sentences using the words given.‎ 1. ‎ think/ Lantern Festival/ beautiful ‎ I think that the Lantern Festival is beautiful.‎ ‎2. don’t know/ whether/ he/ come home/ for the festival ‎3. believe/ Water Festival/ most/ fun ‎4. wonder/ if/ mooncakes/ delicious ‎5. how/ exciting/ races ‎6. what/ interesting/ city ‎ Answers: 2. I don’t know whether he will come home for the festival.‎ ‎ 3. I believe that the Water Festival is the most fun.‎ ‎ 4. I wonder if mooncakes are delicious.‎ ‎ 5. How exciting the races are!‎ ‎ 6. What an interesting city!‎ Step 5 Reading ‎ ‎4b Read the passage below and underline the objective clauses. If possible, write your own sentences about Mother’s Day and Father’s Day using objective clause.‎ Answers: 1. Do you know that there are two special days for parents in America?‎ ‎ 2. I heard that it is becoming more and more popular to celebrate Mother’s Day and Father’s Day in China. ‎ ‎ 3. I wonder if children over there also give similar gifts to their parents. ‎ ‎ 4. I believe that there are many ways to show our love. ‎ ‎ Learn the new words: tie.‎ Step 6 Speaking ‎4c Which festival do you like best? Ask your group and report to the class.‎ e.g. In our group, David’s favorite festival is …He thinks that….‎ Step 7 Pairwork Make a conversation.‎ A: There are many festivals in China. Which festival do you like best?‎ B: I think I like Mid-Autumn Festival best.‎ A: Why do you like it best? ‎ B: I think I can enjoy delicious mooncakes.‎ Step 8 Languages points and exercises ‎1. It is also a good idea to help parents to do something instead.‎ ‎ It是形式主语， to help parents to do something 是真正主语。类似句型有：‎ ‎ It is + n. + to do sth.‎ ‎ It is + adj. (for sb.) to do sth.‎ ‎ It takes (sb.) sometime + to do sth.‎ ‎ e.g. It is not a good habit to get up late. 赖床不是一个好习惯。‎ ‎ It is very important for young people to learn English well.‎ ‎ 对于年轻人来说，学好英语是很重要的。‎ ‎ It took the workers almost two years to finish the building.‎ ‎ 工人们花了几乎三年的时间完成这一建筑。‎ ‎2. One is Mother’s Day on the second Sunday of May, and the other is Father’s Day…‎ ‎ 辨析another, the other, others & the others ‎ another和the other都有“另一个”的意思。another指多个中的“另一个”；the other则指两个中的“另一个”，常与one构成固定one ... the other ...，“一个……另一个……”。 ‎ ‎ e.g. The shoes don’t fit me. Would you please show me another pair?‎ ‎ 鞋不适合我，你能给我看看另外一双吗？‎ ‎  My sister has two skirts. One is yellow, the other is black.‎ ‎ 我姐姐有两条裙子。一条是黄色的， 另外一条是黑色的。‎ ‎ others (=other+复数名词)与the others (=the other+复数名词)均含有“其他一些”的意思。others泛指多部分中的一部分，可与some构成固定结构some ... others ...，“一些……一些……”；the others则特指剩余的一部分。 ‎ ‎ e.g. Some like fruit and vegetables, others like junk food.‎ ‎ 一些人喜欢吃水果和蔬菜，还有一些人喜欢吃垃圾食品。‎ ‎ Two of you can go to the lab with me, and the others will have to stay in the ‎ classroom.‎ ‎ 你们当中的两人可以跟我去实验室，剩下的人将呆在教室。‎ Exercises 选择another, the other, others 或 the others填空。‎ ‎1. There are two rulers on the table. One is long, ________ is short.‎ ‎2. This schoolbag is the worst of all. Can you show me _______ one?  ‎ ‎ 3. You should learn from _______.‎ ‎4. There are 40 students in the class. 70% of them are from towns and cities, _________ are from the countryside.‎ ‎ Answers: the other, another, others, the others Step 9 Homework Father’s Day /Mother’s Day is coming. Think what you are going to buy or do for your father or mother. ‎ Write an short passage about it. (at least three objective clauses)‎ Begin with:‎ I think that …‎ Section B 1 (1a-2e)‎ Step 1 Presentation ‎ Show some pictures and words related to Halloween.‎ ‎ Let students say something about Halloween.‎ Step 2 Listening ‎ 1. Finish 1a: Look at the pictures and words related to Halloween. What do you ‎ think this festival is about? ‎ ‎ scary dress up haunted house black cat ‎ candy ghost trick or treat October spider ‎ Learn the new words: haunted, ghost, trick, treat, spider ‎ 2. Finish 1b: Listen and answer the questions.‎ ‎ 1) Where is Halloween popular?‎ ‎ It’s popular in North America.‎ ‎2) When do people celebrate Halloween?‎ ‎ They celebrate Halloween on October 31th.‎ ‎3) What does Wu Yu think of this festival?‎ ‎ Wu Yu thinks it is a fun festival.‎ ‎ 3. Finish 1c: Listen again and fill in the blanks.‎ ‎ 1) Many people make their ______ look scary. They may _______ the lights and light candles. They sometimes also put things like spiders and ghosts around the doors and ________.‎ ‎2) Little kids and even parents ________ as ghosts or black cats. They can also dress up as fun things like _______ characters.‎ ‎3) Parents take their children around the neighborhood to ask for _______ and treats.‎ ‎4) “Trick or treat” means kids will ______ a trick on you if you don’t ____ them a treat.‎ ‎ Answers: houses, turn off, windows, dress up, cartoon, candies, play, give Step 3 Pairwork ‎ 1d Think about the Halloween activities that interest you most. Discuss what you have learned with a partner.‎ Step 4 Reading ‎ 1. Warming up: give students some pictures about Christmas and finish 2a .‎ ‎2. Reading tasks:‎ ‎ 1) Introduce Charles Dickens. ‎ ‎ 2) Finish 2b: Read the passage about Christmas and answer the questions.‎ a. What are the common things that people think of for Christmas?‎ ‎ Gifts, Christmas trees and Santa Claus.‎ b. Who wrote A Christmas Carol?‎ ‎ Charles Dickens wrote A Christmas Carol.‎ c. What is the true meaning or spirit of Christmas?‎ ‎ The true spirit of Christmas is the importance of sharing and giving love and joy to people around us.‎ ‎ 3) Finish2c: Read the passage again and complete the chart.‎ the Ghost of Christmas Past?‎ ‎ His happier days as a child.‎ the Ghost of Christmas Present?‎ ‎ How others are spending ‎ Christmas that year.‎ the Ghost of Christmas Yet to come?‎ ‎ He is dead, but nobody cares.‎ ‎ Learn some new words: present, dead ‎ 4) Finish 2d: Answer the questions. Some answers need to be inferred.‎ ‎ a. Why does Scrooge hate Christmas?‎ ‎ He is mean and only thinks about himself. He doesn’t treat others nicely. He just cares about whether he can make more money. ‎ b. Does Scrooge have a lot of friends? Why or why not?‎ ‎ No, he doesn’t. Because he wasn’t nice to people and never laughs or smiles. He is mean and only thinks about himself.‎ c. Why was Jacob Marley punished after he died?‎ ‎ He was punished because like Scrooge, he wasn’t nice to others and only ‎ cared about money.‎ d. Does Jacob Marley want to help Scrooge? How do you know?‎ ‎ Yes, he does. Because Marley’s ghost tried to warn Scrooge to change his ways so as not to end up like him.‎ e. How does Scrooge feel when he wakes up on Christmas Day?‎ ‎ He feels relieved because he was scared in his sleep and he is surprised and happy to have a chance to change his life, because it is only the next morning.‎ f. What does Scrooge do after seeing three spirits?‎ ‎ He decides to change his life and promises to be a better person. He happily celebrates Christmas with his relatives. He also gives gifts to people in need. He now treats everyone with kindness and warmth, spreading love and joy everywhere he goes.‎ ‎ Learn some new words: punish, warmth Step 5 Language points ‎ ‎ 1. But behind all these things lies the true meaning of Christmas…‎ ‎ lie v. (lay, lain) 存在; 平躺; 处于 ‎ 注意与lay的区别：‎ ‎ lay v. (laid, laid)下蛋; 产卵 ‎ ‎ 【运用】用lie或lay的适当形式填空。‎ ‎ 1) ________ in bed all the time is bad for your health.‎ ‎ 2) The hen _____ an egg every day.‎ ‎ 3) My mother ____ on the sofa for about an hour this morning.‎ ‎ 4) The duck _____ three eggs last week.‎ ‎ Keys: Lying, lays, lay, laid ‎2. He warns Scrooge to change his ways if he doesn’t want to end up like him.‎ ‎ warn v. 警告; 告诫 ‎ 常用于以下固定短语: warn sb. (not) to do sth. 表示“警告某人(不要)干某事”；warn sb. of/about sth. 表示“提醒 / 警告某人注意某事”。如: ‎ The police warned us not to go out at night. ‎ They warned him of the danger. ‎ She warned her son about the fire. ‎ end up 最终成为; 最后处于 ‎3. The Spirit of Christmas 圣诞精神(圣诞节的意义)‎ ‎ He also tells Scrooge to expect three spirits to visit him.‎ ‎ 他还告诉斯克鲁奇准备好等待三个幽灵的造访。‎ ‎ 第一个短语中spirit指与肉体相对而言的“精神; 心灵”解; 第二个句子中spirit是“灵魂; 鬼怪; 幽灵”之意。‎ 试比较:‎ I shall be with you in spirit.‎ 我在精神上也你们同在。‎ In the story, it is said that the area is haunted by evil spirits.‎ 在故事里, 据说那片地区闹鬼。‎ ‎4. He is mean and only thinks about himself. ‎ ‎ mean在句中作形容词, 意思是“吝啬的; 小气的; 自私的”。如:‎ ‎ Mr. Smith is a mean old man.‎ ‎ 史密斯先生是一个小气的老头。‎ ‎ He was mean to those who worked for him.‎ ‎ 他对那些为他工作的人刻薄小气。‎ ‎ Some people around us are mean with money.‎ ‎ 我们周围有些人在金钱方面十分吝啬。‎ ‎5. He now treats everyone with kindness and warmth, spreading love and joy everywhere he goes.‎ ‎ 他现在用善良和温暖对待任何人, 到处传播爱与快乐。‎ ‎ spread v. (spread, spread) 传播; 展开 ‎ n. 蔓延; 传播 Step 6 Summary dress up, care about, make money, used to, end up, warn sb. to do ath., ‎ Step 7 Homework ‎ 1. Finish 2e on page 15: What do you think the three ghosts say to Scrooge ‎ when they visit him? In groups of four, make a conversation between the three ghosts and Scrooge. Role-play the conversation next time.‎ ‎2. Remember the new words and expressions.‎ Section B 2 (3a—Self check)‎ Step 1 Revision Get the students to read the things about Christmas.‎ 根据给出的单词首字母填空。‎ A Christmas Carol is a famous novel w______ by Charles Dickens. It t_____ us the true m_________ of Christmas: the i___________ of sharing and giving love and joy to people around us. ‎ ‎ The story is about an old man n_______ Scrooge who never laughs or smiles. He is mean and only t______ about himself, and doesn’t treat others n_______. He just cares about w_______ he can make more money. And he hates Christmas. One Christmas Eve, Scrooge sees Marley was p_______ after he died. That night, three ghosts v____ Scrooge. They t_____ him to see his childhood, how others are spending Christmas this year and the f______. Scrooge is so scared t____ he wakes up in his bed and f_____ out it is already the next morning on Christmas Day! He d______ to change his life and p_______ to be a better person. He now treats everyone with kindness and w_______, spreading love and joy everywhere he goes. And that is the true s_____ of Christmas!‎ Step 2 Role-play In groups of four, make a conversation between the three ghosts and Scrooge about Christmas.‎ Scrooge: Why do you visit me?‎ Ghost A: Because you look so sad. I want to take you back to your childhood. ‎ Scrooge: I’m so happy as a child.‎ Ghost B: Yes. Do you know other people how to spend Christmas? Everyone is happy, even poor people.‎ Ghost C: Hey, I want to take you to the future.‎ Scrooge: I know the spirit of Christmas. I decide to change my life and to be a better ‎ person.‎ Step 3 Free talk Talk about your favorite festival, use the following questions.‎ When is it celebrated in/on…?‎ What do you like best about…?‎ How do people celebrate…?‎ Why do they do that?‎ Step 4 3a-3b(writing)‎ ‎3a Your English-speaking pen pal wants to know about your favorite Chinese festival. Make some notes about the festival.‎ What is the name of the festival?‎ Middle-Autumn Festival When is it?‎ on August 15th of Chinese lunar calendar What do people eat?‎ mooncakes What do people do?‎ People can enjoy the full moon in the dark sky.‎ Why do you like it so much?‎ Because it makes me happy.‎ ‎3b Write a letter to your pen pal and tell him/her about your favorite Chinese festival. Use your notes in 3a.‎ 帮你构思：‎ In your letter:‎ First, introduce the festival and when it is celebrated.‎ Then talk about what people do and eat.‎ Finally, explain why you like it best and how it makes you feel.‎ Use the following expressions to help you:‎ My favorite Chinese festival is…‎ It is celebrated in / on …‎ During this festival, people…‎ It’s my favorite festival because…‎ It makes me feel…‎ Sample ‎ The Middle-Autumn Festival is one of the traditional Chinese festivals, it is often ‎ celebrated in September or October. During the festival, family members get together and eat mooncakes. There are various kind of delicious mooncakes. On ‎ the evening of the Middle-Autumn Festival, people can enjoy the full moon in the ‎ dark sky. I like Mid-Autumn Festival because it makes me happy.‎ Step 5 Self-check ‎1. Complete the passage with the words in the box.‎ spread…around, between… and, give out, business, lay, relatives Many Western countries celebrate Easter. This holiday is always on a Sunday ____ March 22nd ____ April 25th. It celebrates the beginning of new life. Hens _____ eggs, giving birth to life. So an egg is a symbol of new life. A popular activity during Easter is to hide eggs around your home or garden for friends or _________ to find. These can be real eggs, but they are more often chocolate eggs. Not only do people _______ them ________ in different hiding places for an egg hunt, but they also ______ these treats as gifts. So just like Christmas, Easter creates good ________ for supermarkets and chocolate stores. ‎ Keys: between, and, lay, relatives, spread, around, give out, business ‎2. Rewrite these sentences as exclamations.‎ 1. The mooncakes are delicious. ‎ ‎ ➠How ____________________________!‎ How delicious the mooncakes are！‎ ‎2. The festival will be fun. ‎ ‎➠What ________________________!‎ ‎ What fun will the festival be!‎ 3. This concert is boring. ‎ ‎➠How _______________________!‎ How boring this concert is!‎ 3. I’m really excited. ‎ ‎➠How ________________________!‎ How excited am I!‎ 4. The band played really loud music. ‎ ‎➠What ________________________!‎ What loud music the band played!‎ ‎3. Make sentences about a festival/festivals you like using these words+ ‎ that/whether/if.‎ ‎ I think ____________________________.‎ ‎ I know____________________________.‎ ‎ I believe __________________________.‎ ‎ I wonder __________________________.‎ Step 6 Language points Not only do people spread them around in different hiding places for an egg ‎ hunt, but they also give out these treats as gifts.‎ 句中的not only ... but (also) ... 意为“不但……而且……”。当not only位于句首时，其后的主谓要部分倒装。此外，当not only ... but (also) ... 连接两个代词或名词作主语时，谓语动词要与but (also)后的代词或名词在数上保持一致。如：‎ Not only he but also I am wrong.‎ Not only books but also water is needed.‎ Step 7 Exercises 单选题。‎ ‎1. _____ good advice! It’s so helpful to us.‎ ‎ A. How B. What C. What a ‎2. —____ excellent work you have done!‎ ‎ —It’s very kind of you to say so.‎ ‎ A. What an B. How C. What ‎3. —____ interesting the storybook is!‎ ‎ —Yes. I have read it twice.‎ ‎ A. What B. What an C. How D. How an ‎4. ____ great picture! Who painted it?‎ ‎ A. How B. What C. How a D. What a ‎5.—How long does it take to get to the airport?‎ ‎ —Forty minutes. But it’s foggy today. I’m not sure ___ the highway will closes ‎ ‎ soon. Let’s set off earlier.‎ ‎ A. whether B. when C. how D. why ‎6. Could you say it again? I can’t understand ____ you are talking about. ‎ ‎ A. how B. when C. what D. which ‎ ‎7. What a nice paper fish! Can you show us ________ you make it?‎ ‎ A. whether B. how C. why D. what ‎ ‎8. When H7N9 bird flu first appeared, people didn’t know ________ doctors ‎ could cure it.‎ ‎ A. if B. that C. what D. why Keys: 1-5 BCCDA 6-8 CBA Step 8 Homework Write an article about your favorite festival.‎ ‎ Unit 3 Could you please tell me where the restrooms are?‎ 一、教学目标：‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标 基本词汇：restroom, stamp, bookstore, postcard, pardon, washroom, bathroom, normal, rush, suggest, staff, grape, central, mail, east, fascinating, convenient, mall, clerk, corner, polite, politely, speaker, request, direction, correct, direct, whom, address, underground ‎ 基本句型：Excuse me, do you know where I can buy some medicine?‎ ‎ Sure. There’s a supermarket down the street.‎ ‎ Could you please tell me how to get to the post office?‎ ‎ Sorry, I’m not sure how to get there.‎ I wonder where we should go next.‎ Could you tell us when the band starts playing this evening?‎ You should try that new ride over there.‎ ‎2. 技能目标: （1）能用宾语从句礼貌的寻求帮助。‎ ‎ （2）能用正确的方法指路。‎ ‎3. 情感目标: 培养学生尊重他人，对人有礼貌，热爱生活。‎ 二、教学重难点： ‎ ‎1. 教学重点：（1）礼貌的向他人寻求帮助。‎ ‎ （2）正确使用宾语从句。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：运用宾语从句礼貌的寻求帮助。‎ 三、教学步骤:‎ Section A 1 (1a-2d)‎ Step 1 Warming –up ‎ ‎ Greeting ‎ Step 2 Presentation ‎（1）Guessing game Show pictures to the whole class, one student explains the places in English and another one who doesn’t look at the blackboard guesses what place it is. For example, one student say: We can save money or exchange money in this place, another one guess it is a bank. Get students to guess the places like bank, post office, bookstore, museum, bathroom, washroom, mall and so on.‎ ‎（2）Show some stamps to students and present the new sentences: ‎ Could you tell me where I can buy some stamps? ‎ Could you please tell me where I can get a dictionary? ‎ Do you know where I can get some magazines?‎ Step 3 Practice 1) Match each thing with a place in the picture in 1a.‎ 1) Read the phrases.‎ ‎___ get some money ‎___ get some magazines ‎___ have dinner ‎___ get a dictionary ‎___ get some information about the town ‎___ buy a newspaper ‎___ buy some stamps ‎___ get a pair of shoes Step 4 Listening Listen and complete the conversations in the picture in 1a. Then check the answers with the whole class.‎ Step 5 Practice Make conversations using the information in 1a. Then talk about your own city. For example:‎ A: Excuse me, could you please tell me how to get to the bookstore?‎ B: Sure, just go along Main Street until you pass Center Street. The bookstore is on your right, beside the bank.‎ A: Thanks. Do you know when the bookstore closes today?‎ B: It closes at 7:00 p.m. today.‎ A: Thank you!‎ B: You’re welcome.‎ Step 6 Listening ‎1. Listen and number the directions in the order that you hear them.‎ ‎2a You will hear some of the directions below. Number the directions in the order you hear them. ‎ ‎ ___ Go to the bird floor.‎ ‎___ Turn left.‎ ‎___ Go to the second floor. ‎ ‎___ Turn right.‎ ‎___ The supermarket is between the flower store and the bookstore.‎ ‎___ Go past the bookstore.‎ ‎2. Listen again. Show how the boy walks to the supermarket. Draw a line in the picture in 2a. Then get one student draw the line on the blackboard.‎ ‎ ‎ ‎3. Listen the third time and answer the questions.‎ ‎1) Excuse me, can you tell me where I can buy some medicine?‎ ‎2) Do you know how to go there?‎ ‎3) OK, great. Oh, and one more thing. Do you know when this shopping center closes tonight? ‎ ‎4) OK, thanks a lot. ‎ Step 7 Pairwork ‎ Make conversations about the other places in the picture in 2a.‎ A: Excuse me. Can you tell me where I can buy some stamps?‎ B: Yes, there’s a post office in this shopping center.‎ A: Do you know how to go there?‎ B: Yes. Go to the third floor and turn right. Then go past the bank. The post office is between museum and library. You should be able to get stamps.‎ A: OK, great. Oh, and one more thing. Do you know …‎ B: I’m not sure, but you …‎ A: OK, thanks a lot. ‎ B: You’re welcome.‎ Step 8 Reading ‎ ‎1. Read the conversation in 2d and answer the questions.‎ ‎2. Role – play the conversation.‎ ‎3. Explain the language pints in 2d.‎ ‎(1) Go along Main Street until you pass Center Street.‎ ‎1) until和 till同义为“直到……” ，till多用于口语，until可以放在句首，till则不能放在句首。 ‎ ‎2) not...until“直到……才”，表示直到某一时间, 某一行为才发生, 之前该行为并没有发生。‎ e.g. I did not study English until 9 o'clock last night. ‎ ‎(2) Pardon? Restroom? You already want to rest? But we haven’t even started yet!‎ ‎1) pardon用作动词，后面既可以跟宾语，也可以跟双宾语；pardon sb. for doing sth.意为“原谅/宽恕某人做某事” ‎ e.g. Can you pardon me for not passing the exam, Mom?‎ ‎2) 在没有听懂对方的话，请对方重复一 下时也可说 pardon。‎ e.g. Pardon? I’m sorry I can’t follow you.‎ ‎(3) I’m excited to try the rides!‎ excited和 exciting的区别:‎ 1) excited意为“激动的；兴奋的”，作表语时，主语通常是人；作定语时，常用来修饰人，说明激动的表情。 ‎ e.g. All of us were excited when we heard the good news.‎ ‎ The excited child opened his present quickly. ‎ ‎2) exciting意为“激动人心的”，作表语时，主语通常是物；作定语时，常用来修饰物。‎ e.g. The movie is very exciting.‎ ‎ My father told me an exciting story.‎ ‎(4) I mean … you know, a washroom or bathroom. ‎ mean作动词有以下含义：‎ ‎1) 有……的意思，指（多作及物动词），其后可跟名词或代词，也可跟从句。‎ e.g. What does this word mean? ‎ ‎2）意味（着）（及物动词），常跟名词，有时可跟动词-ing形式或从句。 ‎ e.g. Carl really could not do that — it would mean the end of his career.‎ ‎3）有……意图，打算，想，常跟名词、代词或动词不定式。跟带不定式 ‎ 的复合结构时，还可用于被动语态。‎ e.g. I never meant to hurt you.‎ ‎(5) We normally say “toilets” or “washrooms”.‎ normally adv. 正常地; 通常地，一般地 e.g. August is normally a slow month.‎ ‎(6) Nine thirty, so you don’t need to rush! ‎ rush v. 仓促; 匆忙  n. 仓促; 匆忙 e.g. Then three policemen rushed at him. (rush v.)‎ They made a rush for the door. (rush n.)‎ Step 9 Summary ‎ ‎1) Excuse me. Where is Qiaotou Middle School?‎ ‎2) Excuse me. Could you tell me where Qiaotou Middle School is?‎ ‎3) Excuse me. Do you know how I can get to Qiaotou Middle School?=Do you know how to get to Qiaotou Middle School?‎ ‎4) Excuse me. Which is the way to Qiaotou Middle School?‎ Step 10 Homework Make conversations about your own town/city.‎ Section A 2 (3a-3b)‎ Step 1 Revision ‎ ‎1) Translate the sentences into English.‎ ‎① 请你告诉我，怎样去书店好吗？‎ ‎② 打扰了，你知道我在哪能买到一些邮票吗？‎ ‎③ 我想知道公园今天什么时候关门。‎ ‎④ 银行和超市之间有一个餐馆。‎ ‎2) Role-play the conversation in 2d.‎ Step 2 Presentation ‎ ‎1) Show a picture of fun park. Ask students: Are you excited to try these in the fun park? ‎ ‎2) Show a ride to them and say: How do you think the ride? Is it fun or scary? Do you want to have a try?‎ Step 3 Reading ‎ ‎1) Read the conversation in 3a quickly and true or false the sentences.‎ ‎① Alice and He Wei are in Water World.‎ ‎② The new ride looks scary.‎ ‎③ Alice was scary at first.‎ ‎④ Alice thinks the new ride is actually fun.‎ ‎⑤ He Wei thinks Fun Times Park restaurant severs delicious food.‎ ‎⑥ A rock band plays in Water World Restaurant every evening.‎ ‎⑦ Alice and He Wei can go later to the restaurant.‎ ‎2) Read the conversation again and answer the questions in 3a.‎ ‎1. Why did Alice not want to go on the new ride? How did she feel after the ride?‎ ‎2. What is special about Uncle Bob’s restaurant?‎ ‎3. Should Alice and He Wei get there early for dinner? Why?‎ Step 4 Practice ‎ Underline the questions or statements in the conversation that ask for information. Rewrite them in a different way.‎ e.g. I wonder where we should go next.‎ Could you tell me where we could go next?‎ Check the answers with the whole class.‎ Step 6 Language points ‎ ‎1. I was scared at first, but shouting did help.‎ ‎ 此句相当于I was scared at first, but shouting really helped. 原句是一种表现强调的句式，英语中，可用助动词do对谓语动词进行强调，构成强调句。‎ e.g. Please do be careful. 请一定小心。‎ I do agree with you. 我完全同意你的意见。‎ He did warn you other day, remember? 他前两天就告诫过你，还记得吗？‎ ‎2. You never know until you try something.‎ ‎ try的用法 ‎ 1) 做名词 have a try 试一试 e.g. Why not have a try? 为什么不试一试？ ‎ ‎ 2) 做动词 (1) try to do sth. 努力做某事 e.g. Well, we’ll try to finish the homework in time. ‎ ‎ 那好。我们争取及时完成作业。‎ ‎(2) try doing sth. 表示尝试着去做某事 ‎ ‎ e.g. -- I usually go there by train. 我通常乘火车去那儿。 -- Why not try going by boat for a change? 为什么不换乘船呢? ‎ ‎ (3) try one’s best 尽某人最大的努力 e.g. Thank you. I will try my best. 谢谢你。我会尽力而为的。‎ ‎3. I suggest Water City Restaurant in Water World.‎ ‎ suggest作动词，可意为“显示；间接表明”，后可接宾语从句。‎ ‎ e.g. His behavior suggested (that) he was a kind man.   ‎ ‎ 他的行为显示他是个好人。‎ suggest作“建议”讲时，应注意以下两点：‎ ‎1) suggest doing sth. 建议做某事 ‎ e.g. I suggested going home. ‎ ‎ 我建议回家。 ‎ ‎2) suggest后接从句时，从句常用虚拟语气，谓语由“should +动词原形”构成， ‎ ‎ should可以省略。‎ ‎ e.g. I suggested that we should go home. 我建议我们回家。‎ 另外，suggestion是suggest的名词形式，作“建议”讲时，是可数名词。‎ e.g. Do you have any suggestions? 你有什么建议吗？‎ ‎4. The restaurant is always busy, at that time so come a little earlier to get a table. ‎ ‎ 用于“就餐”的语境时，形容词busy相当于“吃饭人多；餐厅拥挤”的意思；动词短语to get a table类似于汉语“定餐桌；占位子”等意思。‎ Step 7 Homework ‎1. 背诵3a。‎ ‎2. 用“Could you tell me … ?”写三个问路的句子。‎ Section A 3 (Grammar Focus-4c)‎ Step 1 Revision ‎1. How did Alice and He Wei think of the new ride？Students say the sentences together?‎ ‎ Alice thought that it looked pretty scary. He Wei thought that it would be fun.‎ ‎ 2. After the ride, Alice and He Wei talked about their feeling.‎ ‎ Alice thought that was fun! She was scared at first, but shouting really did help. He Wei told Alice that “You never know until you try something.” ‎ ‎ 3. Alice and He Wei talked about Uncle Bob’s.‎ ‎ Alice thought this restaurant looked interesting. It seemed a rock band plays there every evening. He Wei suggested that they could have dinner there.‎ Step 2 Grammar Focus ‎ ‎ 1) Let students complete the sentences. ‎ ‎1. 打扰了，你知道我能在哪买到一些药?‎ ‎ Excuse me, do you know where ____ _____ buy some medicine?‎ ‎2. 当然，顺着这条街有个超市。‎ ‎ Sure. There is a supermarket down the street.‎ ‎3. 请你告诉我怎样到邮局好吗？‎ ‎ Could you please tell me _____ ____ get to the post office?‎ ‎4. 对不起，我不确定怎样到那。‎ ‎ ______, I am ______ ______ how to get there. ‎ ‎5. 你能告诉我们今晚乐队什么时候开始演奏吗？‎ ‎ Can you tell us ______ ____ ______ ______ playing this evening?‎ ‎6. 晚上8点开始。‎ ‎ It starts at 8:00 p.m. ‎ ‎7. 我想知道接下来我们该去哪儿。‎ ‎ I ______ where we ______ _____ _____.‎ ‎8. 你应该试试那个新的乘骑设施。‎ ‎ You should try that new ride over there.‎ ‎2）Objective clauses with wh-questions ‎ 上一个单元我们已经学习了由that和whether, if引导的宾语从句。这个单元我们继续学习由疑问词引导的宾语从句。疑问词：疑问代词（what、whom、who、whose、which）疑问副词（when、where、why、how）。‎ 语序：无论主句是陈述句还是疑问句，也无论主从句间是什么引导词，宾语从句一律用陈述语序，即“引导词+主语+谓语+其它”。如：Could you tell me where Wei Fang lives?  ‎ 时态 ‎ ‎1. 如果主句是一般现在时或一般将来时，宾语从句的时态不受限制，可根据实际表达的需要来确定。如：‎ ‎ Jenny knows the man was flying a kite at that time.   ‎ ‎ You will understand why I did it one day. ‎ 总有一天你会明白我为什么那样做。‎ ‎2. 如果主句是一般过去时，宾语从句用过去时态的某种形式。如：‎ ‎ I thought he had gone to town that day. ‎ ‎ 我以为他那天进城去了。‎ ‎3. 如果宾语从句叙述的是客观事实、自然现象或科学真理等，从句不受主句时态的限制，用一般现在时。如：‎ ‎ He said time is money.  ‎ ‎ 他说时间就是金钱。‎ ‎3）Practice ‎ 1. He asked ________ for the computer. A. did I pay how much B. I paid how much C. how much did I pay D. how much I paid ‎ ‎ 2. “Have you seen the film?” he asked me. ‎ ‎ He asked me _______. A. had I seen the film ‎ ‎ B. have I seen the film C. if I have seen the film ‎ ‎ D. whether I had seen the film ‎ ‎ 3. “You’ve already got well, haven’t you?” she asked. She asked ______. ‎ ‎ A. if I have already got well, hadn’t you B. whether I had already got well C. have I already got well ‎ ‎ D. had I already got well.‎ ‎4. He asked, “How are you getting along?” ‎ ‎ He asked _______. A. how am I getting along B. how are you getting along C. how I was getting along D. how was I getting along ‎ 5. He asked me _____ told me the accident. A. whom B. which C. who D. whose ‎6. She asked me if I knew ______. A. whose pen is it B. whose pen it was C. whose pen it is D. whose pen was it Keys: DDBCCB Step 3 Function: Ask for information politely and follow directions ‎1) 问路时应注意 ① 问路时应首先说一声：“Excuse me.”这样可以引起对方的注意，又不失礼貌。‎ ② 当你没听清时，你可以说一声“Excuse me, would you please say it again?”(‎ 对不起，请您再说一遍好吗?) 或“I beg your pardon?”(对不起，请再说一遍好吗?)等，礼貌地要求对方重复一遍。‎ ③ 问完路后，千万不要忘记向对方说句“Thank you for helping me.” 或“Thank you.”‎ ④ 问路时经常会用到“向左(右)拐”这样的表达，英语对此有两种常见的说法，即turn left (right)或turn to the left (right)。表示 “在左(右)边”，英语用介词on或at均可。‎ ‎2）用英语问路及其回答 ① Excuse me, can you tell me where the railway station is? ‎ 打扰一下，请问火车站在哪儿?‎ ② Excuse me, but can you tell me the way to the train station? ‎ 劳驾，请问去火车站怎么走?‎ ③ Excuse me, could you tell me which is the way to the nearest hospital?‎ 劳驾，请问去最近的医院怎么走?‎ ④ Excuse me, would you please show me the way to the post office? ‎ 请告诉我去邮局怎么走好吗?‎ ⑤ Excuse me, would you mind telling me the way to the police station?‎ 劳驾，请告诉我去警察局怎么走好吗？‎ ⑥ Excuse me, how can I get to No. 1 Middle School? ‎ 劳驾，请问去一中怎么走?‎ ⑦ Excuse me, is this the right way to the People’s Park? ‎ 打扰了，请问去人民公园走这条路对吗?‎ ⑧ Excuse me. Could you tell me if there is a Qiaotou Middle School near here?‎ 打扰了，请问桥头中学是否在这附近?‎ ⑨ Excuse me. Do you know how I can get to Qiaotou Middle School?‎ ‎= Excuse me. Do you know how to get to Qiaotou Middle School?‎ 请问，你知道怎样去桥头中学吗?‎ ‎ 3）指路的方法 ‎ ① Take along with this street, and … is on you left.‎ ‎② Go down this way, and turn left at the first crossing, and you’ll find … is right there, on your left.‎ ‎③… is behind (near, next to, on the left of) …‎ ‎④ You can just take NO.111 bus, and get off at the second station. And you’ll see it.‎ ‎⑤ Look! … is in front of us far away, right there!‎ Step 4 Practice 1) Rewrite the questions in 4a to make them more polite.‎ ‎① Where can I buy some grapes or other fruit?‎ ‎② How does this CD player work?‎ ③ How do I get to the Central Library?‎ ④ Is the Italian restaurant nearby open on Mondays?‎ ‎ Get students write down their answers in their books.‎ ‎2) What should each person ask in the following situations? Let students write down their answers and them say their answers one by one.‎ ‎ ① Tim is very hungry.‎ Could you tell me where I can get something to eat?‎ Excuse me, would you mind telling me how I can get to a nearby restaurant?‎ Pardon me, do you know if there’s a restaurant around here? ‎ ‎ ② Sally needs to mail a letter.‎ ‎③ Helen needs to know when the bike shop closes. ‎ ‎ ④ Ben is wondering if there’s a bank in the shopping center.‎ ‎3) Ask students to write four questions that a tourist might ask about your city/ town. Then role-play conversations with your partner.‎ Step 5 Exercises Translate the sentences into Chinese.‎ ‎① 请你到那后给我打个电话好吗？‎ ‎② 请在这条路的尽头向右转。‎ ‎③ 你能告诉我在哪里可以买到一些邮票吗？‎ ‎④ 你可否告诉我火车什么时候到达武汉？‎ Step 6 Homework ‎ 假如你到一个陌生的城市去旅游，你想向当地人了解一些关于那个城市的 东西，请编写一个你和当地人的小对话。‎ Section B1 (1a-2d)‎ Step 1 Revision You are a tourist in a city, you want to know something about the city. Make a conversation about asking information politely.‎ A: Could you please tell me where the nearest bank is?‎ B: Sure, go east along this street, then you’ll see it.‎ A: Can you tell me if there is a delicious restaurant near here?‎ B: Sure. Walk along this street, the restaurant is on you right.‎ A: And do you know where the biggest hospital is?‎ B: Go down this street, turn left at the first crossing, you will see it. ‎ A: After dinner, I want to buy a pair of shoes, would you mind telling me where the nearest supermarket is?‎ B: It’s over there, just across from you.‎ A: Haha! I see it. Thank you very much!‎ B: You are welcome.‎ Step 2 Lead in ‎1) Talk about places in your city.‎ ‎2) Show some pictures of places and discuss what qualities are important for each place.‎ Step 3 1a & Pairwork ‎ ‎1a What qualities are important for each place? Write the words from the box next to each place below. Write the most important words first.‎ interesting, fascinating, inexpensive, quiet uncrowded,‎ big, beautiful, convenient, safe, clean Places Qualities restroom clean, uncrowded, convenient museum interesting, quiet, uncrowded restaurant ‎ clean, inexpensive, quiet park ‎ beautiful, safe, big subway ‎ uncrowded, safe, convenient mall inexpensive, big, interesting, convenient, safe Pair work ‎1b Talk about places in your city using the words in 1a.‎ A: The Fun Arts Museum is really interesting.‎ B: Yes, and it’s beautiful, too.‎ A: …. ‎ Step 4 Listening (1c)‎ 1) Listen and check the sentences you hear.‎ Conversation 1‎ ‎______ You can go to Green Land.‎ Conversation 2‎ ‎_____ Could you tell me where the bookstore is?‎ 2) Listen to the conversations and complete the sentences.(1c)‎ Conversation 1‎ The boy asks about ___________, and the clerk tells him to go to Green Land.‎ Conversation 2‎ The girl asks about _________, and the clerk tells her to go to the corner of Market and Middle Streets.‎ Conversation 3‎ The mother asks about ________. The father wants to go to a ________ museum. The younger girl wants to go to a _______ museum. The boy wants to go to a __________ museum. The older girl wants to go to an ______ museum. The clerk suggests they go to the _________ museum.‎ 1) Listen again and answer the questions (1d)‎ Conversation 1‎ The boy asks about restaurants, the clerk suggests him go to Green Land, they have delicious salad.…‎ Step 5 Practice ‎ Role-play the conversations between the clerk and the tourist.‎ A: Can you tell me where there’s good place to eat?‎ B: Of course. What kind of food do you like?‎ A: I’d like fresh vegetables.‎ B: You can go to Green Land, they have delicious salad.‎ A: ….‎ Step 6 Presentation ‎2a Where do you need to make polite requests? Think of some possible situations.‎ Discuss them with your partner.‎ Ø In a foreign country.‎ Ø In public places like a bank, a post office, a library, a shopping mall, etc.‎ Ø At school.‎ Ø At home, especially when speaking to your elders.‎ Zhang Ming is traveling in the USA. He wants to go to a small town but he doesn't know the way now. What should he do?‎ Step 7 Discussion Discuss the language you used to make this request (要求，请求). Was it the same each time? If not, discuss why not.‎ Step 8 Reading ‎1) Read the article and match paragraph with its main idea.‎ ‎2d Read the article and underline the topic sentence for each paragraph.‎ Paragraph 1‎ When you visit a foreign country, it is important to know how to ask for help politely (adv. 礼貌地)….‎ Paragraph 2‎ Good speakers change the way they speak in different situations. …‎ Paragraph 3‎ Usually polite questions are longer. They include expressions such as “Could you please …?” or “May I ask …?” ‎ Paragraph 4‎ However, it is important to learn how to use the right language in different situations. …‎ ‎2) Read the article again and answer the questions.‎ Read paragraph 1 and answer the question. ‎ What else do we need to learn besides asking a question correctly when you ask for help?‎ We need to learn how to be polite when we ask for help.‎ Read paragraph 2 and answer the question.‎ What do we need to think about when you talk to different people?‎ We need to think about whom we speak to or how well we know them.‎ Read paragraph 3 and answer the question.‎ What can lead in to a request with a stranger on the street?‎ ‎“Excuse me, I wonder if you can help me” or “I’m sorry to trouble you, but …” before asking for help.‎ ‎2c Find all the direct questions and polite requests from the passage.‎ Direct questions Polite requests 1. ‎1. Where are the restrooms?‎ ‎2. When is the school trip?‎ ‎3. Peter, tell me your e-mail address.‎ ‎ 1. Could you tell me where the restrooms are?‎ ‎2. Excuse me, Mr. West. ‎ ‎ Do you know when ‎ ‎4. Where’s the post office?‎ ‎ the school trip is?‎ ‎3. Peter, could you ‎ ‎ please tell me ‎ your e-mail address?‎ ‎4. Pardon me, could you please tell me where to park my car?‎ ‎2d Read the requests below. In the second column, write A if you would say it to someone you know and B if you would say it to a stranger. In the last column, write where you think these people are.‎ Request ‎ Person ‎ Place ‎ ‎1. Will you pass the salt?‎ ‎ A ‎ home ‎2. Do you know where I can change some money, please?‎ ‎ B ‎ street ‎3. Could you tell me what just happened?‎ A/B any public place/home ‎4. Can you please tell me where the nearest station is?‎ ‎ B ‎ street ‎5. Excuse me, do you know what time it begins, please?‎ ‎ B movie theater ‎6. Let me know when you’re ready, OK?‎ A ‎ home ‎7. Could you possibly tell me the way to the village school?‎ ‎ B ‎ street Step 9 Language points ‎ ‎1. Both are correct, but the first one sounds less polite.‎ less + 形容词或副词，构成降级比较形式，相当于中文“不那么；稍许不……”之意。‎ e.g. His second movie is less interesting.‎ ‎ 他的第二部电影就没那么有趣。‎ ‎2. It might seem more difficult to speak politely than directly.‎ 情态动词might 表达一种可能性及推测的不确定性，意思与表达可能性的may相当，表示“有可能，也许会”，但语气更加委婉，更不确定。‎ e.g. He might come, but it’s very unlikely.‎ ‎ 他也许会来，但非常靠不住。‎ ‎3. However, it is important to learn how to use the right language in different situations.‎ ‎ it作形式主语 ‎ 【梳理】 ‎ ‎ 在英语中，如果主语是较长的动词不定式或一个句子，为了保持句子结构的平衡，避免头重脚轻，通常用it作形式主语放在句首，而把真正的主语放在句尾。‎ 常见的句型有：‎ ‎1) It is + adj. (+ for + sb.) + to do sth.。常用于此句型的形容词有important, difficult, dangerous, necessary, useful, possible等，用来对to do sth. 进行说明。如：‎ It’s difficult for us to finish the work in an hour. ‎ ‎2) It is + adj. + of + sb. + to do sth.。常用于此句型的形容词有good, kind, nice, clever, wise等，用来对sb.的性格、品质等进行说明。‎ 如：It’s kind of you to say so.‎ Step 10 Exercises 请根据汉语意思完成下列英语句子（每空一词）。‎ 1. 对他来说，回答那个问题是十分困难的。‎ ‎ It’s very hard ____ him ____ _______ that question.‎ ‎2. 你这样说真是太好了。‎ ‎ It’s very kind ____ you ____ ____ so.‎ ‎3. 我们在阅览室里保持安静是十分必要的。‎ ‎ It’s necessary ______ ______(should) keep quiet in the reading room.‎ ‎ It’s necessary for us _______ ______ ______ in the reading room.‎ Keys: 1. for; to answer 2. of, to say 3. that we, to keep quiet Step 11 Homework Write a guide to a place that you know well.‎ Section B 2 (3a-Self Check)‎ Step 1 Revision 1) Write down the phrases ‎① 提出礼貌的要求 ② 听起来更礼貌 ‎③ 一个很直接的问题 ④ 请求帮助 ‎ ‎⑤ 在不同的情形下 ⑥ 取决于 ‎⑦ 你所用的表达方式 ⑧ 比如 ‎⑨ 花时间导入 ⑩ 变得更擅长 ‎2）Fill in the blanks according to 2b.‎ ‎ When you visit a _______ country, it is _________ to know how to ask for help ______. For example, “Where are the restrooms?” or “Could you _____ tell me where the ________ ___?” these are similar ________ for _________ you may ask. ‎ Both are _______ English, but the first one sounds _____ polite. That is because it is a very ______ question. It is not enough to just ask a question ________. We also need to learn how to be polite — when we ask for _____.‎ In English, ___ in Chinese, we change the way we ______ in different _________. The expressions you use might _______ ___ whom you are speaking to ___ how well you know them. If you say to your teacher, “When is the school trip?” this might sound ________. But if you say, “Excuse me, Mr. West, do you know when the school trip ___?”, this will sound _____ more polite. However, it is all right to ask direct questions to your classmates because you know them ____. ‎ It might seem more _______ to speak politely than _______. It is important to learn how to use _____ ________ in different situations. This will also help you ___________ better with other people. ‎ Step 2 Presentation ‎ Imagine you are going on a short study vacation at a school in an English-speaking country. What would you like to know before you go? Write some polite, indirect questions about the following topics. ‎ The topics are:‎ ‎① The course you will study ② The time of the course ‎③ Where and what you can eat ④ Where you will stay ‎⑤ What activities you can do ⑥ Travel to the school ⑦ Other Step 3 Practice ‎ Make conversations according to the information in 3a.‎ Step 4 Writing 1) Write a polite letter to the school asking for the information you want to know. Use your notes in 3a.‎ In your letter, you should:‎ introduce yourself ‎ say when you are coming politely ask for information thank the person for helping you ‎ 2) Use the following expressions to help you:‎ My name is … and I’m from …‎ I’ll be coming to your school for …‎ I’d like to know about …‎ I would like to thank you for…‎ I’m looking forward to your reply.‎ ‎ 3）写作指导：本次写作内容是一封书信，信的开头和结尾已经给出。但我们还是要记住书信的格式，便于今后自己运用。信中首先要介绍自己，然后告诉你去他们学校的时间，然后同学们可根据在3a环节中所问到的问题来礼貌的询问你想知道的信息。‎ One possible version:‎ Dear Sir or Madam,‎ ‎ My name is He Wei and I’m from Beijing, China. I’ll be coming to your school soon for a short study vacation. I will leave for your school on July 10th. I’d like to know more information about the school. ‎ Could you tell me what course I will study in your school? And I also want to know when the course will start. I want to know where I will stay. Can you tell me? Would you mind telling me where and what I can eat in your school? I like all kinds of activities. Could you please tell me what activities I can do in your school?‎ ‎ The last question, can you tell me how I can get to your school? I would like to thank you for helping me and I look forward to your reply.‎ Yours faithfully, ‎ He Wei Step 5 Self Check 1) Fill in the blanks with the words in the box.‎ 2) Write questions and answers using the words given.‎ Step 6 Language points ‎1. I’m looking forward to your reply.‎ ‎ look forward to期待，盼望。后面接名词或者动名词。‎ e.g. I look forward to your good news. 我等待你的好消息。 Look forward to hearing from you. 期待你的来信。‎ ‎2. I would like to thank you for…‎ ‎ thanks for“因……而感谢”，是客套用语，thanks相当于thank you，for强调为何而感谢，其后可接名词或V-ing。‎ ‎ e.g. Thanks for lending me the money. 多谢您借钱给我。‎ ‎ Thanks for reminding. I’d forgotten all about his coming this afternoon. ‎ ‎ 谢谢你提醒我，我完全忘了他今天下午要来。‎ ‎3. I need to plan my time better.‎ 1) plan sth. 计划某事，后接名词。‎ ‎ e.g. I want to plan my summer vacation. 我想要计划我的暑假。‎ ‎2) plan to do sth. 计划去做某事，to是动词不定式。 ‎ e.g. They plan to have a sports meeting. 他们计划开运动会。‎ ‎3) plan for sth. 关于……的计划，plan是名词。‎ Step 7 Homework 根据3b的内容写一封回信。‎ Unit 4 I used to be afraid of the dark. ‎ Section A 1 (1a-2d)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 能掌握以下单词： humorous, silent, helpful, from time to time, score ‎ 能掌握以下句型：‎ ‎① Paula used to be really quiet. ‎ ‎② —Did Mario use to be short? —Yes, he did. ‎ ‎③ —What’s he like now? —He’s tall now.‎ ‎2) 能够用英语描述自己或他人过去常常做的事情；发现自己或他人在外表、性格、兴趣等方面所发生的变化。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎ 让学生明白事物是在不断发展、变化的道理，培养学生积极向上的心态。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1)掌握本课时中出现的生词humorous, silent, helpful, from time to time, score ‎2) 学会描述自己或他人过去常常做的事情基本句型：‎ I used to… ‎ ‎3）发现自己或他人在外表、性格、兴趣等方面所发生的变化。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ used to do/be 句型 ‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Lead in ‎ ‎1. 大屏幕展示Ryan Carter的几张照片，引导学生们来描述他的长相特点。‎ T: What does he look like?‎ S1：He has long curly blonde hair. ‎ S2: He has a round face, two big eyes. He’s a little heavy. ‎ T: Does he like his hair? Can you guess? ‎ S1：No, he does. He wants to cut it short. ‎ S2: … ‎ T: Do you want to know about his story? ‎ S3: Sure. We’d love to. ‎ T: Ryan’s hair is soft and beautiful. His mother thinks it’s really wonderful. So she can’t stand cutting his beautiful hair. But some of Ryan’s friends say that Ryan can’t play with them because he looks like a girl. ‎ Ⅱ. Words presentation ‎1. Look at the chart in 1a, then discuss with your group mates. Try to fill in the chart with words to describe people. ‎ Appearance Personality tall straight hair outgoing funny ‎ ‎2. Let some Ss say their answers. Let other Ss add more. ‎ Appearance: tall, straight hair, short, of medium height, straight/curly hair, long/short hair, heavy, thin, of medium built …‎ Personality: Outgoing, shy, funny, serious, cute, quiet, kind, brave, friendly, active ‎3. Lear the new words with the Ss: humorous, silent, helpful, from time to time, score Ⅲ. Presentation ‎ ‎ Show two different pictures of some famous people. Talk about their differences. ‎ ‎1. Jiang Wen: ‎ Jiang Wen used to wear glasses, but he doesn’t wear glasses now.‎ ‎2. Zhang yishan Zhang yishan used to be short, but he is tall now.‎ T: Explain the use of “used to do/be …” to the Ss. ‎ Ⅳ. Listening ‎ ‎1. T: Bob hasn’t seen some of his friends for four years. Now he’s seeing his friends. What did his friends use to like? Listen and fill in the blanks. ‎ ‎1) Mario used to be ______. He used to wear _______.‎ ‎2) Amy used to be _____. She used to have _______ hair.‎ ‎3) Tina used to have ______ and ______ hair. ‎ Keys: short glasses tall short red curly ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen. ‎ ‎3. Ss listen and try to fill in the blanks with the right words. ‎ ‎4. Play the recording again. Let Ss check their answers. ‎ Ⅴ. Pair work ‎ ‎1. Look at the picture in 1a and make conversations in pairs. ‎ ‎2. Ss work in pairs to ask and answer the appearance about Mario, Amy and Tina. ‎ ‎3. Let some pairs ask and answer in pairs. ‎ e.g. A: Did Mario use to be short? ‎ B: Yes, he did. He used to be really short.‎ A: What’s he like now?‎ B: He’s tall now. ‎ Ⅵ. Listening ‎ Work on 2a: ‎ T: Paula has changed a lot in the past few years. Do you want to know what she used ‎ to be? ‎ ‎1. Look at the words in 2a. Let some Ss read the words aloud. Make sure all the Ss know the meaning of the words.‎ ‎___ friendly ___ outgoing ___ serious ___ humorous ___ silent ___ active ‎___ brave ___ quiet ___ helpful ‎ 1) humorous adj. 有幽默感的；滑稽有趣的 humor (幽默) + ous → 有幽默感的 e.g. Cartoons are humorous pictures with words. ‎ ‎ 漫画是附有文字的幽默图片。‎ ‎2) silent adj. 不说话的；沉默的 silent adj. → silence n. 沉默 e.g. Peter seems silent today. What’s the matter? ‎ ‎ 彼特今天似乎很沉默，怎么了？‎ ‎3) helpful adj. 有帮助的 help n. (帮助) + ful → helpful adj. 有帮助的 e.g. His explanation was more or less helpful. ‎ ‎ 他的解释多少是有帮助的。‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and check the words they hear. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording again to check the answers. ‎ Keys: friendly outgoing silent active brave quiet ‎ Work on 2b: ‎ ‎1. Let Ss read the sentences below. Explain some main sentences for the Ss. Make sure they know what to do. ‎ ‎ In the past ‎1) Paula used to be really ______. She was always silent in class. She wasn’t very ‎ ‎ ________. She was never brave enough to ask questions.‎ ‎2) She got good grade in _______. She was also good in ______. She used to play the ______.‎ Keys: quiet outgoing science music piano Now ‎ ‎1) Now she’s more interested in ______. She plays ______ almost every day. ‎ ‎ She’s also on a ______team.‎ ‎2) She still plays the _____ from time to time. ‎ Keys: sports soccer swim piano ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss to fill in the blanks with the right words. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording again to check the answers. ‎ ‎4. Play the recording once more and anwer the questions.‎ ‎ 1) What class were they?‎ ‎2) What was Paula never brave to do in class?‎ ‎3) What subjects were Paula good at?‎ ‎4) What is Paula interested in now?‎ Keys: They were in science class.‎ She was never brave to ask questions to teachers.‎ Science and music.‎ Paula is more interested in sports now.‎ Ⅶ. Pair work ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to make conversations about Paula using the information in 2a. ‎ ‎2. Let some pairs act out their conversations before the class. ‎ e.g. A: Paula used to be really short?‎ ‎ B: I know. She was always silent in class. ‎ Ⅷ. Role-play ‎ ‎ 1. Read the conversation and Let Ss read after the teacher. ‎ ‎ 2. Read the conversation again and complete the blanks.‎ ‎ Bill has changed so much! He used to be ____ and _____. His face always ______ ___ when he talked to girls! He studied hard and got good ______ on his exams. He used to be ____, but now he is ___ and _______.‎ ‎ Keys: shy quiet turned red scores thin big strong ‎3. Ask Ss to role-play the conversation in groups. ‎ Alfred: This party is such a great idea!‎ Gina: I agree. It’s been three years since we last saw our primary school classmates. ‎ Alfred: It’s interesting to see how people have changed. ‎ Gina: Bill has changed so much! He used to be so shy and quiet.‎ Alfred: Yeah, his face always turned red when he talked to girls!‎ Gina: I used to see him reading in the library every day.‎ Alfred: That’s because he was a really good student. He studied hard and got good scores on his exams. ‎ Gina: Did he use to wear glasses?‎ Alfred: Yes, and he used to be thin, too. But look how big and strong he is now! ‎ Gina: He’s so popular now. Look at all the girls around him!‎ IX. Language points ‎1. I used to be afraid of the dark.‎ ‎ used to do sth. 过去常常做某事 表示过去经常性或习惯性的动作或状态，暗指现在已经不存了，强调过去与现在的对比。‎ used to的否定形式有两种：didn’t use to或usedn’t to。 ‎ used to用于疑问句时，可借助助动词did，也可以将used提到主语前。‎ e.g. They used to be good friends. 他们过去是好朋友。 (暗示现在不是了)‎ ‎ Mrs Brown didn’t use to / usedn’t to travel in summer.‎ ‎ 布朗夫人过去夏天不旅游。‎ ‎ Did you use to / Used you to play the guitar? 他过去弹吉他吗？‎ ‎【拓展】几个易混结构的比较： ‎ 结构 意义 to的作用 used to do sth.‎ 过去常常做某事 不定式符号 use ... to do sth.‎ 用……做……‎ be used to do sth.‎ 被用来做……‎ be used to doing sth.‎ 习惯于做某事 介词 use ... to do sth. 用……做……‎ e.g. They use the knife to cut meat. 他们用刀切肉。‎ be used to do sth. 被用来做某事 e.g. This kind of wood is used to make paper. 这种木头是被用来做纸的。 ‎ be / get used to sth. / doing sth. 习惯于某事 / 做某事 e.g. Lucy has been used to (eating) Chinese food. Lucy已经习惯(吃)中餐了。‎ ‎ I think you’ll get used to the climate soon.‎ ‎ 我想不久你就会习惯这种气候的。‎ 根据所给汉语提示完成英语句子。‎ ‎1) My uncle __________ (以前是个司机), but now he is an actor.‎ ‎2) Tom’s father ______________ (过去常常看书) after lunch.‎ ‎3) Mary ________ (以前常常骑自行车) to work, but now she _______ (习惯步行) to work.‎ ‎4) The pencil ________ (被用来书写).‎ Keys: used to be a driver ‎ used to read (books)‎ used to ride a bike is used to walking ‎ is used to write ‎2. She still plays the piano from time to time.‎ from time to time是一个固定短语，意为“间或；有时”，常在句中作状语。‎ e.g. Tom goes to visit his grandmother in the countryside from time to time.‎ ‎ 汤姆时常去看望住在农村的奶奶。‎ ‎3. He studied hard and got good scores on his exams.‎ ‎ score n. 得分；进球 e.g. He got high scores in the examination. 考试中他得了高分。 ‎ ‎4. This party is such a great idea!‎ ‎ He used to be so shy and quiet.‎ ‎ such与so 辨析 such为形容词，意为“这（那）样的；主要修饰名词；‎ so是副词，意为“这（那）么；如此地”，主要修饰形容词、副词和分词。‎ e.g. Do you like such weather? 你喜欢这样的天气吗？‎ ‎ I’m so glad to see you. 很高兴见到你。‎ ‎ He can draw so well. 他画得那么好。‎ 当名词前有many，much，few或little等词修饰时，要用so而不用such。‎ e.g. There are so many / few people in the hall. 大厅有这么多/这么少的人。‎ ‎ You have so much / little homework today. 你今天有这么多/这么少的作业。‎ ‎“such + a / an +形容词+可数名词单数 形式”相当于“so +形容词+a / an +可 数名词单数形式”，表示“如此……的一个……”。‎ e.g. She is such a lovely girl. = She is so lovely a girl. 她是这个如此可爱的女孩。‎ 选用such或so填空。‎ ‎1) The man told us ____ funny a story.‎ ‎2) She has _____ a beautiful dress.‎ ‎3) How can you get ____ much money to buy the car?‎ ‎4) Don’t go out in ______ cold weather.‎ ‎5) Don’t eat _____ quickly.‎ Keys: so  such so  such so X. Exercise: If time is enough, do some more exercise. ‎ I. 根据汉语提示填空，完成句子。‎ ‎1. He has plenty of _________ (幽默的) stories to tell us. ‎ ‎2. You’d better keep _______ (沉默) about what happened. ‎ ‎3. The lazy cat isn’t very ________ (有用的) in catching mice. ‎ ‎4. Tom got the highest ______ (得分) in the exam. ‎ Keys: humorous silent helpful score II. 用used to将下列汉语句子翻译成英语。‎ ‎1. 他过去常常在卧室抽烟。‎ ‎2. 汤姆过去常常去那儿看电影，但现在他不去了。‎ Keys: He used to smoke in the bedroom.  ‎ Tom used to go to the movies there, but now he doesn’t go there.‎ XI, Homework Recite the conversation in 2d after school. ‎ Section A 2 (3a-3c)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 学习掌握下列词汇： background, interview, Asian, deal with, dare, private, guard, require ‎2） 阅读短文，能按要求获取相关的信息。‎ ‎3） 通过阅读训练来提高学生们的阅读能力。‎ ‎4) 学习运用used to来表达“过去常常”存在的状态或的发生的动作。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ 让学生明白事物是在不断发展、变化的道理，培养学生积极向上的心态。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 掌握本部分出现的生词和词组，达到熟练运用的目标。‎ ‎2) 阅读短文，获得相关的信息。通过阅读练习，来提高阅读能力。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ ‎1) 阅读短文，获得相关的信息的能力。‎ ‎2) 理解并运用所学的词汇及表达方式。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Revision ‎ Translate the sentences into English.‎ ‎1. 马里奥以前很矮，他戴着眼镜。‎ ‎ ___________________________________ ‎ ‎2. 他现在长什么样子？‎ ‎ ___________________________________ ‎ ‎3. 保拉以前很安静，她在班上总是很沉默。‎ ‎ ___________________________________‎ ‎4. 她总是不够勇敢去问问题。 ‎ ‎ ___________________________________ ‎ Keys: Mario used to be short and wear glasses.‎ ‎ What’s he like now?‎ Paula used to be really quiet. She was always silent in class. ‎ She was never brave enough to ask questions.‎ Ⅱ. Warming up 展示一张Candy Wang的照片，并询问学生们如下问题。‎ ‎1. Who’s beautiful and outgoing girl? She’s the famous singer Candy Wang. ‎ ‎2. Can you guess what she was like?‎ ‎ Yeah, she used to be very shy. ‎ ‎3. Do you want to know her story? ‎ ‎ She took up singing to deal with her shyness. ‎ As she got better, she was not shy anymore and loved singing in front of crows. Now she’s the Asian pop star. ‎ Ⅲ. Reading ‎ Work on 3a ‎1. Tell Ss to read the article and identify the paragraphs in which the following information appears. Number the information [1-3]. ‎ ‎ ____ how Candy’s life has changed ‎ ‎____ Candy’s advice to young people ‎ ‎____ Candy’s background Ss read the article quickly and try to number the information. ‎ ‎2. 方法指导：先读懂所给的三个句子的意思，明确段落大意。然后快速阅读短文，争取在较短的时间内，确定每个段落的大意。‎ ‎3. 学生们，按老师指导的方法进行阅读，确定每个段落的大意。 ‎ ‎4. 最后，教师让部分说出自己的答案，并校对答案。‎ Keys: 2 3 1‎ Ⅳ. Careful Reading ‎ ‎1. Read the first passage again and answer these questions: ‎ ‎1) How old is Candy Wang?‎ ‎2) What was she like?‎ ‎3) Why did she take up singing? ‎ ‎4) What’s she like now?‎ Ss try to read and find the answers to these questions.‎ Then check the answers with the Ss Keys: She’s 19 years old.‎ She used to be really shy.‎ To deal with her shyness.‎ She’s not shy anymore and loves singing in front of crowds. ‎ ‎2. Read the second passage and fill in the chart.‎ Good things Bad things ‎1.Being able to travel and meet new people all the time ‎1.___________________‎ ‎2. _________________‎ ‎2. _____________‎ ‎3. _________________‎ ‎4. _________________‎ Check the answers with the Ss:‎ Keys: Good things ‎2. Get tons of attention everywhere she goes.‎ Bad things ‎1. Always have to worry about how she appears to others.‎ ‎2. Have to be careful about what she says or does.‎ ‎3. Don’t have much private time anymore.‎ ‎4. There are always guards around her.‎ ‎3. Read the third paragraph and fill in the blanks.‎ Candy’s advice to young people who want to become famous:‎ ‎1. People have to be __________ to ____ _____ your ______ life. ‎ ‎2. You can never imagine how ________ the road to ________ is. ‎ ‎3. You really require a lot of ________ and ___________ to succeed. ‎ ‎4. Only a very small _______ of people make it to the _______ . ‎ Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ Keys: prepared give up normal imagine success talent hard work number top Ⅴ. Careful Reading ‎ ‎1. Work on 3b: ‎ ‎1. 学生们再次阅读短文内容，并完成3b中的内容。‎ 1. She used to be shy, but now she’s not shy ________.‎ 2. She didn’t use to be _______ in school, but now she gets lots of attention.‎ 3. She used to ________ with friends, but it is almost impossible now.‎ 4. She didn’t use to ___________ how she appears to others, but now she does. ‎ ‎2. 学生们先读3b中的四个句子，理解其大意，然后仔细回读短文，找到相关信息，并完成句子。‎ ‎3. 让学生们相互讨论，并校对答案。 ‎ Keys: 1. anymore 2. popular 3. hang out 4. be careful ‎2. Work on 3c ‎ ‎1. 告诉学生们本学习活动的要求：假设你是一名采访者，你伙伴是Candy，你向她询问问题，她来回答。‎ ‎2. Give Ss and example: ‎ e.g. You: What were you like？Were you good at singing when you were very young? ‎ Your partner: No. I used to be really shy. I took up singing to deal with my shyness. As I got better, I dared to sing in front of the class and then for the whole school. ‎ ‎3. Ss work in pairs. Try to ask and answers questions according to the passage. ‎ ‎4. Let some pairs ask and answer. ‎ Ⅵ. Language points ‎1. I interviewed 19-year-old Asian pop star Candy Wang. ‎ interview v. 采访 ‎ e.g. We are going to interview the Minister of Education. ‎ ‎ 我们打算去采访教育部长。‎ ‎2. Candy told me that she used to be really shy and took up singing to deal with her shyness.‎ take up 开始；从事；接纳；占据；继续做 e.g. The table takes up too much room. 这桌子太占地方了。‎ ‎ They have taken up golf. 他们开始学起打高尔夫球了。‎ ‎ 拓展：take相关词组 take off 起飞；脱下；动身 take on 承担；呈现 take over 接受；接管；借用；接办 take down 记下；取下 take place 发生；进行；举行 take a look 看一下 take a walk 散步 take away 带走，拿走，取走 take care of 照顾；注意；抚养 take charge 掌管，负责 ‎ deal v. 对待；处理 (dealt, dealt)‎ deal with 应对；处理 e.g. Have you dealt with these letters yet? 这些信件你处理了吗？‎ shyness n. 害羞 ‎3. As she got better, she dared to sing in front of her class, and then for the whole school.‎ dare v. 敢于；胆敢 dare to do sth. 敢于做某事 e.g. He doesn’t dare to jump from the top of the wall. 他不敢从墙上跳下来。‎ ‎4. Now she’s not shy anymore and loves singing in front of crowds.‎ ‎ not … anymore 不再……‎ ‎ e.g. People are not interested in movies anymore. ‎ ‎ 人们不再对电影感兴趣了。 ‎ ‎5. … but now I get tons of attention everywhere I go.‎ ‎ get tons of attention 被众人所关注 ‎ tons of sth. 很多；极多 ‎ e.g. They have tons of work every day. 他们每天都有大量的工作要做。‎ ‎6. And I don’t have much private time anymore.‎ private adj. 私人的；私密的 e.g. Mr. Smith is rather secret about his private life. ‎ ‎ 史密斯先生对自己的私生活相当保密。‎ ‎7. Many times I thought about giving up, but I fought on.‎ ‎ fight (fought, fought) 努力去做，尝试；战斗，搏斗；争取 ‎ fight on 奋力坚持 ‎ e.g. We must fight on until the end of the battle. 我们必须坚持到战斗结束。‎ ‎8. You really require a lot of talent and hard work to succeed.‎ require v. 需要；要求 e.g. Fishing requires a lot of patience. 钓鱼需要很大的耐心。‎ Ⅴ. Exercise ‎ 1. Finish the sentences by using the words in the box.‎ require, guard, deal with, background, private ‎1. Playing the piano well ________ a lot of practice. ‎ ‎2. The ______ won’t let anyone through the gate without a pass. ‎ ‎3. It’s a _______ garden, not a public one. ‎ ‎4. We know nothing about his ____________.‎ ‎5. I have a lot of letters to __________ today.‎ Keys: requires; guard; private; background; deal with ‎2. Complete the following sentences.‎ ‎1. Rice is the main food in many ______ (Asia) countries.‎ ‎2. Young people must dare _________ (think), speak up, and act. ‎ ‎3. Mike tried his best to overcome his __________ (shy).‎ ‎4. Mr. Li took up ___________ (engineer) ten years ago. ‎ ‎5. It’s ____________ (possible) for us to climb up such a high mountain. ‎ Keys: Asian; to think; shyness; engineering; impossible ‎3. Finish the following sentences.‎ ‎1. 我采访二十四岁的亚洲流行歌手茜拉。 ‎ ‎ I ____________ _____________ Asian pop star Shila. ‎ ‎2. 她从事歌唱来解决她的害羞问题。 ‎ ‎ She ____ ____ singing to _____ _____ her shyness. ‎ ‎3. 我不再有很多个人时间。 ‎ ‎ I don’t have _____ _______ time ____ _____. ‎ ‎4. 她过去常和朋友一起闲逛。 ‎ ‎ She ____ ___ _____ ____with friends.‎ Keys interviewed 24-year-old; ‎ took up deal with much private any more used to hang out Homework ‎ ‎1. Read the passage several times after school.‎ ‎2. Make sentences with these words.‎ ‎ interview; deal with; dare to…; not…any more; require; used to Section A 3 (Grammar Focus-4c) ‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 学习掌握下列词汇：European, African, British, speech, public, in public ‎ ‎2）进行一步复习巩固学习Section A 部分所学的生词和词组。‎ ‎3）掌握如何表达过去常常做的事情或状态的句型。‎ ‎4) 掌握used to的不同句型用法，并通过不同方式的练习，来熟练运用这些句型。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ 让学生明白事物是在不断发展、变化的道理，培养学生积极向上的心态。 ‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 复习巩固Section A 部分所学的生词和词组，达到熟练运用的目标。‎ ‎2) 总结 used to 的不同句型。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ ‎1) 学习运用表达过去常常做的事情或状态的句型 ‎2) 掌握used to的用法。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming up and revision ‎ ‎1. Have a dictation of the new words learned in the last class. ‎ ‎2. Review some main phrases we learned in the last class. Check the homework. ‎ ‎3. Let some Ss tell something about the Candy Wang.‎ ‎ ① Candy Wang’s background.‎ ‎ ② The change of Candy Wang’s life ‎ ‎ ③ Candy Wang’s advice to young people who want to succeed. ‎ Ⅱ. Grammar Focus. ‎ ‎1. 学生阅读Grammar Focus中的句子，然后做填空练习。‎ ‎① 我以前是矮个子。 ‎ ‎ I ______ ____ be short. ‎ ‎② 我以前在学校常不受欢迎。 ‎ ‎ I ______ _____ to be popular in school.‎ ‎③ 保拉以前的确不爱说话。 ‎ ‎ Paula _____ ____ be really short. ‎ ‎④ 她以前不喜欢小测试。 ‎ ‎ She _____ _____ _____ like tests. ‎ ‎⑤ 你以前很矮，不是吗？ ‎ You used to be short, ______ _______?‎ ‎ 是的，我是。/ 不，不是。 ‎ ‎ Yes, I _____. / No, I _______. ‎ ‎⑥ 他以前戴眼镜吗？ ‎ ‎ ____ he _____ ______ wear glasses?‎ ‎ 是的，他戴。/ 不，他不戴。 ‎ ‎ Yes, he _____./ No, he ______.‎ ‎2. 学生们根据记忆，看大屏幕来完成填空练习。‎ ‎3. 学生们完成填空试题后，可以打开课本检查答案，对错误的句子，单独进行强化记忆。‎ Keys: used to ‎ didn’t use used to didn’t use to didn’t you did didn’t ‎ Did use to did didn’t Ⅲ. Grammar ‎ ‎ 一、used to 的用法 ‎ used to 意为“过去常常”，用于表示过去习惯性的动作或存在的状态（强调与现在的对比，暗示现在不做了）。其中to为不定式符号，后跟动词原形。used to只用于一般过去时态，没有人称和数的变化。例如： ‎ Tom used to be very thin, but now he’s big and strong. ‎ 汤姆以前很瘦，但现在他又高又壮。 ‎ ‎ 二、句式结构： ‎ ‎ 1. 否定句 ‎ used not 主语 + to do sth. ‎ ‎ didn’t use ‎2. 一般疑问句 ‎ ‎ Did + 主语 + use + to do…? ‎ 答语：Yes, sb did. / No, sb didn’t. ‎ ‎3. 反意疑问句 ‎ ‎ 主句，didn’t + 人称代词？‎ 例如： ‎ ‎—Did you use to go to museums? 你过去常去博物馆吗？‎ ‎—Yes, I did. / No, I didn’t. 是的。/ 不是。‎ Your brother used to have noodles for breakfast, didn’t he? ‎ 你哥哥过去早餐常吃面条，不是吗？‎ 三、辨析 ‎ used to do sth.‎ 表示过去习惯性的动作或存在的状态。to后跟动词原形，只用于一般过去时态。‎ be used to + n./pron./doing 意为“习惯于……”，to是介词，后接名词、代词或动名词。可用于各种时态。‎ get/become used to sth./doing sth.‎ 意为“逐渐习惯于……”，强调这一习惯的过程，to是介词。‎ be used to do ‎ 意为“被用来做……”，被动语态结构，to后跟动词原形。‎ be used for doing sth 意为“被用来……”，介词for表示功能、用途。‎ 练一练：‎ 三、根据汉语提示完成句子。‎ ‎1. 我以前害怕在公众前演讲。‎ ‎ I _______ ______ be afraid of ________ a speech in ________. ‎ ‎2. 这种狗是用来帮助盲人的吗？‎ Are those dogs _______ _______ _________ the blind? ‎ ‎3. 你表妹以前害怕独自一人，不是吗？‎ ‎ Your cousin _______ ________ be afraid of ________ alone, _______ she? ‎ ‎4. 珍妮以前在学校里并不受欢迎。‎ ‎ Jenny ________ ________ ________ be popular in school. ‎ ‎5. 我不习惯午饭吃这么多。‎ ‎ I’m _______ used to _________ so much at lunch time.‎ Keys: 1. used to, giving, public ‎2. used to help ‎3. used to , being, didn’t ‎4. didn’t use to ‎5. not, eating IV. Practice ‎ Work on 4a: ‎ ‎1. 让学生们每个句子中所给的词汇，猜测句子的大意，为编写句子做好准备。‎ ‎1) Grace/watch a lot of TV/watch a lot of movies ‎2) my mom/have curly hair/have straight hair ‎ ‎3) Jerry/read books on European history/ read books on African culture ‎ ‎4) Sandy /teach British English / teach American English ‎ ‎2. 根据句意及其他相关信息确定句子的时态。‎ ‎3. 学生们尝试写出正确的句子。‎ ‎4. 最后，通读一遍句子，进行综合理解，看句子内容是否通顺，合理。‎ ‎5. Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ Keys: 1. Grace used to watch a lot of TV. She didn’t use to watch a lot of movies.‎ ‎2. My mom used to have curly hair. She didn’t use to have straight hair.‎ ‎3. Jerry used to read books on European history. She didn’t use to read books on African culture.‎ ‎4. Sandy used to teach British English. She didn’t use to teach American English. ‎ Work on 4b: ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to read the chart in 4a and try to write sentences about Emily with information. ‎ Five years ago Now didn’t eat a lot of vegetables loves carrots and tomatoes listened to pop music enjoys country music watched scary movies hates scary movies didn’t read a lot of books reads at least six books a year ‎2. 方法指导：描述Emily五年前的情况，应用used to 句型，而描述现在的情况，应用一般现在时态。并将第一个信息写出一个例句。‎ e.g. Emily didn’t use to eat a lot of vegetables, but now she loves carrots and tomatoes. ‎ ‎3. Ss try to write sentences by themselves. ‎ ‎4. 最后，让某部分学生上黑板，写出正确的句子，并对学生们有疑问的地方进行解释。‎ Keys: 2. Emily used to listen to pop music, but now she enjoys country music.‎ ‎3. Emily used to watch scary movies, but now she hates them. ‎ ‎4. Emily didn’t use to read a lot of books, but now she reads at least six books a year. ‎ V. Group Work ‎ Work on 4c: ‎ ‎1.让学生们阅读表格中的内容。‎ Me I used to be afraid of…‎ I’m still afraid of…‎ the dark being alone flying high places giving a speech in public ‎2.先根据自己的情况在相关表格中打勾。‎ ‎3.询问自己的小组其他二到三名同学的情况，并在相关表格中打勾。‎ My partner My partner used to be afraid of…‎ My partner is still afraid of…‎ the dark being alone flying high places giving a speech in public ‎4.让学生们以小组为单位分别自主发挥，用英语来相互询问过去及现在所害怕的事情。 ‎ 示例：‎ A: Did you use to be afraid of the dark? ‎ B: No, I didn’t. But I used to be afraid of being alone. ‎ C: Did you use to be afraid of flying? ‎ D: No, I didn’t. But I used to be afraid of high places. ‎ VI. Exercises Ⅰ. 根据括号内的汉语提示，完成下列英语句子，每空词数不限。‎ ‎1. Mr Black _________________ (以前是一位医生), but now he is a singer.‎ ‎2. Did your father ______________ (过去常常看电视) after supper?‎ ‎3. You used to have long curly hair, ___________ (不是吗)?‎ ‎4. I _______________________ (以前常常骑自行车去上学), but now I ‎ ‎ _________________________ (习惯走着去). ‎ Ⅱ. 根据括号内的要求完成下列句子，每空词数不限。‎ ‎1. Mother used to grow flowers in her garden. (改为否定句)‎ ‎ Mother _____________ grow flowers in her garden.‎ ‎2. Bill used to collect stamps when he was in middle school. (改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎ _____________ collect stamps when he was in middle school?‎ Keys: I. used to be a doctor; use to watch TV; didn’t you; used to go to school by bike; am used to walking to school II. didn’t use to; Did Bill use to ‎ VII. Homework ‎ 调查你的家庭成员他们过去常常害怕的事情，并写成一个小报告，向你的同学们汇报一下。‎ Section B1 (1a-2f)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 能掌握以下单词：ant, inset, influence, seldom, proud, be proud of, absent, fail, boarding school, in person, exactly, pride, take pride in ‎ ‎2) 能掌握以下重难句子：‎ ‎① Li Wen’s unhappiness bagan to influence his schoolwork.‎ ‎② Sometimes he was absent from classes and failed his examinations.‎ ‎③ She advised them to talk with their son in person.‎ ‎④ They take pride in everything good that I do.‎ ‎ I know my parents love me and they’re always proud of me,” says Li Wen.‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎ 让学生明白事物是在不断发展、变化的道理，培养学生积极向上的心态。珍惜父母及亲人对你的爱，努力学习回报社会。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 掌握本课时出现的生词及用法。‎ ‎2) 进行听力训练，提高综合听说能力。 ‎ ‎3）阅读短文，获得相关信息，提高学生们的综合阅读能力。‎ ‎2. 教学难点 ‎1. 听力训练 ‎2. 阅读2b部分的短文并完成相关要求。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision ‎ ‎1. Daily greeting. ‎ ‎2. Check the homework. ‎ ‎3. Let some Ss talk about which things they used to be afraid of and which things ‎ they are still afraid of. ‎ ‎ A: I used to be afraid of the dark. I’m still afraid of the dark.‎ B: I used to be afraid of giving a speech in public. I’m still afraid of giving a speech in public.‎ A: I used to be afraid of flying. I’m still afraid of flying. ‎ B: I used to be afraid of high places. I’m still afraid of high places.‎ A: I used to be afraid of scary movies. I’m still afraid of scary movies.‎ B: I used to be afraid of dogs. I’m still afraid of dogs now. ‎ Ⅱ. Lead in ‎ ‎1. T: Show some pictures of the school activities, such as having P.E class, having music class, eating ice-cream and so on. ‎ ‎2. Talk about the activities you used to like or dislike very much. ‎ e.g. S1. I used to like P.E. class when I was a child. ‎ I used to hate music class when I was a child. ‎ S2: I used to like ice-cream when I was a child. ‎ ‎ I used to hate milk and eggs when I was a child. ‎ Ⅲ. Writing Work on 1a ‎ ‎1. Ss look at the pictures in 1a. Try to understand the activities in the pictures. ‎ ‎______ P.E. class ____ painting pictures ‎____ music class ____ ants and other insects ‎2. Let some Ss talk about the activities they used to like or dislike very much. ‎ Work on 1b: ‎ ‎1. Let Ss try to write some sentences. Then discuss with their partners. ‎ e.g. I used to like painting pictures when I was a child. ‎ ‎2. Let some Ss write their sentences on the Bb. ‎ Ⅳ. Listening ‎ Work on 1c: ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to read the sentences in 1c and try to understand the meaning of them. ‎ ‎1) ____ I didn’t use to like tests.‎ 2) ‎____ We used to walk to school.‎ 3) ‎____ I used to hate P.E. class.‎ 4) ‎____ I used to be on the soccer team.‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss. Ss just listen for the first time. Play the recording again and check the sentences Ss hear. ‎ ‎3. Check the answers: ‎ Keys: 1 3‎ Work on 1d: ‎ ‎1. Let Ss read the sentences in 1d first. Tell Ss to listen again and fill in the blanks with the right words. ‎ Girl ‎ In the past I didn’t use to like ____.‎ We used to wear __________________ to school.‎ Now ‎ I don’t worry about _____.‎ We can wear _________________ to school.‎ Keys: tests school uniform tests whatever we like Boy ‎ In the past We used to _____ every day after school.‎ I used to hate __________.‎ Now ‎ We __________ all the time.‎ I ______ P. E. class.‎ Keys: play P. E. class study love ‎2. Play the recording again for the Ss to listen and write the words. ‎ ‎3. Ss listen to the recording carefully and try to write the right words. ‎ ‎3. Check the answers with the class. ‎ Exercise: ‎ Listen again and try to answer the questions according to the recording. ‎ ‎1) Did the girl use to like test when she was six?‎ ‎2) What does the boy think of the tests in primary school?‎ ‎3) Did they use to wear school uniforms when they were in primary? ‎ ‎4) What did the boy think of the school uniform in primary school? ‎ ‎5) What did the boy use to hate in primary school? ‎ Keys: No, she didn’t.‎ He thinks they were easy. ‎ Yes, they did. ‎ He didn’t mind wearing a school uniform.‎ He used to hate P.E. class. ‎ Ⅴ. Comparing ‎ ‎1. Work in pairs. Compare yourself with your partner.‎ ‎ e.g. A: I used to be nervous about tests all the time. What about you?‎ ‎ B: Yes, me too. And I used to be afraid of making a speech in public. ‎ ‎2. Let some pairs make a conversation before the class. ‎ Ⅵ. Lead in ‎ ‎1. Show a picture of a young student. Tell Ss that the boy is Li Wen. He’s a 15-year-old boy whose parents are working in the city. Look at the title of the passage and predict the problems he might have. ‎ ‎ He Studies Harder Than He Used to ‎2. Now discuss them with your partner and guess the problems he might have. ‎ ‎3. Ask some Ss guess the problems.. ‎ ‎ e.g. S1. He used to break the school rules. ‎ ‎ S2: He used to hate studying and fail his exams. ‎ ‎ S3: He used to fight with his classmates. ‎ ‎ …‎ Ⅶ. Reading ‎ Fast Reading ‎1. T: Now let’s work on 2b. First, let Ss read the sentences and make sure they know the meanings of all the sentences. Then read the passage again and try to put the sentences into the correct places in the passage. ‎ Read the passage and put the sentences [A-D] in the correct places.‎ A. They had a long talk B. Now Li Wen has really changed C. However, things began to change a few years ago D. His teacher was worried about him ‎2. Give some good ways to the Ss. ‎ e.g. ‎ Paragraph 1: C 指导：‎ 由上文“当他小时候，他很少惹麻烦，他的家人和他在一起生活”，以及下文“他的父母搬到城市里去找工作，他很想念他们而且觉得很孤独和不开心”，可知李文的生活发生的变化，故应选C。 ‎ ‎3. Check the answers with the class. ‎ Careful Reading Work on 2c ‎ ‎1. Read the passage again and try to underline the problems that Li Wen used to have. ‎ ‎2. Check the answers with the Ss.‎ ‎ Problems that Li Wen had:‎ • felt lonely and unhappy ‎ • became less interested in studying • was absent from classes • failed his examinations • was shy and not able to make friends quickly • wanted to leave the school Post reading Work on 2d ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss that they have to use the clues from the passage to help them guess the meanings of the words in the box. Make sure Ss know what to do. ‎ 指导：‎ ‎1. influence 读 “until a conversation with his parents influenced his way of thinking”一句，然后再读第三段可知，父母和李文的谈话让他理解了父母对他付出多少，让他意识到自己问题的所在，故可推测是其父母亲和他的谈话“影响”了他思维的方式，故influence一词应意为“影响”‎ ‎2. Ss read the passage again and try to guess the meaning of the words. ‎ ‎3. Let some Ss say their answers.‎ ‎4. Check their answers with the class and tell Ss why. ‎ Work on 2e ‎1. Tell Ss that they should complete the passage with the proper forms of the words and phrases in the box. ‎ be proud of / take pride in make a decision/ decide miss / be absent from change / influence look after / take care of ‎ Li Wen is a 15-year-old boy. He works hard and does well in school. It is hard to believe that he used to have difficulties in school. When his parents moved to the city to work, they could not be at home to _____________________ him. So he became less interested in studying and _____________________ classes. ‎ Then his parents ____________________ to send him to a boarding school. He found life there difficult. One day he told his teacher he wanted to leave the school. His teacher advised his parents to talk with their son in person. This conversation __________________ his life. ‎ He realized that his parents would always love him, and they would ______________________ everything good that he did. Now he is much happier ‎ and more outgoing than he used to be. ‎ Keys: look after/ take care of ‎ missed/ was absent from made a decision/decided ‎ changed/ influenced be proud of/ take pride in ‎2. Ss work by themselves. If they have some questions, they may go through the proper paragraphs in 2b again. ‎ ‎3. Ask some Ss write his/her answers on the Bb.‎ ‎4. Check the answers with the class. ‎ Work on 2f:‎ ‎1. What do you think Li Wen and his parents talked about in their conversation? Write a conversation and role-play it with your group. Think of the following things:‎ • Possible questions Li Wen might ask his parents • Questions his parents might ask Li Wen • Possible answers from Li Wen and his parents ‎2. Discussion ‎ Did you used to have problems in school?‎ Did you talk with your parents?‎ Ⅷ. Language points ‎1. …he seldom caused any problems…‎ seldom adv. 频度副词 不常；很少 通常放在be动词、助动词或情态动词之后，实义动词之前。 ‎ e.g. She seldom goes out after ten o’clock. 十点后，她很少外出。‎ ‎ He is seldom late for school. 他很少迟到。‎ 中考链接 ‎ ‎—Do you like seeing a movie on your mobile phone?‎ ‎—No. I ______ do that because it makes me uncomfortable. ‎ ‎ A. seldom   B. often ‎ C. usually     D. sometimes ‎ Key: A ‎2. Li Wen’s unhappiness began to influence his schoolwork.‎ influence v.& n. 影响 influence可用作动词，其后接名词或动词不定式的复合结构。 ‎ influence可用作名词，常用于have / has an influence on ...或be an influence on ...结构。 ‎ e.g. Lu Xun’s works have strongly influenced millions of people.‎ ‎ 鲁迅的小说影响了数以万计的人。‎ ‎ What influenced Mike to make that decision?‎ ‎ 什么影响了迈克，让他做出了那个决定？‎ Cell phones have an important influence on our life.‎ 手机对我们的生活影响很大。‎ Their mother is a good influence on their habits. ‎ 他们的母亲对他们的习惯有好的影响。‎ 请根据汉语意思完成下列英语句子。‎ ‎1) 老师对学生有很大的影响。‎ ‎ Teachers __________ a great _____________  students.‎ ‎2) 受父母的影响，李梅成为了一名医生。‎ ‎ Li Mei’s parents __________ her ________ a doctor.‎ ‎3) 他的成功影响了其他的工人。‎ ‎ His success _______________________.‎ ‎4) 谁对你的人生有重大影响？‎ Who ____________________________ on your life?‎ Keys: have / are, influence on influenced, to be ‎ influenced other workers  ‎ has / is an important influence ‎3. …his grandparents came to take care of to him. ‎ take care of是一个动词短语，意为“照顾；照管”，意同look after 。 ‎ e.g. My parents are not at home and I have to look after/ take care of my sister. ‎ ‎ 父母不在家，我不得不照顾我的小妹妹。 ‎ ‎4. Sometimes he was absent from classes and failed his examinations.‎ absent adj. 缺席；不在 反义词：present adj. 到场的，出席的 be absent from 缺课 ‎ e.g. The boy was absent because he was ill. 那个男孩因病缺席了。‎ fail v. 失败；未能(做到)；不及格 ‎1) fail作“失败；未能(做到)”讲时：‎ e.g. Many diets fail because they’re boring. 许多节食失败了，因为太枯燥了。‎ fail in sth. 表示“在某方面失败”。‎ e.g. I failed in everything I tried. 我所有的尝试都失败了。‎ fail to do sth.表示“未能做到某事”。‎ e.g. She failed to get into art college. 她没能考上美院。‎ fail 意为“不及格”时，既可作及物动词，也可作不及物动词。 ‎ e.g. He failed (in) the exam. 他考试不及格。‎ 根据句意，选择正确选项完成句子。‎ ‎(1) Their car failed ______ the high mountain.‎ ‎ A. to climb         B. climbing ‎(2) I don’t know why she failed ______ the driving test.‎ A. on                  B. in Keys: AB examination n. 考试；审查 e.g. He is feeling sad about his examination. 他为自己考的不好而难过。‎ ‎5. Li Wen’s parents made a decision to send him to a boarding school.‎ make a decision 作决定 e.g. It’s difficult to make a decision. 作一个决定是很难的。‎ ‎6. She advised them to talk with their son in person.‎ in person 亲身；亲自 e.g. Most invitations are made in person or by telephone.‎ ‎ 多数请客是通过亲自或电话邀请。‎ ‎7. “It was exactly what I needed,”…‎ exactly adv. 确切地；精确地 e.g. Please tell me exactly what he said. 请将他说的话准确地告诉我。 ‎ ‎8. They take pride in everything good that I do.‎ ‎ …they’re always proud of me,…‎ ‎ pride和proud ‎ 相同点：‎ ‎ pride和proud都有“骄傲，自豪”的意思。‎ 不同点：‎ pride为名词，常用搭配为take pride in。‎ e.g. He looked at his garden with pride. 他骄傲的看着他的花园。‎ ‎ I take pride in my work. 我为我的工作而自豪。‎ proud为形容词，常用搭配为be proud of。‎ e.g. I feel very proud to be a part of the team. 我很自豪可以参加这个团队。‎ ‎ She is proud of what you’ve done. 她为你所做的而骄傲。‎ 根据句意选用恰当的选项填空。‎ ‎1) I’m ________ (pride / proud) to be your friend.‎ ‎2) He wore his medals with _______ (pride / proud). ‎ ‎3) I’m proud ____ (of / on) my hometown.‎ ‎4) He loved his daughter and took pride _____ (of / in) her.‎ Keys: proud ‎ pride ‎ of  ‎ in  ‎ Ⅸ. Homework ‎ Read the passage again after school.‎ Section B 2 (3a-Self Check)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 复习used to的用法。掌握生词ground, lead, voice, brave ‎ ‎2) 学会用used to 句型谈论自己、他人过去的习惯、爱好、形象及经常做的事。‎ ‎3) 能用就本单元所学习的语言知识来描写自己或他人与过去相比所发生的一些变化。 ‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ 让学生明白事物是在不断发展、变化的道理，培养学生积极向上的心态。珍惜父母及亲人对你的爱，努力学习回报社会。 ‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 能上节所学短文的内容，完成写段落关键词及短文填空的任务。‎ ‎2）掌握本单元所学used to句型的用法，并能正确运用此句型来进行表达。‎ ‎3）能综合运用就本单元所学习的语言知识来写作与过去相比所发生的一些变化。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ 写作与过去相比自己或他人所发生的一些变化。 ‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Revision Review the main story of Li Wen. Let some Ss try to retell the story of Li Wen. ‎ Fill in the blanks with the proper words or phrases. ‎ Li Wen is a good student, son and grandson. However, he ________ cause a lot of _______ for his parents. When his parents moved to another city to work, they could not be at home to ____________ him. So he was _____ interested in studying and even ____________________. Then his parents _________________ to send him to a boarding school, but he found life _________ there. In the end, his teacher ________ his parents to talk with him ________. This conversation _________ his life. He realized that his parents would always love him, and they would ____________ everything good that he did. Now he is one of the best students in his class. ‎ Keys: used to ‎ trouble take care of ‎ less absent from classes made the decision ‎ difficult advised in person changed take pride in II. Taking notes ‎ Work on 3a:‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to work in pairs. First try to takes notes about how you have changed in your appearance. ‎ Write the notes on a piece of paper. ‎ In the past Now ‎ ‎ appearance ‎ personality hobbies ‎2. Then talk with a partner about the changes that have happened to you. ‎ e.g. ‎ ‎ A: Oh, Maria. You have changed so much. You used to be short, didn’t you? ‎ ‎ B: Yeah, I used to be short and thin. But now I’m tall. ‎ ‎ A: Did you use to have short hair? ‎ B: Yes. I used to have short straight hair. Now I have long curly hair. ‎ A: Did you use to be shy? ‎ B: Yes. I used to be shy. But now I am outgoing. ‎ ‎3. Ss talk about how you have changed in the appearance. ‎ III. Writing ‎ Work on 3b: ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss what they should do. ‎ ‎ In this step, Ss should write about how they have changed. What did they use to like? Which change is the most important one, and why? ‎ ‎2. 阅读指导： ‎ Ø 写作中可尝试将短文写成两个段落。 ‎ Ø 第一段，同学们可根据在3a环节中向伙伴所做的介绍，写出这些变化。 ‎ 可先介绍自己过去的特点，再介绍自己现在的特点。‎ Ø 第二段中，介绍你最重要的变化，并简要说明这个变化是怎样发生的。‎ ‎3. Ss try to write a short article. ‎ ‎4. Walk around the class give any help Ss may need. ‎ ‎5. Let some Ss read their articles to the class. ‎ ‎6. Give Ss an example: ‎ How I’ve Changed！‎ ‎ How I’ve Changed ‎ My life has changed a lot in the last few years. I used to be overweight but I’m not anymore. I lost a lot of weight after I started playing tennis. Playing tennis three times a week is very good exercise. Now I’m fitter and healthier.‎ The biggest change in my life was becoming much better in English. This is thanks to my English teacher, Mrs. Wong, who gave me an interesting book to read. I enjoyed it so much that I started to read other books. This is the most important change because I am no longer afraid of the English language and I am doing better in my exams. This has made my parents even prouder of me.‎ IV. Self Check ‎ Work on Self Check 1: ‎ ‎1. Let some Ss read the words in the box. Make sure all the Ss know the meaning of the words. ‎ ‎2. Let Ss read the sentences in Self Check 1. Then Ss try to fill in the blanks with the ‎ correct forms of the words in the box. ‎ silent, require, absent, fail, interview, take pride in, be proud of, in person, influence, humorous, seldom ‎1) The mother traveled for many hours to return home to talk to her child _________.‎ ‎2) He used to be a very quiet teenager. He remained ______ most of the time and ______ talked to other people.‎ ‎3) If you are always ________ from class, you will ____the examinations.‎ ‎4) The teacher ____________ helping his students win the English competition.‎ ‎5) Kate’s grandparents have had a great __________ on her.‎ ‎6) The British teacher is very __________. He always tells us interesting jokes.‎ ‎7). People are usually ________ to give a general self-introduction in a job ________. ‎ ‎8) Tina played very well in the basketball game and her parents ____________ her. ‎ ‎3. Let some Ss read their answers. Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ Keys: in person silent seldom absent fail takes pride in ‎ influence ‎ humorous required interview are proud of ‎ Work on Self Check 2 ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss that they have to complete the statements below. They should write sentences about what they used to like when they were in primary school. ‎ ‎1) I used to wear _____________________________________.‎ ‎2) My hair used to be _______________.‎ ‎3) I used to watch ____________________.‎ ‎4) I used to play ______________________.‎ ‎5) I used to be ________________________________.‎ ‎2. Ss think and try to complete the statements by themselves. ‎ ‎3. Let some Ss read their sentences to the class. ‎ ‎4. Correct the mistakes they have. ‎ V. Exercise: ‎ If time is enough, do some more exercises on big screen. ‎ 一、选择恰当的单词并用其适当形式填空。 ‎ Asia, silence, help, exact, self-introduction, proud, European, Africa ‎ ‎1. We can find pine-trees (松树) in most ___________ countries. ‎ ‎2. It might be very ________ if you get advice from a close friend. ‎ ‎3. China is the host(主办国) of the Eleventh __________ Games. ‎ ‎4. She told me the whole story ________ as it happened. ‎ ‎5. Nile is an _________river. It flows into the Indian Ocean. ‎ ‎6. The house was very ________ because everyone was asleep. ‎ ‎7. Thanks for your invitation. Allow me to make a _________________ now. ‎ ‎8. He was the ________ of the village after winning the championship. ‎ Keys: European; helpful; Asian; exactly; African; silent; ‎ self-introduction; pride VI. Homework ‎ ‎1. 复习本单元的全部内容。‎ ‎2. 向父母亲了解你的家庭现在与十年前在生活上所发生的变化，并用英语写 ‎ ‎ 一篇小短文介绍给大家。‎ Unit 5 What are the shirts made of? ‎ Section A 1 (1a-2d)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 能掌握以下单词： chopsticks, coin, fork, blouse, silver, glass, cotton, steel, grass, ‎ leaf, produce, widely, be known for, process, pack ‎ 能掌握以下句型：‎ ‎① —This ring looks nice. Is it made of silver? ‎ ‎ —Yes, and it was made in Thailand. ‎ ‎② What is it made of/from? ‎ ‎③ China is famous for tea, right? ‎ ‎④ Where is tea produced in China? ‎ ‎2) 能够用英语描述及询问物品的制作材料，正确理解被动语态的用法及句子结构。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎ 了解一些日常用品的制成材料，增加生活常识，养成良好的生活习惯；了解一些地方知名产品或传统艺术品的制作过程以及制作材料，培养学生的民族自豪感及爱国主义精神。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 掌握本课时中出现的生词 ‎2) 能够用英语描述及询问物品的制作材料 ‎3）正确理解被动语态的用法及句子结构。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ 理解被动语态的用法及句子结构。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Lead in ‎ ‎1. 播放动画片《造纸过程》的视频，让学生们了解这个中国传统发明的情况。‎ T: Who invented paper first?‎ S1: Can Lun invented it in Han dynasty. ‎ T: What was paper made of then? ‎ S2: It was mainly made of bamboo. ‎ T: was it easy for people to make paper then? ‎ S1: No, it was very difficult then. ‎ T: What is paper made of now?‎ S3: It’s mainly made of wood, bamboo, and cotton.‎ ‎… ‎ Ⅱ. Presentation ‎ ‎1. Present the sentence structure, using the pictures on the big screen:‎ ‎ —What’s the golden medal made of? ‎ ‎ —It’s made of gold. ‎ ‎ —Is this table made of wood?‎ ‎—No, it isn’t. It’s made of glass.‎ ‎—Is Butter made from meat?‎ ‎—No. It’s made from cream? ‎ 让学生们学习掌握be made of/from句型的用法，及be made of与be made from的区别。‎ 两词组都是“由……制成的”之意。be made of 指从原料到制成品只发生了形状变化，没有发生本质变化（属物理变化）‎ be made from指从原料到制成品发生了质的变化，已无法复原（属化学变化）。 ‎ Ⅲ. Learning ‎1. Show some pictures on the big screen. Try to learn the new words using “be made of” structure. ‎ Learn the new words: chopsticks, coin, fork, blouse, silver, glass, cotton, steel, grass, leaf e.g. This pair of chopsticks are made of bamboo. ‎ This coin is made of silver.‎ Is this blouse made of cotton? ‎ No, it isn’t. It’s made of silk.‎ What’s the fork made of? ‎ It’s made of steel. ‎ These pigs like grass very much. ‎ a piece of leaf ‎ Kolas like leaves. ‎ ‎2. Ss discuss with their partner and try to learn the new words. ‎ ‎3. Give Ss five more minutes to remember the new words. ‎ Work on 1a: ‎ Let Ss read the things and materials in 1a. Discuss with their partners and match them with the materials. More than one answer is possible. ‎ What are these things usually made of? Match them with the materials. More than one answer is possible. ‎ 1. chopsticks 2. window 3. coin 4. stamp 5. fork 6. blouse a. wood ‎ b. gold c. silver d. paper e. silk f. glass Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ Ⅳ. Listening ‎ 1. T: Tell Ss they will hear a conversation about some things and material. Listen and match the products with what they are made of and where they were made. ‎ Things ‎ Made of Made in shirts cotton Korea ‎ chopsticks silver Thailand ‎ ring steel America ‎ ‎2. Let one student read the words in the box, Play the recording for the Ss to listen. ‎ ‎3. Ss try to listen and match the things with the material and here they were made. ‎ ‎4. Play the recording again. Let Ss check the facts they hear. ‎ ‎5. Check the answers Ⅴ. Pair work ‎ ‎1. Read the conversation in the box in 1c. ‎ ‎2. Ss try to made conversations using the information in 1b. ‎ e.g. A: Your new shirt looks very nice. Is it made of cotton? ‎ B: No, it isn’t. It’s made of silk.‎ ‎3. Let some pairs read out their conversations. ‎ Ⅵ. Listening ‎ Work on 2a: ‎ T: Let’s listen to another conversation between Nick and Marcus. ‎ ‎1. What are they talking about? First, let’s look at the pictures and the phrases in 1a.‎ ‎ (Let one students read the phrases in 2a.)‎ ‎ Listen and check ( √ ) the main topic of Nick and Marcus’ conversation.‎ ‎____ the science museum ‎____ the art and science fair ‎____ environmental protection ‎____ a model plane ‎____ a beautiful painting ‎____ grass and leaves ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and check the phrases. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording again to check the answers. ‎ Work on 2b: ‎ ‎1. Let Ss read the sentences below. Explain some main sentences for the Ss. Make sure they know what to do. ‎ ‎2. Let Ss read the questions in 2b. Make sure they understand the meaning of each question. ‎ Play the recording for the Ss to answer the questions. (If necessary, using the pause button.) ‎ ‎1) Where is the art and science fair?‎ ‎_________________________‎ ‎2) Do Nick and Marcus have to pay to go?‎ ‎ _________________________‎ ‎3) What is the model plane made of?‎ ‎ _________________________‎ ‎4) What is the painting made from?‎ ‎ __________________________‎ ‎3. Play the recording again to check the answers. ‎ ‎4. Play the recording again. Let Ss fill in the blanks of the conversation. ‎ Ⅶ. Pair work ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to make a conversation using the information in 2a and 2b. ‎ ‎ e.g. ‎ ‎ A: What did you see at the art and science fair?‎ ‎ B: I saw a model plane. ‎ ‎ A: What is it made of?‎ ‎ B: It’s made of steel, glass, and plastic. ‎ ‎2. Let Ss make their own conversations. ‎ ‎3. Practice their conversations in pairs. ‎ Ⅷ. Role-play ‎ ‎1. Work on 2d Read the conversation and complete the blanks.‎ ‎1) Chinese _____________ tea both in the past and now. ‎ ‎2) _________ I know, tea plants _________ on the sides of mountains. ‎ ‎3) When the leaves are ready, they _______ by hand and then _______ for processing. ‎ ‎4) The tea ____________ and sent to many different countries and places around China. ‎ ‎5) People say that tea ___________ ____ health _____ business! ‎ ‎2. Read the conversations and Let Ss read after the teacher. ‎ ‎3. Explain some new words and main points in the conversation. ‎ ‎4. Ask Ss to role-play the conversation in groups. ‎ X. Language points ‎ ‎1. What is the model plane made of? ‎ ‎ What is the painting made from?‎ be made of与be made from 辨析 两词组都是“由……制成的”之意。be made of 指从原料到制成品只发生了形状变化，没有发生本质变化（属物理变化）‎ be made from指从原料到制成品发生了质的变化，已无法复原（属化学变化）。 ‎ e.g. Glass is made of glass. 玻璃杯是由玻璃制成的。‎ ‎ The paper is made from wood. 纸是木头做的。‎ ‎2. For example, Anxi and Hangzhou are ‎ ‎ widely known for their tea. ‎ widely adv. 广泛地；普遍地 wide (形容词) + ly → widely (副词)‎ e.g. Gas is widely used for cooking and heating. ‎ ‎ 天然气被广泛地用于做饭和取暖。‎ ‎3. Where is tea produced in China?‎ ‎ produce v. 生产；制造；出产 ‎ 英语中有produce, grow和plant三个动词均可用来描述农作物及植物的“种植；‎ 生产；生长”，但有所区别。‎ ‎ produce指农作物成产量化地“出产”，或自然地“生长出；长出；结出(果实)”。‎ e.g. This region produces over 50% of the country’s rice.‎ ‎ 这个地区出产整个国家50%以上的大米。‎ ‎ These trees can produce very good apples.‎ ‎ 这些树能结出优质的苹果。‎ grow表示“种植；使生长”，着重指种植以后的栽培、生长过程。‎ e.g. These plants grow from seeds. 这些植物从种子生长而来。‎ ‎ The villagers grow coffee and corn to sell in the market.‎ ‎ 村民们种植咖啡和玉米好拿到市场上去卖。‎ plant侧重“栽种；播种”这一行为，指把种子或秧苗种到土壤里使之生长。‎ e.g. How many trees have you planted this year? 今年你们种了多少棵树？‎ ‎ They planted tomatoes and carrots in their backyard.‎ ‎ 他们在后院栽种了西红柿和胡萝卜。‎ ‎3. For example, Anxi and Hangzhou are widely known for their tea.‎ be known for 以……闻名；为人知晓 be known for = be famous for ‎ e.g. Suzhou is known for its beautiful gardens.‎ ‎ 苏州以其美丽的园林而闻名于世。 ‎ be known as和be known for be known as意为“作为……而著名”。be known for意为“因……而著名”。‎ 根据句意用be known as或be known for的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1) Han Han ____________ his writings.‎ ‎2) As we know, Yao Ming __________ a basketball player.‎ Homework I. Recite the conversation in 2d after school. ‎ II. Translation.‎ ‎1. 这个戒指是银制的。 ‎ ‎2. 这种纸是由树木制成的。 ‎ ‎3. 油漆是由什么制成的。 ‎ ‎4. 杭州因其茶叶而为人知。 ‎ ‎5. 据我所知，茶树被种植于山坡上。 ‎ Section A 2 (3a-3c)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 学习掌握下列词汇：France, no matter, local, brand, avoid, product, handbag, ‎ ‎ mobile, everyday ‎ ‎2）阅读短文，能按要求找到相应的信息。 ‎ ‎3）通过阅读提高学生们的阅读能力。‎ ‎4) 了解“中国制造”已在世界各国广泛存在，并被世界人民所认可。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎ 通过阅读短文，让学生们明白中国在近代的发展状况，认识到我们伟大的中国正在快速崛起，从以前依赖进口国外工业产品，到中国制造，中国已加入工业大国之列。 ‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎ 1) 掌握本部分出现的生词和词组，达到熟练运用的目标。‎ ‎ 2) 阅读短文，获得相关的信息。通过阅读练习，来提高阅读能力。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ ‎1) 阅读短文，获得相关的信息的能力。‎ ‎2) 理解并运用所学的词汇及表达方式。 ‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Revision ‎ ‎1. Ask Ss to role-play the conversation in 2d. ‎ ‎2. Check the homework. Let some Ss tell read their sentences.‎ ‎(1). This ring is made of silver.‎ ‎(2). This kind of paper is made from wood.‎ ‎(3). What is paint made from?‎ ‎(4). Hang Zhou is famous for tea.‎ ‎(5). As far as I know, tea plants are grown on the sides of the mountains.‎ Ⅱ. Lead in ‎ ‎1. 展示一段伦敦奥运会礼品的视频，让学生了解中国制造已被世界人民所接受。‎ ‎ Then ask Ss some questions: ‎ T: As we know, there are so many things made in China in England. What about in America and other countries in the world? Now let’s read the passage of 3a. First, read quickly and find the answer to this question:‎ ‎1) Where did Kang Jian visit last year?‎ ‎2) Were there many things made in China in the US?‎ ‎3) What two things did Kang Jian want to buy in the US? ‎ ‎4) Where were they made? ‎ Ss read the article quickly and try to answer the questions: ‎ ‎2. 方法指导：带着问题，然后快速阅读短文，争取在较短的时间内，找到答案。‎ ‎3. 学生们，按老师指导的方法进行阅读，并快速回答这二个问题。 ‎ ‎4. 最后，教师让部分学生回答答案，并校对答案。‎ III. Reading Work on 3b: ‎ ‎1. 告诉学生们再次阅读短文内容，并完成3b中的问题。‎ ‎2. 让学生们先读这五个问题，确信所有的学生都能理解这些问题的意思。‎ ‎3. 然后仔细回读短文，在短文的相关信息处划线，并回答出问题。‎ ‎3. 让学生们回答问题，校对答案。 ‎ Ⅳ. Careful Reading ‎ Work on 3c ‎ ‎1. 告诉学生们本学习活动的要求：写出下列指示代词在短文所指代的事物。‎ ‎2. 让学生们读3d中的内容，理解黑体指示代词所处的句子的意思，及其上下文的意思，开动自己大脑进行思维，确定它们所指的内容。‎ ‎3. 如果不能确定，可以在小组内进行讨论。‎ ‎4. Check the answers. ‎ V. Post reading Ask Ss to fill in the blanks to complete the passage. ‎ Kang Jian is a ____________ student from Shanghai. Last year he went to visit his aunt and uncle in San Francisco. He ______ it interesting that so many _________ in the local shops ______________ China. She wanted to buy a _________ for his cousin, but even though most of the toys were _______ brands, they were made in ________. ‎ Read the second paragraph and fill in the blanks. ‎ Toys are not the only things made in China. ______, there were many other things made in China--footballs, handbags, pet food, mobile phones. Even ______________ are made in China. He ________that Americans could_______ ______ ______ ‎ products made in China. ‎ He thinks it’s great that China is so good at ________ these _________ _________. He wishes that China will also get better at making ________________ __________ in the future. And people can buy those products in ______ ______ of the world. ‎ Ss try to fill in the blanks by themselves.‎ Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ VI. Explanations ‎ ‎1. no matter 无论；不论 no matter意为“无论”与“what, who, which, where, how”等疑问词连用，引导让步状语从句。‎ e.g. No matter what you say, I won’t believe you. ‎ ‎ 无论你说什么，我都不会相信你。‎ ‎ No matter when you are free, you can come here for a cup of tea. ‎ ‎ 无论你什么时候有空，都可以来这里喝杯茶。‎ ‎2. local adj. 当地的；本地的 e.g. The local people are always friendly to tourists. 当地人对游客一向很热情。‎ ‎3. avoid v. 避免；回避 avoid doing sth. 避免做某事 avoid 后面常跟名词、代词或动名词作宾语，但不能跟不定式作宾语。‎ e.g. They tried to avoid making Mrs. Li angry. 他们尽量避免让李老师生气。‎ ‎ Jack kept back his anger and avoided a fight. ‎ 杰克压住了怒火，避免了一场斗殴。‎ ‎4. mobile adj. 可移动的；非固定的 mobile phone 手机 e.g. Would you please give us some details of your mobile phone?‎ ‎ 你能给我们一些你的手机的细节吗？‎ ‎5. everyday adj. 每天的；日常的 everyday是every和day构成的合成词。everyday是形容词, 仅用在名词前作定语，不能单独使用。‎ e.g. everyday life日常生活everyday activities 日常活动 everyday与every day 辨析 every day是副词短语，意为“每天”，用作时间状语。‎ e.g. The teacher asked us to read English books every day. ‎ 老师让我们每天都要读英语。‎ VII. Exercises ‎ 用括号中单词的适当形式填空 ‎ ‎1. One who goes to ______ (French) never fails to visit Paris.‎ ‎2. How soon would you like to have these ___________ (product) done? ‎ ‎3. In the crowd, Sam looked aside to avoid _________ (see) Jane and Mary.‎ ‎4. Is this kind of bicycle______ (make) in Shanghai? ‎ ‎5. The ______ (locally) government listed him as an elderly person of no home. ‎ Homework ‎ ‎1. Read the passage several times after school.‎ ‎2. Make sentences with these words: ‎ ‎ no matter, be made in, find it + adj. that…, even though, avoid doing sth., everyday things ‎ Section A 3 (Grammar Focus-4c)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 学习掌握下列词汇：boss, Germany, surface, material, traffic, postman, cap, glove ‎ ‎2) 进行一步复习巩固学习Section A 部分所学的生词和词组。‎ ‎3) 对询问物品的制作材料、生产地点、生产制作过程等语句进行归纳总结和探究学习。‎ ‎4) 掌握被动语态的用法，并通过不同方式的练习，来熟练掌握被动语态。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ 了解一些日常用品的制成材料，增加生活常识，养成良好的生活习惯； ‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎ ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 复习巩固Section A 部分所学的生词和词组，达到熟练运用的目标。‎ ‎2) 被动语态的用法。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ ‎1) 探究学习询问物品的制作材料、生产地点、生产制作过程等句型。‎ ‎2) 被动语态的用法。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision ‎ ‎1. Have a dictation of the new words learned in the last class. ‎ ‎2. Review some main phrases we learned in the last class. Check the homework. ‎ Ⅱ. Grammar Focus. ‎ ‎1. 学生阅读Grammar Focus中的句子，然后做填空练习。‎ ‎① 你的衬衫是棉的吗？ ‎ ‎ ____ your shirts ____ ____ cotton?‎ ‎② 是的，而且它们产于美国。 ‎ Yes. And they were _____ ___ the US. ‎ ‎③ 飞机模型是由什么制成？ ‎ ‎ ______ the model plane ______ of ?‎ ‎④ 它是由旧木头和玻璃制成。 ‎ ‎ It’s made of _____ ______ and ______ ‎ ‎⑤ 茶产自中国哪里？ ‎ ‎ _______ ____ tea ___________ in China? ‎ ‎⑥ 茶产自很多不同的地区。 ‎ ‎ It’s produced in many ________ _______.‎ ‎⑦ 茶是如何制成的？ ‎ ‎ _____ is tea __________?‎ ‎⑧ 茶树种植在山坡上。当茶叶长成后，它们被手工采摘下来，然后送去加工。 ‎ ‎ Tea plants ______ ______ on the sides of the mountains. When the leaves ‎ are ready they _____ ______ by hand and then ______ ______for _________. ‎ ‎⑨ 在杭州人们种植茶叶。 ‎ ‎ People_______ ________ in Hang Zhou. ‎ Tea _____ ________ (by people) in Hang Zhou. ‎ Ⅲ. Summary ‎ ‎ 一、被动语态 ‎ 当主语为动作的执行者时, 谓语的形式为主动语态; 当主语为动作的承受者时, 谓语要用被动语态。‎ e.g. Many people speak English. ‎ ‎ （主动语态, 句子的主语many people是动作speak的执行者）‎ ‎ English is spoken by many people.‎ ‎ （被动语态, 句子的主语English是动作speak的承受者）‎ 二、被动语态的构成 ‎ 被动语态由“助动词be + 及物动词的过去分词”构成。与主动语态一样，被动语态也有时态、人称和数的变化, 其变化规则与be作为连系动词时完全一样。‎ ‎ ‎ 肯定式 否定式 疑问式 一般 现在时 I am asked …‎ He/She is asked …‎ We/You/They are ‎ asked…‎ I am not asked…‎ He/She is not asked…‎ We/You/They are not asked …‎ Am I asked …?‎ Is he/she asked …?‎ Are we/you/they ‎ asked …?‎ IV. Practice ‎ ‎1. Work on 4a: ‎ Tell Ss to read the sentences in 4a and try to fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the verbs in brackets. ‎ Learn some new words.‎ ‎2. Work on 4b: ‎ ‎1) 让学生们阅读句子，理解句子的意思，为进行句子转换做好准备。‎ ‎2) 将主动语态句变为被动语态句时，应先确定句子的谓语动词，并找出句子的宾语。然后，将句子的宾语变成被动句的主语，将谓语动词变成be+ V-ed形式。 ‎ ‎3) 逐句进行分析推敲，确定括号中单词的恰当时态。‎ ‎4) 最后，通读一遍句子，进行综合理解，看句子是否通顺，合理。‎ ‎5) Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ Learn some new words.‎ V. Talking ‎ ‎1. Ask five classmates about something they are wearing or have in their schoolbags. The list of words below may help you. (Learn some new words.)‎ ‎2. Let one pair read out the conversation in the box as a model. ‎ ‎3. 提示学生们运用左侧方框中的示例词。‎ ‎4. 让学生们以小组为单位分别自主发挥，用英语谈论自己的物品的制作材料及生产地点。 ‎ Homework ‎ 将下列句子变成被动语态句 ‎ ‎1. We use computers to search information. ‎ ‎2. The teacher often repeats the story. ‎ ‎3. They don’t allow fishing here. ‎ ‎4. Bill looks after his cat carefully. ‎ ‎5. We don’t often speak English at home. ‎ Section B 1 (1a-2e)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 能掌握以下单词：international, competitor, its, form, clay, balloon, scissors, lively, ‎ ‎ fairy, heat, polish, complete ‎ ‎2) 能掌握以下句型：‎ ‎① They are made of bamboo and covered with paper. ‎ ‎② According to Chinese history, sky lanterns were first used by Zhuge Kongming. ‎ ‎③ They are seen as bright symbols of happiness and good wishes. ‎ ‎④ After drying, they are fired at a very high heat. ‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎ 了解一些地方知名产品或传统艺术品的制作过程以及制作材料，培养学生的民族自豪感及爱国主义精神。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 掌握本课时出现的生词及用法。‎ ‎2) 进行听力训练，提高综合听说能力。 ‎ ‎3） 阅读短文，获得相关信息，提高学生们的综合阅读能力。‎ ‎2. 教学难点 ‎1. 听力训练 ‎2. 阅读2b部分的短文并完成相关要求。‎ 三、教学过程 Step I. Revision ‎1. Daily greeting. ‎ ‎2. Review. 主动语态变被动语态的方法 Computers are used to search information. ‎ ‎ The story is often repeated by the teacher. ‎ ‎ The cats are carefully looked after by Bill. ‎ ‎ English isn’t often spoken by us at home. ‎ Step II. Presentation ‎ ‎1. Present the new words on the big screen and learn the new words together. ‎ clay n. 黏土；陶土 balloon n. 气球 scissors n. 剪刀 fairy tale 童话故事 paper cutting 剪纸 celebration n. 庆典；庆祝活动 international adj. 国际的 ‎ e.g. The kilogram is the international standard of weight.‎ ‎ 公斤是国际通用的重量标准。‎ competitor n. 参赛者；竞争者 ‎ ‎ compete （动词）+ or → competitor (名词)‎ ‎ e.g. We can compete with the best teams.‎ 我们能与最好的队竞争。 ‎ ‎ Each competitor should wear a number.‎ 每个比赛者必须佩戴一个号码。 ‎ ‎ form n. 形式；类型 e.g. Jogging is a healthy form of exercise.‎ ‎ 慢跑是一种健康的锻炼方式。‎ ‎ its adj. 它的 ‎ e.g. My pet dog likes catching biscuits in its mouth. ‎ ‎ 我的宠物狗喜欢用嘴接饼干。 ‎ ‎ lively v. 生气勃勃的；鲜艳的 e.g. Mary is a lovely young woman with imagination. ‎ 玛丽是一名富有想像力生气勃勃的年轻女人。 ‎ historical adj. （有关）历史的 e.g. These are not just historical points. ‎ ‎ 这可不仅仅是历史的观点。‎ heat n. 热；高温 v. 加热；变热 ‎ e.g. Heat the water, otherwise it will freeze. （动词） ‎ 把水加热，否则会结冰。 ‎ The heat from the fire will soon dry your coat. （名词）‎ 炉火的高温很快就会烘干你的上衣。 ‎ polish v. 磨光；修改；润色 e.g. Let’s polish the silver before the guests arrive.‎ ‎ 让我们在客人到达前将银器擦亮。‎ ‎ Would you polish up the article a bit? ‎ ‎ 你把文章再润色一下好吗？‎ complete v. 完成 complete sth. 完成某事 complete doing sth. 完成做某事 e.g. They made every effort to complete the task.‎ ‎ 他们尽最大努力完成任务。‎ ‎ They have just completed building the bridge. ‎ ‎ 他们刚刚建成那座大桥。‎ ‎2. Ss read and try to remember the new words. ‎ Step III. Lead-in ‎ ‎1. T: Play a video of the Weifang Kite Festival ‎ ‎2. Ask some questions about it. ‎ e.g.‎ ‎1. Do you know what festival is it?‎ It’s Wei Fang International Kite Festival. ‎ ‎2. Do you like flying kites? ‎ What kind of kites do you have? ‎ Let some Ss talk about it. ‎ Step IV. Listing ‎ Work on 1a ‎ ‎1. Do you know how to fly a kite? What are kites made of? Write down some materials used in making kites.‎ ‎2. Let Ss discuss about it. Then write down their answers. ‎ ‎3. Check the answers together. ‎ bamboo, steel, paper, clothes, cord, knife, scissors and so on. ‎ Step V. Listening ‎ Work on 1b: ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to listen to a conversation between Laura and Zheng Yun and circle the correct answers. ‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss. Ss just listen for the first time. Play the recording ‎ again and circle the correct answers. ‎ ‎3. Check the answers: ‎ Work on 1c: ‎ ‎1. Let Ss read the sentences in 1c first. Tell Ss to listen again and write L for Laura or Z for Zheng Yun. ‎ ‎2. Play the recording again for the Ss to listen and write the words. ‎ ‎3. Ss listen to the recording carefully and try to write down their answers. ‎ ‎3. Check the answers with the class. ‎ Work on 1d Listen again and fill in the blanks with what you hear. ‎ Ss listen and try to write down their answers: ‎ Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ StepVI. Role-play ‎ ‎1. Work in pairs. Role-play a conversation between Laura and Zheng Yun using the information in 1b - 1d. ‎ ‎2. Let two Ss make a conversation as a model:‎ A: Where did you go on vacation?‎ B: I went to an international kite festival. ‎ A: That sounds interesting. What did you see there? ‎ B: I saw many different kinds of kites at the festival. ‎ A: Were the kites nice?‎ B: Yes, they were beautiful. They were made of different things like silk or paper. Some were painted with colorful drawings.‎ A: Sounds like you really enjoyed it. I never thought that something as simple as kite flying could be so exciting.‎ B: Yes, it was really fun to see which kite could fly the highest.‎ A: I think I want to learn to fly a kite, too.‎ ‎3. See which groups is the best. ‎ Step VII. Talking ‎ ‎1. Show some pictures of the paper cutting on the big screen. Tell Ss they are ‎ Chinese paper cuttings. It’s one of the Chinese traditional arts. ‎ T: Do you know folk or traditional arts? Now discuss with your partner. ‎ ‎2. Ask some Ss say what they know about the folk or traditional arts.‎ Step VIII. Reading ‎ Tell Ss the following is about three kinds of Chinese traditional arts. ‎ Fast Reading: ‎ ‎1. Read the passage and complete the chart below. ‎ ‎ Traditional art form ‎ Materials used ‎2. Check the answers. ‎ Careful Reading ‎ Work on 2c: ‎ ‎1. T: Now let’s read the passage again and answers the questions. ‎ ‎2. Let Ss read the questions first and make sure they know the meaning of each question. ‎ ‎3. Ss read the passage and answer their questions. ‎ ‎3. Check the answers with the class. ‎ Work on 2d: ‎ ‎1. Let one student read the phrases in the box and translate them into Chinese.‎ ‎2. Ss read the sentences and complete the sentences using the correct forms of the phrases in the box.‎ ‎3. Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ ‎ send out; rise into; turns, into; put on; such as; covered with ‎ Step IX. Language points ‎1. These usually try to show the things that are important in life, such as love, beauty and family.‎ such as和for example都有“例如”的意思，但是它们的用法有所不同。 ‎ ‎★ such as常用来列举同类人或事物中的多个例子。 ‎ e.g. I like animals, such as dogs, bears and pandas. ‎ ‎ 我喜欢动物，如狗、熊、熊猫。‎ ‎★ for example一般只以同类人或事物中的“一个”为例。 ‎ e.g. He has ever been to many countries, for example, Australia.‎ ‎ 他曾经去过许多国家，如澳大利亚。‎ ‎2. The most common things, from paper to clay to bamboo, are turned into ‎ ‎ objects of beauty.‎ ‎1) turn…into…表示“把……变成……；使……变成……” ，而turn into表示“转变；变成”等意思。‎ e.g. Can you turn an egg into a flower?‎ ‎ 你能把鸡蛋变成花朵吗？‎ ‎ The sunny morning turned into a rainy day. ‎ ‎ 晴朗的早晨变成了雨天。‎ ‎2) objects of beauty 在此为“精美植物；精美物品”的意思。其中object指具体、实际的“物品；东西”。‎ ‎ e.g. Look, there’s a strange object in the sky! ‎ ‎ 快瞧，天上有一个奇怪的东西。‎ ‎3. According to Chinese history, sky lanterns were first used by Zhuge Kongming. ‎ according to 根据，按照; 据……所说 ‎ e.g. According to the radio, it will rain tomorrow. ‎ ‎ 据电台广播，明天有雨。‎ ‎4. The pieces are carefully shaped by hand from a very special kind of clay and then allowed to air-dry.‎ ‎ 1) 此句中名词piece意为“作品”，指由艺人、作家等创作出来的艺术品或 ‎ 文学作品。如：‎ Just take a look at this lovely clay piece. Doesn’t this boy look real! ‎ 看看这个可爱的小陶人，这男孩看上去多么逼真啊！‎ Did you read that piece in today’s newspaper? ‎ 你看过今天报纸上的那片文章了吗？‎ ‎2) air-dry 是由air和dry复合而成的一个合成动词，意为“晾干”，类似的词还有blow-dry吹干。‎ ‎5. It takes several weeks to complete everything.‎ It takes (sb.) some time to do sth. 是英语中的常用句型，意为“花费（某人）多长时间做某事”。其中it是形式主语，动词不定式（短语）是真正的主语。‎ e.g. It took Jack three hours to make the model plane.‎ ‎ 杰克做这个飞机模型花了三个小时。‎ Step X. Group work Work on 2e ‎ ‎1. Now let’s work on 2e. First read the questions below. Then try to discuss the questions in your group. ‎ Which art form do you think is the easiest? Which is the most difficult？Why？‎ Which art form would you like to learn? Why?‎ ‎2. Let some Ss read their answers.‎ Homework ‎ ‎1. Read the passage again after school.‎ ‎2. Try to write a short introduction on how to make a Chinese clay piece. ‎ Section B 2 (3a-Self Check) ‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 复习被动语态的不同用法。 ‎ ‎2) 能够用英语描述一些常用生活用品的制作材料；描述一些熟悉物品的制作过程。‎ ‎3) 能用就本单元所学习的语法知识及语言材料，就自己所熟悉的话题写一篇小作文。‎ ‎ 介绍自己家乡的某个较为著名的艺术品、食物、工商产品等。‎ ‎2.情感态度价值观目标：‎ 了解一些日常用品的制成材料，增加生活常识，养成良好的生活习惯；了解一些地方知名产品或传统艺术品的制作过程以及制作材料，培养学生的民族自豪感及爱国主义精神。 ‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 能运用本单元所学的语法及语言材料，完成写作介绍自己熟悉的物品的制件材料及过程。‎ ‎2）掌握本单元所学被动语态这一语法知识点，并能运用这一知识进行造句。‎ ‎3）能总结本单元所学的物质材料、及一些艺术品的简单制作过程。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ 阅读短文，完成写作。 ‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Revision Review the main phrases and sentences. ‎ Ⅱ. Talking Ask some Ss to describe how to make a Chinese clay piece. ‎ Ø First, the pieces are carefully shaped by hand from a very special kind of clay and then allowed to air-dry. ‎ Ø Second, after drying, they are fired at a very high heat. ‎ Ø At last, they are polished and painted. ‎ Ⅲ. Discussion ‎ Talk about some special things that your city is famous for. ‎ e.g.‎ ‎ A: What’s your city famous for? ‎ ‎ B: Our city is famous for making lanterns. ‎ ‎ A: Really! What are they made of? ‎ ‎ B: They’re made of bamboo, silk or paper. ‎ ‎ A: What they can do? ‎ ‎ B: They were first used for lighting in the old days. Today, they are used at festivals and other celebrations. ‎ ‎ A: Why are they special? ‎ ‎ B: Chinese people love lanterns very much because they’re symbols of good luck and family reunion (团圆). ‎ Ⅳ. Writing ‎ ‎1. Work on 3a.‎ What are some special things that your town/ city is famous for? These can be food, artwork or any other products. Discuss them with a partner and take notes.‎ ‎2. Work on 3b.‎ Write a paragraph about the product. Use your notes in 3a.‎ ‎1. Use the following expressions to help you: ‎ My town/city is famous for… ‎ ‎…is famous in my town/ city.‎ ‎…is / are made of/ from/ with/ by/ in…‎ ‎…is / are used for…‎ ‎…is / are known for…‎ ‎…is / are special because…‎ ‎2. 写作指导： ‎ Ø 这是一篇科普性说明文，让同学们介绍灯笼的相关情况，语态应为被动语态为主；时态应以一般现在时为主，辅以少量一般过去时态或其他时态的句子。‎ Ø 写作时，应理清自己的写作思路，逐条清晰地进行介绍。比如，可以先介绍灯笼的历史、用途及象征意义。然后介绍人们悬挂灯笼的时间。最后，介绍灯笼的制作材料、产地及其类型。‎ Ø 注意要恰当运用被动语态，检查被动语态句的数、时态以及句子结构等是否正确。 ‎ ‎3. Ss try to write down their answers in the blanks. ‎ ‎4. Walk around the class give any help Ss may need. ‎ One possible version:‎ ‎ Lanterns have been around for about 1800 years. They were first used for lighting in the old days. Today, they are used at festivals and other celebrations. ‎ Chinese people love lanterns very much because they’re symbols of good luck and family reunion. ‎ ‎ From Spring Festival to Lantern Festival, lanterns are hung up everywhere. Lanterns were usually made of bamboo and paper in the old days. Now they are made of many kinds of materials, such as steel, silk, cloth, plastic and so on. They are made all round China. Lanterns are made in the shape of different animals, vegetables, fruits and many other things.‎ Ⅴ. Self Check ‎ Work on Self Check 1.‎ ‎1. List some things you use every day. Write down what they are made of/from and where they were made? ‎ ‎2. Let Ss discuss with their partners. Try to fill in the blanks. ‎ If necessary, Ss can review the things in Section A and B. ‎ Work on Self Check 2. ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to make true sentences with the information in Self check 1. ‎ ‎2. Give Ss one example: ‎ ‎ My pencil is made of wood and it was made in Shanghai. ‎ ‎ Ss try to make their own sentences. ‎ ‎3. Exchange their sentences and check if there’s any mistake. ‎ Work on Self Check 3.‎ ‎ Make sure Ss know what they should do. ‎ T: Complete the sentences using the correct forms of the words in brackets.‎ Ⅵ. Exercise Ⅰ. Complete the sentences.‎ ‎1. 皮革是动物的皮做的。‎ Leather ____ _____ _____ the skin of animals. ‎ ‎2. 这个小镇以其手工艺品而广为人知。‎ The small town ____ ______ _____ for its handicraft products.‎ ‎3. 茶叶被手工采摘，然后送去加工。‎ The leaves for tea plants are picked by hand and then _____ ____ for ‎ ‎_________. ‎ ‎4. 无论你做什么，都要尽力去做。‎ ‎_____ ______ ________ you do, you must do it with great efforts. ‎ ‎5. 国际风筝节每年在潍坊举行一次。‎ ‎ The ___________ kite festival ____ ______ in Weifang every year. ‎ ‎6. 据新闻报道，纽约州昨晚下了大雪。‎ ‎________ ____ the news report, it snowed heavily in New York last night. ‎ ‎7. 饭桌上铺着一层塑料台布。‎ ‎ The table _____ _______ _______ a plastic table clothes. ‎ ‎8. 大意驾驶酿成很多交通事故。‎ Careless _________ causes many ________ ___________ . ‎ ‎ Keys: 1. is made of 2. is famous for 3. are sent, processing ‎ 4. No matter what 5. international, is held 6. According to ‎ ‎ 7. is covered with 8. driving, traffic accidents Ⅱ. Finish the sentences.‎ ‎ 1. In spring, we can see green ______ (leaf) and grass everywhere.‎ ‎2. The Internet is ______ (wide) used in most families in our country today. ‎ ‎3. English ________ (speak) by many people in the world.‎ ‎4. The company hopes ____ (it) product will be successful on the European market. ‎ ‎5. My teacher did what he could to make his class ______ (live).‎ ‎6. If the traffic _____ (be not) heavy, it’ll take us an hour to get there.‎ ‎7. They spent one part of their holiday in _____ (French) and the other in England. ‎ ‎8. Bell is ______ (know) for inventing the telephone. ‎ ‎9. The Chinese use _________ (chopstick) instead of knives and forks. ‎ ‎ Keys: leaves, widely, is broken, its, lively, isn’t, France, known, chopsticks Homework ‎ 上网搜索你所喜欢的中国传统工艺品相关情况，用所学的句子写一个报告。‎ Unit 6 When was it invented?‎ Section A 1 (1a-2d)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 能掌握以下单词： heel, scoop, electricity, style, project, pleasure, zipper, daily, website, pioneer, list, mention ‎ 能掌握以下句型：‎ ‎① —When was the telephone invented?‎ ‎ —I think it was invented in 1876. ‎ ‎② —What are they used for? ‎ ‎ —They are used for seeing at night. ‎ ‎2) 能谈论物品被发明的时间、发明者，表达某发明的用途。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎ 了解一些近现代发明的时间及用途，激发自己热爱发明的情感。培养想象力，善于观察事物。面对难题，用积极的态度去解决，发挥想象力，认识世界，改造世界。 ‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 本课时的单词、词组和句型，学习运用一般过去时态的被动语态。‎ ‎2) 学会询问发明时间及用途的基本句型：‎ ‎—When was the telephone invented? ‎ ‎ —I think it was invented in 1876. ‎ ‎—What are they used for? ‎ ‎ —They are used for seeing at night.‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ 运用一般过去时态的被动语态来讨论发明的发明时间及用途。‎ 三、教学过程 I. Warming up ‎1. 展示一些近代发明的图片与近代发明的发明者，让学生们将图片与发明者相连。‎ T: Do you know what these inventions are?‎ S1: It’s a car. ‎ S2: It’s a telephone. ‎ S3: It’s a television. ‎ T: Do you know who these inventors are? ‎ S1: Karl Benz S2: Alexander Bell S3: J. L. Baird ‎ Let Ss match the inventions and the inventors. ‎ Ⅱ. Presentation ‎ 引导学生们学习一般过去时态的被动语态结构。‎ 让学生们看大屏幕的如果爱和发明者的图片,并将句子改为被动语态。‎ 如：‎ T: Karl Benz invented the first car in 1885. ‎ The first car was invented (by Karl Benz) in 1885. ‎ Ⅲ. Talking ‎1. Look at the pictures in 1a. Discuss with your group, in what order do you think they were invented? Try to number them [1-4]. ‎ ‎2. Ss discuss with their partners and number the pictures. ‎ ‎3. Talking about the inventions: ‎ A: I think the TV was invented before the car. ‎ B: Well, I think the TV was invented after the TV. ‎ Ⅳ. Listening (1b)‎ ‎1. T: Tell Ss look at the pictures and years on the left. ‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen. ‎ ‎3. Ss listen to the conversation and try to match the invention with the proper year. ‎ ‎4. Play the recording again. ‎ ‎5. Check the answers. ‎ Ⅴ. Pair work (1c)‎ ‎1. Ss try to remember the invention and the year. ‎ ‎2. Student B, cover the dates. Student A, ask Student B when the things in the picture in 1b were invented. Then change roles and practice again. ‎ ‎3. Let some pairs ask and answer in pairs. ‎ e.g. A: When was the telephone invented? ‎ B: I think it was invented in 1876. ‎ ‎… ‎ Ⅵ. Learning the new words & Listening ‎ Look at the pictures then learn the new words.‎ Work on 2a: ‎ T: Tell Ss they will hear some interesting inventions. ‎ ‎1. Look at the pictures in 2a. Discuss the things what they are used for. ‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and number the pictures. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording again to check the answers. ‎ Work on 2b: ‎ ‎1. Let Ss read the chart below. Explain some main sentences for the Ss. Make sure they know what to do. ‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss to fill in the blanks. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording again to check the answers. ‎ ‎4. Listen again and fill in the blanks. ‎ Ⅶ. Pair work (2c)‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to make conversations using the information in 2b. Make a model for the Ss. ‎ ‎ A: What are the shoes with special heels used for?‎ ‎ B: They are used for changing the style of the shoes. ‎ ‎2. Let some Ss make conversations using the information in 2b. ‎ ‎3. See which group does the best. ‎ Ⅷ. Role-play(2d) ‎ ‎1. Read the conversations and Let Ss read after the teacher. ‎ ‎2. Explain some new words and main points in the conversation. ‎ ‎3. Ask Ss to role-play the conversation in groups. ‎ X. Language points ‎1. Well, you do seem to have a point…‎ ‎ have a point 有道理 ‎ e.g. I admit (that) you have a point. 我承认你有理。‎ ‎ 2. They are used for seeing in the dark.‎ be used for doing sth.表示“被用来 做某事”。 相当于be used to do sth. ‎ ‎ e.g. This computer is used to control all the machines. ‎ 这台电脑是用来控制所有机器的。‎ ‎ Do you know what this tool is used for? ‎ 你知道这工具是用于做什么的？‎ ‎3. Think about how often it’s used in our daily lives.‎ ‎ think about 表示“考虑，想起”‎ ‎ e.g. He is thinking about travelling in the summer holidays. ‎ 他正在考虑暑假旅游的事。‎ ‎ She was thinking about her childhood days.‎ 她正回想她的童年时期。‎ ‎【拓展有关think 其它的短语】 ‎ ‎ think of 指“考虑，记忆，记起”‎ ‎ 如：You think of everything! 你全都提到了。‎ ‎ I can’t think of his name at the moment. 我一时想不起他的名字。‎ think sth. over指“仔细想，审慎思考，作进一步考虑”‎ 如：Please think over what I said.请仔细考虑我说的话。 ‎ ‎ I want to think it over. 我想仔细考虑一下这件事。‎ think sth. out 指“想通，想出，熟思”‎ 如：He thought out a new idea. 他想出了一个新主意。‎ ‎ That wants thinking out. 那件事需要仔细考虑。‎ Homework Recite the conversation in 2d.‎ Section A 2 (3a-3c)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 学习掌握下列词汇：by accident, ruler, boil, remain, smell, saint, national, ‎ ‎ take place, doubt, without doubt ‎ ‎2）阅读短文，能按要求找到相应的信息。‎ ‎3）通过阅读提高学生们的阅读能力。‎ ‎4) 了解茶叶被发明的历史及生产制作的简要过程。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎ 培养想象力，善于观察事物。面对难题，用积极的态度去解决，发挥想象力，认识世界，改造世界。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 掌握本部分出现的生词和词组，达到熟练运用的目标。‎ ‎2) 阅读短文，获得相关的信息。通过阅读练习，来提高阅读能力。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ ‎1) 阅读短文，获得相关的信息的能力。‎ ‎2) 理解并运用所学的词汇及表达方式。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Revision ‎ ‎1. Check the homework. ‎ ‎2. Role-play the conversation in 2d. ‎ Ⅱ. Lead-in ‎ ‎ 一、播放视频《茶叶的起源》，让学生们了解中国的茶文化，及茶叶被发明的渊源，并了解其发展过程。‎ ‎1. What is the video about? ‎ ‎2. Who is the writer of Cha Jing? ‎ ‎ Ss try to answer the questions: ‎ It’s about the tea. ‎ Lu Yu. ‎ Ⅲ. Reading ‎ Work on 3a: ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to read the article quickly and match each paragraph with its main idea. ‎ Lu Yu and his book Cha Jing How tea spread to other countries How tea was invented by accident Para. 1 ‎ Para. 2 ‎ Para. 3 ‎ Ss read the article quickly and match each paragraph with its main idea. ‎ ‎2. 方法指导：先阅读所给的三句话，然后快速阅读短文，抓住每一段的主题句，找到答案。‎ ‎3. 学生们，按老师指导的方法进行阅读，并快速阅读三个段落。 ‎ ‎4. 最后，教师让部分学生回答答案，并校对答案。‎ Para. 1 How tea was invented by accident ‎ Para. 2 Lu Yu and his book Cha Jing Para. 3 How tea spread to other countries Work on 3b: ‎ ‎1. 告诉学生们再次阅读短文内容，并回答3b中的所有问题。‎ ‎2. 学生们先阅读这些问题，理解它们的意思，然后带着相关问题仔细回读短文，并在短文的相关信息处划线。‎ ‎3. 让学生们回答问题，并校对答案。 ‎ ‎① It was first drunk nearly 5, 000 years ago. ‎ ‎② It was invented by accident. ‎ ‎③ Lu Yu. ‎ ‎④ It’s about how tea plants were grown and used to make tea. ‎ ‎⑤ It is believed tea was brought to Korea and Japan during the 6th and 7th centuries. Tea didn’t appear until around 1660 in England. ‎ ‎4. 让学生读一下自己的答案，并改正答案。‎ Ⅳ. Post reading ‎ Read and fill the blanks. ‎ Fill the blanks according to the first paragraph. ‎ Tea (after water), the most popular drink in the world _______ (invent) by accident. It is believed that tea _______ (drink) 5,000 years ago. It ______ (say) that a Chinese ruler ______ (call) Shen Nong was the first ______ (discover) tea as a drink. One day Shen Nong _______ (boil) drinking water over an open fire. Some leaves from a tea plant ____ (fall) into the water and remained there for some time. It ________ (produce) a nice smell so he ______ (taste) the brown water. It was quite delicious, and so, one of the world’s favorite drinks _________ (invent).‎ ‎2. Fill the blanks according to the second paragraph. ‎ Lu Yu, “the saint of tea”, ______ (mention) Shen Nong in his book Cha Jing a few thousand years later. The book describes how tea plants _______ and used to make tea. It also discusses where the finest tea leaves _______ (produce) and what kinds of water _______ (use). ‎ ‎3. Fill in the blanks with the proper forms .‎ People believed that tea _______ (bring) to Korea and Japan during the 6th and 7th centuries. In England, tea ________ (not appear) until around 1660, but in less than 100 years, it had become the national drink. The tea trade from China to Western countries ______ (take) place in the 19th century. ‎ Work on 3c. Complete the sentences with the correct forms of the verbs in the box. ‎ ‎1. 告诉学生们本学习活动的要求：用所给单词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎2. 让学生们读3c中的内容，理解每个句子的大体意思。‎ ‎3. 学生们阅读句子内容，回想短文的内容，选择恰当的单词并用其恰当形式填空。‎ ‎4. 如果不能直接填上，可以再去阅读短文，在相关的内容处，再仔细进行阅读，找到相关信息，并完成句子。‎ ‎5. Check the answers。 ‎ ‎( 1. invented 2. drunk 3. produced 4. brought 5. traded ）‎ Ⅴ. Language points ‎1. by accident 偶然；意外地 e.g. The little girl knocked the glass by accident.‎ ‎ 小女孩不小心碰落了玻璃杯。‎ ‎2. ruler n. 统治者；支配者 rule (统治) + (e)r → ruler 统治者 e.g. The new nation needed a modern-minded ruler.‎ ‎ 这个新兴国家需要一位现代头脑的统治者。‎ ‎3. boil v. 煮沸；烧开 e.g. Boil the potato for 20 minutes. 把土豆煮20分钟。‎ ‎4. remain v. 保持不变；剩余 ‎① 作连系动词，后跟名词、形容词、不定式、分词等做表语。指保持某种状态。‎ e.g. Peter become a manager, but Mike remained a worker. ‎ ‎ 彼得成为经理，可迈克仍是工人。‎ ‎② 作不及物动词，意为“剩余”。‎ e.g. Only a few leaves remained on the tree. ‎ ‎ 树上仅剩下几片叶子。‎ ‎5. smell n. 气味 e.g. The apples give off a sweet smell.‎ ‎ 苹果发出非常甜的味道。 ‎ v. 发出气味；闻到 e.g. I can smell some nice noodle soup.我能闻到香喷喷的面汤味。‎ ‎6. national adj. 国家的; 民族的 nation (国家) + al → national ‎ e.g. The group of dancers wore national dress.‎ ‎ 那群跳舞演员穿着民族服装。‎ ‎7. without doubt 毫无疑问；的确 e.g. Li Na, without doubt, is the best tennis player in China.‎ ‎ 毫无疑问，李娜是中国最优秀的网球运动员。 ‎ ‎8. take place 发生；出现 ‎① 是不及物动词，不能用于被动语态；常指事先安排或事发有因的事情。 ‎ e.g. Her sister’s marriage took place at 8:00 today. ‎ ‎ 她姐姐的婚礼今天八点举行。‎ ‎② 辨析：happen则常指偶然发生的事情 e.g. I happened to see Peter on my way to the museum.‎ ‎ 在去博物馆的路上我碰巧遇到皮特。‎ ‎9. It is said that a Chinese ruler called Shen Nong was the first to discover ‎ ‎ tea as a drink. 据说有一位叫作神农的中国统治者最早发现了茶可以饮用。‎ It is said that…是个常见句式，表示“据说……”, that后面接完整的句子。‎ e.g. It is said that thirteen is an unlucky number in many Western countries.‎ ‎ 据说在许多西方国家13是个不吉利的数字。‎ 本单元还有一个类似的句式: ‎ It is believed that…，意思是“人们认为……”, 其后同样接完整的句子。‎ e.g. It is believed that tea was brought to Korea and Japan during the 6th and ‎ ‎ 7th centuries.‎ ‎ 人们认为，茶在六至七世纪传到了朝鲜和日本。‎ ‎10.《茶经》是我国唐代一部有关茶叶及品茶的专著，作者陆羽。该书共 ‎ 分三卷十节，全面叙述了茶叶生产的历史，源流，生产技术以及饮茶 ‎ 技艺和茶道原理，享有 “茶叶百科全书”之美誉。‎ VI. Exercises ‎ 一、选词填空 ‎ ‎ smell, remain, ruler, boil, national ‎ ‎1. October 1st is __________ Day in China.‎ ‎2. Humans are the _____ of the earth.‎ ‎3. When fish goes bad, it _______ terrible. ‎ ‎4. They _________ in that forest for a year.‎ ‎5. Water ______ at 100℃. ‎ 二、根据汉语提示完成句子。‎ ‎1. I found the key __________ (偶然) when I was cleaning the house.‎ ‎2. The May 4 Movement ___________（发生）in Beijing in 1919. ‎ ‎3. He’ll succeed ____________ (毫无疑问) this time.‎ ‎4. ________ (据说) Shen Nong was the first to discover tea as a drink. ‎ ‎5. Tea _________________(被带到) Korea and Japan during 6th and 7th centuries. ‎ Homework ‎ ‎1. Read the passage several times after school.‎ ‎2. Make sentences with these words:‎ ‎ by accident, it is believed that, take place, no doubt, be used for, fall into ‎ Section A 3 (Grammar Focus-4c)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 学习掌握下列词汇：fridge, low, somebody, translate, lock, earthquake, sudden, all ‎ of a sudden, biscuit, cookie, instrument ‎ ‎2）进行一步复习巩固学习Section A 部分所学的生词和词组。‎ ‎3）进一步学习运用一般过去时态的被动语态。‎ ‎4) 掌握主动语态变被动语态的方法，并通过不同方式的练习，来熟练运用。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ 培养想象力，善于观察事物。面对难题，用积极的态度去解决，发挥想象力，认识世界，改造世界。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎ ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 学习生词fridge, low, somebody, translate, lock, earthquake, sudden, all of a sudden, biscuit, cookie, instrument ‎2) 复习巩固Section A 部分所学的生词和词组，达到熟练运用的目标。‎ ‎2. 教学难点： ‎ ‎1) 一般过去时态的句子变为被动语态。‎ ‎2) 综合运用所学的知识进行练习运用。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision ‎ ‎1. Have a dictation of the new words learned in the last class. ‎ ‎2. Review some main phrases we learned in the last class. Check the homework. ‎ ‎3. Let some Ss tell something about how tea was invented by accident. ‎ Tell something about how tea was invented by accident.‎ One day Shen Nong was boiling drinking water over an open fire. Some leaves from a tea plant fell into the water and remained there for some time. ‎ It produced a nice smell so he tasted the brown water. It was quite delicious and one of the world’s favorite drink was invented.‎ Tell something about Lu Yu and his Cha Jing.‎ Lu Yu “the saint of tea” mentioned Shen Nong in his book Cha Jing. The book describes how tea plants were grown and used to make tea. It also discusses where the finest tea leaves were produced and what kinds of water were used. ‎ It is believed that tea was brought to Korea and Japan during 6th and 7th centuries. In England, tea didn’t appear until around 1660. The tea trade from China to Western countries took place in the 19th century.‎ Ⅱ. Grammar Focus. ‎ ‎1. 学生阅读Grammar Focus中的句子，然后做填空练习。‎ ‎① 拉链是什么时候被发明的？ ‎ ‎ ______ _____ the zipper ________? ‎ ‎② 它于1893年被发明。 ‎ ‎ It ______ _________ in 1893. ‎ ‎③ 它是由谁发明的？ ‎ ‎ ______ _____ it invented ______? ‎ ‎④ 它是由惠特科姆•贾得森发明的。 ‎ ‎ It _____ _______ _____ Whitcomb Judson. ‎ ‎⑤ 茶叶什么时候被带到朝鲜去的？ ‎ ‎ _____ ______tea ________ to Korea? ‎ ‎⑥ 茶叶在六到七世纪之间被带到朝鲜。 ‎ ‎ It _____ _______ to Korea ________the 6th and 7th centuries. ‎ ‎⑦ 热冰淇淋勺用来做什么？ ‎ ‎ What ____ the hot ice-cream _____ _____? ‎ ‎⑧ 它用于挖很冷的冰淇淋。 ‎ ‎ It’s _____ ______ ______ really cold ice-cream. ‎ ‎⑨ 电话机在1876年被贝尔所发明。 ‎ The telephone _____ ________ _____ Alexander Graham Bell in 1876. ‎ ‎⑩ 贝尔于1876年发明了电话机。 ‎ ‎ Alexander Graham Bell _________ the telephone in 1876. ‎ ‎2. 学生们根据记忆，看大屏幕来完成填空练习。‎ ‎3. 学生们完成填空试题后，可以打开课本检查答案，对错误的句子，单独进行强化记忆。‎ Ⅲ. Grammar 一般过去时态的被动语态的构成 ‎ 英语有两种语态：主动语态和被动语态。主动语态表示主语是动作的执行者，而被动语态则表示主语是动作的承受者。如：‎ We cleaned the classroom yesterday. ‎ 我们昨天打扫了教室。‎ ‎(主动语态，主语we是clean这一动作的执行者)‎ The classroom was cleaned yesterday. ‎ 教室昨天被打扫。‎ ‎(被动语态，主语the classroom是clean这一动作的承受者)‎ 一、一般过去时被动语态 一般过去时被动语态的结构为“主语+ was /were +及物动词的过去分词 (+by+动作的执行者).”。如： ‎ Trees were planted last spring.‎ 去年春天种了树。‎ ‎1. 肯定句： ‎ 主语 + was/were +及物动词的过去分词 + 其他. ‎ Paper was invented by Chinese people two thousand years ago. ‎ 纸是中国人在二千多年前发明的。 ‎ ‎2. 否定句： ‎ 主语 + was/were not +及物动词的过去分词 + 其他. ‎ Women were not allowed to take part in the games at first. ‎ 开始妇女不允许参加奥运会。 ‎ ‎3. 一般疑问句： ‎ Was/Were +主语 +及物动词的过去分词 + 其他? ‎ ‎ Were these pictures drawn by your sister? ‎ 这些图片是由你妹妹画的吗？ ‎ 二、被动语态的用法：‎ ‎1. 不知道谁是动作的执行者，或没有必要指出谁是动作的执行者。‎ ‎ e.g. English is spoken all over the world. 全世界都在说英语。‎ ‎2. 需要突出或强调动作的承受者。‎ ‎ e.g. This dictionary is used by most students. ‎ ‎ 这本字典是大多数学生在用的。‎ 三、主动语态变被动语态应注意的问题 ‎1. 有些短语动词相当于及物动词，变为被动句时介词或副词不能去掉。 ‎ ‎ They put off the meeting because of the weather. ‎ ‎ The meeting was put off because of the weather. ‎ 会议因天气的缘故被推迟了。 ‎ ‎2. 含有双宾语的主动句变为被动句时，通常把指“人”的间接宾语变为主语，指“物”的直接宾语保留不变；如果把指物”的直接宾语变为主语，则在间接宾语前加to或for。 ‎ ‎ My aunt gave me an e-dictionary yesterday.‎ ‎ I was given an e-dictionary yesterday. ‎ An e-dictionary was given to me yesterday. ‎ ‎3. 主动句中感官动词see/hear/watch/feel等和使役动词make/let/have等后跟省略to 的动词不定式，变为被动语态时应加上不定式符号to。‎ I saw a heavy man enter the house. ‎ A heavy man was seen to enter the house. ‎ ‎4. 系动词、不及物动词或某些短语动词（happen, take place, come true, fall asleep…）没有被动语态。 ‎ What happened to Mr. Brown? ‎ 布朗先生发生了什么事？ ‎ Ⅳ. Exercises 练一练 ‎ 将下列句子变为被动语态。 ‎ ‎1. He chose six story books the other day. ‎ Six story books _____ _______ by him the other day. ‎ ‎2. Uncle Lee gave Jack a large cake for he painted the wall wonderfully. ‎ Jack ______ _____ a large cake for he painted the wall wonderfully. ‎ ‎3. A mouse ate half of the cake last night. ‎ ‎ Half of the _____ ____ by a mouse last night. ‎ 将下列句子变为主动语态。 ‎ ‎4. Were these machines invented by Edison? ‎ ‎_______ Edison _______ these machines? ‎ ‎5. The post card was sent to Linda by Paul. ‎ Paul _______ the post card _______ Linda. ‎ ‎6. America was discovered by Columbus. ‎ ‎ _______ Columbus discovered _________? ‎ Ⅴ. Practice Work on 4a: ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to read the sentences in 4a and rewrite the sentences using the passive voice. ‎ ‎2. 做题方法点拨示例：‎ ‎① 点拨：原句为一般过去时态，原句的谓语动词为sold，宾语为the fridge；改为被动语态时，应将the fridge作主语，谓语动词用was sold的形式。 ‎ They sold the fridge at a low price. → ‎ The fridge was sold at a low price. ‎ ‎ ② 点拨：分析原句的句子结构可知，stole是谓语动词，my camera是句子的宾语；改为被动语态句时，应将my camera作句子主语，谓语动词用was stolen的形式。 ‎ Somebody stole my camera from my hotel room. → ‎ ‎ My camera was stolen from my hotel room. ‎ 学生们自主将其他三个句子变成被动语态。 ‎ ‎3. 最后，教师与同学们一起校对答案，并对学生们有疑问的地方进行解释，或做出合理的分析点拨。‎ ‎ Where were these photos taken? ‎ ‎ We were advised not to go out alone. ‎ ‎ The book was translated into different languages by different writers. ‎ Work on 4b: Complete the sentences with correct forms of the verbs in the box. ‎ ‎1. 让学生们阅读方框中的词汇，了解词汇及句子的意思，为进行填词做好准备。‎ eat, like, invite, tell, lock, ring, break, bring ‎2. 认真阅读每个句子，根据上下文确定空格处应填的意思。‎ ‎3. 逐句进行分析推敲，然后分析句子的时态及语态，用适当的形式填空。‎ ‎1) You ____________ to the party last night, weren’t you? Why didn’t you go? ‎ ‎2) The earthquake happened all of a sudden, but luckily the villagers _____________ to a safe place. ‎ ‎3) The door ___________ when we arrived, so we ______ the bell. ‎ ‎4) The students ___________ not to eat or drink in class, but Ruby ______ the rule when she started eating a biscuit in science class. ‎ ‎5) The cookies __________ by the hungry kids in less than 20 minutes, and they really _____ them. ‎ ‎4. 最后，通读一遍所有句子，进行综合理解，看句子的意思是否通顺，合理。‎ ‎5. Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ ‎ 1. were invited 2. were brought ‎ ‎3. was locked, rang (前一句中，门是被锁的，故应用被动语态；后一句中，我们去按门铃，是主动语态。) ‎ ‎4. were told, broke (前一句中，学生们是被告诉不要做这些事情，故应用被动语态；后一句中，Ruby违反规则，则是主动语态。) ‎ ‎5. were eaten, liked (前一句中，饼干是被孩子们吃掉了，故应用被动语态；后一句中，孩子们喜欢这些饼干，则是主动语态。) ‎ Ⅵ. Practice ‎ Work on 4c: Decide whether active or passive forms should be used in these sentences. Write the correct forms in the blanks. ‎ ‎1. 先通读小短文，了解大意。‎ The telephone ______________ (invent) by Alexander Graham Bell. He __________ (born) in 1847. Mr. Bell ________ (work) on the invention of the telephone with Thomas Watson. ‎ In 1875, Mr. Bell _________ (learn) how to send musical notes through an instrument similar to a telephone. Finally, the telephone _____________ (invent) in 1876. The first sentence that _________ (say) on the telephone by Mr. Bell was “Mr. Watson, come here; I want to see you.” Today the telephone ________ (use) around the world. ‎ ‎2. 逐句分析每一句话的意思，确定句子主语和谓语动词之间主动或被动关系。‎ ‎3. 结合句子的时态，填上正确的形式。‎ ‎4. 复读短文，看是否通顺。‎ ‎5. Check the answers Homework ‎ 补全下列主动句变被动句。‎ ‎1. Jenny put her clothes in the suitcase last night.‎ Her clothes____ ____ in the suitcase last night.‎ ‎2. The twins sang an English song that day. An English song ____ _____ ___ by the twins that day.‎ ‎3. Did they build a bridge here a year ago?   ____ a bridge ____ here by them a year ago?‎ ‎4. They sold out the light green dresses yesterday. The light green dresses ____ _____ _____ out.‎ Section B 1 (1a-2e) ‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 能掌握以下单词：crispy, salty, sour, by mistake, customer, the Olympics, Canadian, divide, divide…into, basket, popularity, look up to, hero, professional ‎ ‎2) 能掌握以下句型：‎ ‎① Potato chips were invented by mistake. ‎ ‎② It is believed that the first basketball game in history was played on December 21, 1891.‎ ‎③ Dr. Naismith divided the men in his class into two teams and taught them to play his new game.‎ ‎④ At the same time, they need to stop the competing team from getting the ball into their own basket. ‎ ‎⑤ These stars encourage young people to work hard to achieve their dreams. ‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎ 了解世界上一些对人类有着重大意义的发明的相关信息，开阔学生的眼界，养成勤于思考，善于发现的好习惯，培养学生的创造精神。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 掌握本课时出现的生词及用法。‎ ‎2) 进行听力训练，提高综合听说能力。 ‎ ‎3) 阅读短文，获得相关信息，提高学生们的综合阅读能力。‎ ‎2. 教学难点 ‎1) 听力训练 ‎2) 阅读2b部分的短文并完成相关要求。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming up ‎1. Let Ss watch an interesting picture. ‎ ‎2. Ask some questions about them. ‎ ‎1. What did they eat? ‎ S1: Ice cream. ‎ ‎2. What did the big dog think of the ice-cream? ‎ S2: Sweet, cool, and delicious! ‎ Well let’s look at some other delicious food, please. ‎ Ⅱ. Talking ‎ Work on 1a ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss that the words in the box describe how food can taste. Write them under the correct pictures. Some pictures have more than one word. ‎ ‎2. Ss work with their partners and try to write some proper words under the pictures. ‎ ‎3. Let some Ss read their answers. Try to remember the new words. ‎ Work on 1b ‎ ‎1. Let some Ss read the adjective words in the box. Make sure they all know the meaning of each word. ‎ ‎2. Ss discuss with their partners. Try to write the name of a different food after each word.‎ Learn the new words together:‎ Ⅲ. Listening ‎ Work on 1c ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss the conversation is about how the potato chips were invented. The story is very interesting. ‎ ‎2. First, let one Ss read the sentences in 1c. Make sure they know the meaning of each sentence. ‎ ‎ 1. Potato chips were invented by mistake. ‎ ‎2. They were invented in 1863. ‎ ‎3. The customer thought the potatoes were not thin enough.‎ ‎ 4. The customer said they were not salty enough.‎ ‎5. George wanted to make the customer happy.‎ ‎6. The custom was happy in the end. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording for the Ss. Listen for the first time. Play the recording again and judge T or F. ‎ ‎ Keys: T, F, T, F, F, T ‎4. Listen and answer the questions. ‎ ‎1. Who invented potato chips? ‎ ‎2. When were they invented?‎ ‎ 3. What did the custom order at the restaurant?‎ ‎ 4. What did the custom think of the potato chips George cooked at first? ‎ ‎5. How did George cook the potatoes then?‎ Work on 1d ‎1. Let Ss read the article in 1d first. Tell Ss to listen again and fill in the blanks with the right words. ‎ ‎2. Play the recording again for the Ss to listen and write the words. ‎ ‎ The History of Potato Chips Do you know how potato chips were invented? Potato chips ____________ by a cook called George Crum. They were invented in ____. ‎ George Crum cut the potatoes really, really ____ and then cooked them for a long time until they were _____. Finally he put lots of salt on them so they were ____. ‎ ‎ Keys: were invented, 1853, thin, crispy, really salty Ⅳ. Pair work ‎ ‎1. Work in pairs. Make a conversation about the invention of potato chips. Use the information in 1c and 1d. ‎ ‎2. Ask some pairs to act out their conversation in front of the class. ‎ Ⅴ. Discussion Show some pictures of playing basketball. Ask Ss some questions about basketball games. Discuss the sport with your partner and share your ideas with the class.‎ e.g. ‎ T: Do you like basketball? (What’s your favorite sport?) ‎ S1: Sure. I like it very much. ‎ T: Do you watch basketball games?‎ S2: Yes. I like to watch the NBA and CBA. ‎ T: Do you know the history of basketball game? ‎ Ⅵ. Reading Fast Reading ‎ Tell Ss to read the passage quickly. And find the main idea of each paragraph. ‎ Keys: 1. The main history of basketball. ‎ ‎ 2. How the basketball was invented by James.‎ ‎3. The popularity of basketball around the world. ‎ Careful Reading ‎ ‎1. T: Now let’s read the mind map in 2c. Try to understand the meaning of the map. ‎ ‎ Ask Ss to complete the mind map with the information in the passage. ‎ ‎ Mind-mapping Changing the information you read into a mind map may help you remember it more easily.‎ ‎2. Ss read the passage carefully and try to fill in the mind map with the proper words. ‎ ‎ Development:‎ Ø invented by ______________ ‎ Ø first game on ________________ ‎ Ø became Olympic event in ______ in the year ______. ‎ Ø most famous games: _____‎ Ø popular games in China: _____ ‎ ‎ Game:‎ Ø played inside on a hard _____.‎ Ø ‎____ teams ‎ Ø get _______ into other team’s ______. ‎ ‎ Popularity:‎ Ø played by __________________ people.‎ Ø over ____ countries ‎ ‎3. Check the answers with the class. ‎ ‎4. Tell Ss to work hard and add something to the mind map. ‎ ‎ Encourage Ss to try their best. ‎ Post reading Work on 2d ‎ ‎1. Now let’s work on 2d. First read the questions below. Then try to read the passage again and find the answers to the questions. ‎ ‎2. Ss read the passage again and try to find the answers to the questions. ‎ ‎ 1. Who invented basketball and how is it played? ‎ ‎2. When was the first basketball game in history played? ‎ ‎3. Why were the Berlin Olympics important for basketball?‎ ‎4. What are the professional basketball groups in America and China?‎ ‎5. How popular is basketball? ‎ ‎3. Let some Ss read their answers and correct their mistakes. ‎ Ⅶ. Language points ‎1. Potato chips were invented by mistake.‎ ‎ by mistake 错误地；无意中 ‎ e.g. Somebody took the my umbrella by mistake. 有人错拿了我的伞。‎ ‎ I picked up your bag by mistake. 我错拿了你的包。 ‎ ‎2. Dr. Naismith divided the men in his class into two teams…‎ ‎ divide v. 分开；分散 ‎ divide… into… 把……分开；分散 e.g. She divided the orange into quarters and each ate a piece.‎ ‎ 她把橙子分成四份，每人吃一份。 ‎ ‎3. Today, the popularity of basketball has risen around the world, with many young people dreaming of becoming famous players.‎ ‎ 1) today adv. 修饰整个句子，表示当前的一段时间，“如今；当今”。‎ ‎ e.g. Today, only a few kinds of these beautiful animals still live on the earth.‎ ‎ 现今，这些美丽的动物只有少数几种还生活在地球上。‎ ‎2) with与在意义上有主谓关系的复合结构many young people dreaming of…‎ 构成短语，用作状语。‎ ‎4. Basketball has not only become a popular sport to play, but it has also become a popular sport to watch.‎ ‎ not only…, but also… 不但……而且…… 若连接两个成分作主语，谓语动词与靠近的主语保持一致。‎ ‎ e.g. Not only the students but also their teacher is enjoying the film. ‎ ‎ 不仅学生们在欣赏这部影片，他们的老师也在欣赏这部影片。‎ ‎5. The number of foreign players, including Chinese players, in the NBA has increased.‎ ‎ 1) number表示数量。由于是单数形式，谓语动词需要与之相配，为has increased。这种主语和谓语在数上的匹配称作“主谓一致”。当主语为复数概念是，谓语动词用复数形式与之匹配；当主语为单数概念时，谓语动词则用单数形式。‎ e.g. People there are very friendly. people为复数概念。‎ ‎ The United Nations is an international organization that tries to find peaceful solutions to world problems. the United Nations是一个组织，为单数概念。‎ ‎2) the number of… “……的数量；……的数目”。作主语时，谓语动词应用单数形式。‎ ‎ a number of… “若干的，一些”，修饰可数名词。作主语时，谓语动词应用复数形式。‎ e.g. The number of people killed in the accident hasn’t been announced yet.‎ ‎ 这次事故中的死亡人数尚未公布。‎ ‎ A number of people are unhappy with this decision.‎ ‎ 一些人对这项决定并不满意。‎ ‎6. Many young people look up to these basketball heroes and want to become like them.‎ ‎ look up to 钦佩；仰慕 ‎ e.g. The artist is looked up to for his landscape paintings.‎ ‎ 这名画家以风景画受人仰慕。‎ 拓展：look词组 look back 回头看; 回顾 look down upon (on) 看不起,轻视 look forward to 盼望，期待 look into 朝......看去; 调查 look like 看上去象 look on 旁观，观望 look out 当心，小心，留神 look through 浏览；透过......看 look up 查阅; 抬头看 Ⅷ. Discussion Work on 2e ‎1. Ask Ss what they think of famous basketball players. Make a list of good and difficult things about being a basketball player. ‎ ‎2. Ss work in groups. Discuss them with their partners and make a list. ‎ ‎3. Let some groups read their lists.‎ Homework ‎ Write a short passage about the development of basketball. ‎ Section B 2 (3a-Self Check)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 复习一般过去时态被动语态的用法。 ‎ ‎2) 能够用英语讲述自己所熟悉的某一发明的简单过程。‎ ‎3) 能用就本单元所学习的寓言故事等语言材料，进行完型填空。 并用英语介 ‎ ‎ 绍某一发明的简要过程。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ 了解世界上一些对人类有着重大意义的发明的相关信息，开阔学生的眼界，养成勤于思考，善于发现的好习惯，培养学生的创造精神。 ‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1）用英语介绍某一发明的简要过程。 ‎ ‎2）掌握本单元所学的词汇、句型及语法知识，并能进行综合练习运用。‎ ‎3）完成Self check部分的练习试题。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ 用英语介绍某一发明的简要过程。 ‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Revision ‎1. Review the expressions and sentences in Section B 1. ‎ ‎2. Check the homework. ‎ Let Ss introduce the history of basketball. ‎ Ⅱ. Lead in ‎ ‎1. Ask Ss which invention they like best.‎ ‎ Ss think about their favorite inventions. ‎ ‎2. Let some Ss talk about their favorite inventions. ‎ Ⅲ. Thinking ‎ ‎1. Ask Ss what things they don’t like to do. ‎ ‎ e.g. Problem: quickly taking notes in class. ‎ ‎2. Discuss in group and think of an invention that could help you. ‎ ‎ e.g. New invention: a special pen ‎ ‎ What it is used for： taking notes quickly in class ‎ ‎3. Ss discussing the problems and try to make their own notes. ‎ ‎4. Let some Ss read their notes to the class. ‎ Ⅳ. Writing ‎ Work on 3b: ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to write a description of your new invention. ‎ ‎2. The following sentence structure may help you. ‎ 常用句型： ‎ ‎① I think … is a very useful invention. ‎ 我认为……是一项很有用的发明。 ‎ ‎② … was invented by… ‎ ‎ ……是由……(某人)发明的 ‎ ‎③ … was invented in… ‎ ‎ ……是在……（某时间）发明的 ‎ ‎④ It was used for… 它被用来…… ‎ ‎⑤ … is made of……… 是由……(材料)制成的 ‎ Ⅴ. Self Check ‎ Work on Self Check 1: ‎ ‎1. Read the words in the box and make sure they know the meaning of each word. ‎ ‎2. Read the passage and try to fill in the blanks with the proper word. ‎ ‎3. Read the passage again. Check if the forms of the words are correct. ‎ ‎3. Let some Ss read their answers. Correct the mistakes. ‎ Work on Self Check 2 ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to rewrite the sentences using the passive voice. ‎ ‎2. 方法指导：‎ ‎ 复习一般过去时态的被动语态的句子结构。‎ ‎ 复习将主动语态句子变为被动语态句子的过程。‎ ‎3. Ss work by themselves and try to rewrite the sentences. ‎ ‎4. Check the answers with the class. ‎ Work on Self Check 3‎ Find out information about an invention you would like to know more about and write sentences below. ‎ Invention: __________‎ When: _____________‎ Who: _____________‎ Purpose: __________‎ Exercise: ‎ If time is enough, do some more exercises on big screen. ‎ 一、用所给单词的适当形式填空 ‎ ‎1. During the afternoon, there was a _______ (suddenly) heavy fall of snow. ‎ ‎2. I think the telephone _____________ (invent) before the car. ‎ ‎3. The __________ (Canada) song Alouette(百灵鸟) is a fun song about a bird. ‎ ‎4. They ____________ (invite) to take part in the May Day celebrations in Beijing. ‎ ‎5. The ___________ (popular) of private cars is changing the people’s life style. ‎ ‎6. When the bill ____________ (bring) to him, he was such surprised. ‎ ‎7. They gave their lives for their country and were honored as ________ (hero). ‎ ‎8. We ___________ (divide) into eight groups by our teacher last week. ‎ Homework ‎ ‎1. 试着向你的朋友用英语讲述篮球的发展过程。 ‎ ‎2. 用下列词汇造句子。 ‎ look up to, by mistake, daily activities, It is said, all of a sudden, fall into, at the Olympics ‎ ‎ ‎ Unit 7 Teenagers should be allowed to ‎ choose their own clothes.‎ 教学目标：‎ ‎1语言目标：理解并正确运用本单元的重点词汇 ‎2 技能目标：熟练运用 “should (not) be allowed to do”谈论应该被允许和不应该被允许做某事;‎ 熟练运用 “be (not) allowed to do”谈论被允许和不被允许做某事; ‎ 熟练运用 “I agree / disagree.”或“ I don’t agree.”表达自己的观点。‎ ‎3 情感目标：通过了解和反思自己的言行举止是否符合中学生日常行为准则、规范自己的言行，养成自觉遵守规则的良好习惯和优良品德；‎ ‎ 正确看待“家规”“班规”“校规”等，并能认真遵守；‎ ‎ 明白父母、教师的合理建议对自己成长的重要性 ‎4文化意识目标:‎ ‎ 了解中外审美观的差异，形成自己的审美观，展示个性；‎ ‎ 了解中西方关于青少年的不同文明准则。‎ 教学重点：‎ 重点语法：被动语态 重点词汇：smoke, pierce, license, safety, earring, cry, field, hug, lift, awful, teen, regret, poem, bedroom , community, chance, manage, society, unit, educate, professional, enter, support ‎ talk about, keep away from, make one’s own decision, get in the way of ‎ 重点句型：‎ ‎ I don’t think sixteen-year-olds should be allowed to drive.‎ ‎ I agree./ I disagree. I think sixteen is too young.‎ Do you think teenagers should be allowed to work at night? ‎ Yes, I do. / No, I don’t.‎ 教学难点：含情态动词 should的被动语态结构“should be allowed to”‎ 课时划分：‎ ‎ Period One: Section A 1 (1a-2d)‎ Period Two: Section A 2 (3a-3c)‎ Period Three: Section A 3 (Grammar Focus-4c)‎ Period Four: Section B 1 (1a-2e)‎ Period Five: Section B 2 (3a-Self Check)‎ Section A 1 (1a-2d)‎ I. Presentation Ask students: Do your parents allow you to watch TV? Yes, they do.‎ Present the sentence: You are allowed to watch TV.‎ Teach “allow sb to do sth “ ‎ ‎“be (not) allowed to do sth”‎ ‎ “should (not)be allowed to do sth”‎ Present more sentence.‎ Do your parents allow you to exercise?‎ Yes, they do. ‎ You are allowed to exercise. ‎ Do your parents allow you to smoke?‎ No, they don’t. ‎ You are not allowed to smoke. ‎ Do your parents allow you to drive?‎ No, they don’t. ‎ You are not allowed to drive. ‎ Do your parents allow you to choose your own clothes?‎ No, they don’t. ‎ You should be allowed to choose your own clothes.‎ Do your parents allow you to get your ear pierced?‎ No, they don’t. ‎ You should not be allowed to get your ear pierced.‎ II. Warming up Obey the school rules!‎ As a teenager, you have a lot of rules at school. Can you write down some of them?‎ Students should be allowed to speak English loudly.‎ Students shouldn’t be allowed to sleep in class.‎ Students shouldn’t be allowed to make noises.‎ Students shouldn’t be allowed to throw the rubbish in the classroom.‎ Students shouldn’t be allowed to get to class late.‎ Explain: ‎ allow sb to do sth ‎ 允许某人做某事 be allowed to do sth 被允许做某事 should be allowed to do sth 应该被允许做某事 ‎1a. Read the statements below. Circle A for agree or D for disagree.‎ ‎1. Teenagers should not be allowed to smoke. A D ‎2. Sixteen-year-olds should be allowed to drive. A D ‎3. Students should not be allowed to have part-time jobs. A D ‎4. Sixteen-year-olds should be allowed to get their ears pierced. A D ‎5. Teenagers should be allowed to choose their own clothes. A D III. Listening ‎1b Listen and circle T for true or F for false.‎ ‎1. Anna can go to the shopping center by bus. T F ‎2. Anna wants to get her ears pierced. T F ‎3. Anna wants to choose her own clothes. T F IV. Practice ‎1c Look at the statements in la and make conversations.‎ A: I don't think sixteen-year-olds should be allowed to drive.‎ B: I agree. They aren't serious enough.‎ V. Key phrases ‎1. be allowed to do 被允许去做 ‎2. the shopping center 购物中心 ‎3. driver’s license 驾驶执照 ‎4. sixteen-year-olds 16岁的孩子 ‎5. be worried about your safety 担心你们的安全 ‎6. part-time jobs 兼职工作 ‎7. get their ears pierced 穿他们的耳朵 ‎8. their own clothes 他们自己的衣服 ‎9. serious enough 足够严肃 VI. Listening ‎2a What does Molly think of Kathy’s statements? Listen and circle A for Agree, ‎ D for Disagree or DK for Doesn’t Know.‎ Kathy ‎ Molly ‎1. Sixteen-year-olds should not be allowed to work at night.‎ ‎2. Larry shouldn't work every night.‎ ‎3. He should cut his hair.‎ ‎4. He should stop wearing that silly earring.‎ ‎5. He doesn't seem to have many ‎ friends.‎ A D DK A D DK A D DK A D DK ‎ ‎ A D DK ‎2b Listen again. What are Kathy’s and Molly’s reasons? Number their reasons in ‎ the correct order.‎ ‎_____ It looks cool.‎ ‎_____ Young people need to sleep.‎ ‎_____ He needs to spend time with friends.‎ ‎_____ He needs time to do homework.‎ ‎_____ It doesn't look clean.‎ VII. Practice ‎1. 2c Make a list of things teenagers should and should not be allowed to do. Discuss your list with your partner.‎ A: Do you think teenagers should...?‎ B: Yes, I .../No, I...‎ ‎2. 2d Read the conversation and answer the questions.‎ ‎1) Where do they go for school trip?‎ ‎2) Does Mr. Smith allow students to take photos?‎ ‎3) How to take photos? ‎ ‎3. Role-play the conversation. ‎ VIII. Summary ‎1. Language points allow的用法 ‎1) Teenagers should be allowed to choose their own clothes.‎ ‎2) Teenagers should not be allowed to smoke.‎ ‎3) It is not allowed in the museum.‎ ‎4) Do you think we may be allowed to take photos if we don't use a flash?‎ 以上四句都含有重要的句型be allowed to do sth.，其中第三句是此句型的一般现在时，一二四句是情态动词与此句型的混合使用。‎ 运用：“sb. + should / should not + be allowed to do ...”‎ 翻译：‎ 我认为应该允许16岁的孩子开车。‎ 我不同意，我认为16岁这个年纪太年轻了。‎ 你认为应该允许13岁的孩子们做兼职工作吗？‎ 安娜可以选择自己的衣服。‎ 那个年龄的他们不够稳重。‎ 同义句转换 They should allow us to have part-time jobs. ‎ ‎__________________________________________________________________.‎ We should allow children to spend time with their friends. ‎ ‎_________________________________________________________________.‎ The teacher should allow Anna to finish the picture. ‎ ‎__________________________________________________________________.‎ ‎2. Explanation ‎1) sixteen-year-olds十六岁的青少年 它相当于一个名词,等于sixteen – year- old kids. ‎ ‎ “一个16岁青少年的表达方式”‎ a kid of sixteen a kid of sixteen years old a sixteen-year-old kid ‎2) He doesn’t seem to have many friends.‎ ‎ 主＋seem to do sth. 好像 ‎ e.g. His temperature seems to be all right. 他的体温好像完全正常。‎ ‎ seem的其他用法: ‎ ‎ (1) seem+形容词 ‎ e.g. The question seems quite easy. 那个问题好像很容易。‎ ‎ (2) seem+名词 e.g. That seems a good idea. 那好像是个好主意。‎ ‎ (3) It seems + that 从句 e.g. It seemed that nobody knew anything about the matter. ‎ 看来没有人知道这件事。‎ IX. Homework Talk about what should be allowed to do or should not be allowed to do in school or your family.‎ Section A 2 (3a-3c)‎ I. Discussion Make a list of things teenagers should and should not be allowed to do. Discuss your list in groups.‎ A: Do you think teenagers should be allowed to…‎ B: Yes, I do. I think …‎ ‎ /No, I don’t. I think …‎ List NO 1. Teenagers should be allowed to…‎ NO 2.‎ NO 3.‎ II. Reading ‎ ‎1. 3a. Read the poem aloud and discuss what the title means with your partner. Pay attention to the new words.‎ ‎ When I was a tiny baby crying all night, my mom sang to me and stayed by my side.‎ When I was tired and hungry, she gave me food and warm arms to sleep in.‎ When I was two running through the field, she made sure I was safe and kept me from danger.‎ When I fell and hurt myself, she gave me a hug and lifted me up.‎ When I was seven coughing badly, she said no ice-cream for me.‎ But I talked back loudly, “I should be allowed to eat some! Give it to me now!” When I was nine watching scary movies, she said it’d give me awful dreams.‎ ‎ But I shouted back angrily, “I should be allowed to watch it! I’m not a baby!”‎ When I was a teen going out with friends, she said, “Please be back by ten!”‎ But I talked back again — “I should not be told what to do! I’m seventeen now!”‎ Now I’m an adult, thinking back to those times. I coughed for days after eating that ice-cream. And had scary dreams after watching that film. I was late for school from staying out past ten. I regret talking back, not listening to Mom. Mom knows best, and for me she wanted only the best!‎ ‎ The title: Mom Knows Best ‎3b. Read the poem again and answer the questions.‎ ‎1. What did the mom do when the writer was a baby and a small child?‎ ‎2. Why do you think the writer talked back to his mom when he was seven and nine years old?‎ ‎3. How did the writer feel when he was a teenager and his mom said “Please be back by ten”?‎ ‎4. After reading the whole poem, how do you think the writer feels about his mom?‎ Keys: 1. She always made sure the writer was safe, happy and comfortable and kept him from danger. ‎ ‎ 2. Because the writer thinks he should be allowed to choose what he wants to do.‎ ‎ 3. He felt angry because he thought he should not be told what to do.‎ ‎ 4. He feels his mom knows him best. He thinks his mom is the best. He is thankful to his mom.‎ III. Phrases and language points ‎ 1. 呆在我身边 2. 确信，确保 ‎ 3. 远离 4. 拥抱我 ‎ 5. 把我举起 6. 回嘴，顶嘴 ‎ 7. 噩梦 8. 后悔做某事 ‎1. When I was a tiny baby crying all night, my mom sang to me and stayed by my side.‎ ‎ crying all night是现在分词短语，在名词baby后作定语，起修饰名词的作用。‎ ‎ e.g. Do you know the young man waiting outside the school gate?‎ ‎ 你认识在校门外等待的年轻人吗？‎ ‎2. Now I’m an adult, thinking back to those times.‎ ‎ times指“时光，岁月，时代”。有时也会用days表达类似含义。‎ ‎ e.g. People started to play football in ancient times.‎ ‎ 古代人们就开始踢足球了。‎ ‎ In those days, people used to write a lot more letters.‎ ‎ 那时候人们更习惯写信。‎ ‎3. I regret talking back, not listening to Mom.‎ regret  vt.  遗憾，后悔 ‎（1） regret doing sth. 后悔做了某事（表示对已经发生的事情感到后悔）。‎ ‎（2）regret + n. / pron.  ‎ ‎（3）regret + that / wh-clause ‎ ‎（4）regret to say / tell / inform ... 遗憾地说（告诉等）‎ e.g. I regret taking his advice at that time. 我后悔当初接受了他的建议。‎ I regret to say you failed in the exam. 我遗憾地说你考试不及格。‎ She immediately regretted her decision. 她立即后悔了她的决定。‎ We regret that you are allowed to go out 我们很遗憾你们不能外出。‎ I deeply regret what I said.  我非常后悔说了这些话 扩展:‎ ‎ remember to do sth.记得要去做某事 remember doing sth.记得做过某事 forget to do sth. 忘记要去做某事 forget doing sth. 忘记做过某事 活学活用 ‎1. I remember ______ her at the party last week.‎ ‎ A. to meet    B. being met ‎ C. meeting    D. to have met ‎2. Don’t you forget ____ the lights when you leave.‎ ‎ A. turning off    B. closing ‎ C. to turn off     D. to close ‎3. I regret ______ that we have no news for you.‎ ‎ A. to say      B. saying ‎ C. to have said    D. having said IV. Speaking ‎3c. Think about a time you did something even though your mom or dad told you not to do it. Share your story with your partner.‎ How old were you? ‎ Did you talk back to your mom or dad?‎ What happened? ‎ How do you feel about it now?‎ V. Homework What did your mother do when you were a small child? Write a short passage.‎ Section A 3 (Grammar Focus-4c)‎ I. Grammar Focus 根据课本内容，完成下列句子。‎ ‎1. 我认为不应该允许十六岁的孩子开车。‎ ‎ I don’t think sixteen-year-olds ______ __ _______ to drive.‎ ‎2. 我同意。他们还不够严谨。‎ ‎ I agree. They aren’t serious enough.‎ ‎3. 你认为应该鼓励青少年去自己做决定吗？ ‎ ‎ Do you think teenagers ______ __ __________ to make their own decisions?‎ ‎4. 不，我不认同这个。青少年还太小不能自己做决定。‎ ‎ No, I don’t agree with this. Teenagers are ____ ______ __ make their own decisions. ‎ ‎5. 不应该允许青少年去做兼职。‎ ‎ Teenagers ______ ___ __ _______ to have part-time jobs. ‎ ‎6. 不，我不同意。他们可以从工作当中学到很多。‎ ‎ I disagree. They can ______ a lot _______ working.‎ ‎7. 你认为如果不用闪光灯的话可以允许我们拍照吗？‎ ‎ Do you think we ____ ___ _______ to take photos if we don’t use a flash. ‎ ‎8. 如果不用闪光灯的话，那么拍照是可以的。‎ ‎ If you don’t use a flash, then it may be OK.‎ II. 含有情态动词的被动语态 ‎◆ 温故 ◆‎ ‎ 在英语中，动词有两种语态，即主动语态和被动语态。主动语态表示主语是动作的执行者，被动语态表示主语是动作的承受者。在前面两个单元我们已经学习了一般现在时的被动语态和一般过去时的被动语态，它们的结构为：are/ is +及物动词的过去分词, were/ was+及物动词的过去分词。‎ ‎◆ 知新 ◆‎ 本单元我们主要了解含有情态动词的被动语态。它的结构是什么呢？观察下面 例句中含情态动词被动语态的各种形式，然后补全结论中所缺的内容。‎ ‎【例句】‎ ‎1. Many trees should be planted in the mountains. ‎ ‎ 应该在山上种许多树。‎ ‎2. You can take this book home. （改为被动语态）‎ ‎→This book can be taken home (by you). ‎ ‎3. This problem can’t be worked out very easily. 这道题轻易算不出来。‎ ‎4. Must the work be done at once? 这项工作必须立即完成吗？‎ ‎【结论】‎ A. 含有情态动词的被动语态的结构为：情态动词+___+及物动词的________。‎ B. 含有情态动词的主动语态变为被动语态时，要把主动语态的_____变成被动语 ‎ 态的主语。‎ C. 变为否定句时只需要在情态动词后加________。‎ D. 变为一般疑问句时只需把________提到句首。‎ ‎【运用】‎ Ⅰ. 选择最佳答案。‎ ‎(  ) Young trees should ________ every year.‎ ‎ A. be planted    B. planted   C. plant Ⅱ. 按要求完成下列各句，每空一词（含缩写）。‎ ‎1. We must do the work right now. （改为被动语态）‎ ‎ ____ ____ ____ __ ____ right now.‎ ‎2. Teenagers should be allowed to go out with their friends on school nights. （改为否定句）‎ ‎ Teenagers _________ __ _______ to go out with their friends on school nights.‎ III. Practice ‎ Work on 4a.‎ Rewrite the sentences according to the example.‎ ‎1. You must clean your bedroom every day.‎ ‎ Your bedroom must be cleaned every day. ‎ ‎2. Parents should encourage teenagers to do social work for their community. Teenagers ________________________________________________________.‎ ‎3. Can Lucy do her homework tomorrow instead?‎ ‎ Can ____________________________________?‎ ‎4. Do you think we must keep teenagers away from the Internet?‎ ‎ Do you think teenagers ____________________________________?‎ ‎5. Parents should give teenagers chances to make their own decisions. Teenagers ______________________________________________________.‎ Work on 4b.‎ Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the words in brackets.‎ Should teenagers _______ (ask) to move out when they start working? In many ‎ Western countries, teenagers ____________ (allow) to move out at eighteen. Their parents believe that they should ____________ (educate) to take care of themselves from a young age. This way, when they ______ (start) working they can manage their own lives. However, in most Asian societies, it is not common for teenagers to _____ (move) out. Chinese parents believe that it is better for children to live with parents who can _____ (take) care of them. But the young should then look after their parents as they get older. That is why many Chinese adults _________ (continue) to live with their parents.‎ IV. Homework ‎ You and your friend are starting an English club. Make a list of rules about what should and should not be allowed.‎ e.g. Members should be allowed to use dictionaries. ‎ ‎ They should only use English-English dictionaries.‎ Section B 1 (1a-2e)‎ I. Presentation ‎1a. Read the questions. How often do you do these things? Write A for always, U for usually, S for sometimes and N for never.‎ Do you ever...‎ ‎1. get to class late? ______‎ ‎2. study with friends? ______‎ ‎3. finish a test early? ______‎ ‎4. worry about failing a test? ______‎ ‎5. …‎ II. Speaking ‎1b. Talk about your answers in la.‎ A: Do you ever get to class late?‎ B: Yes, I sometimes get to class late.‎ III. Listening ‎1c. Listen and circle the things in la that Peter talks about.‎ ‎ Do you ever...‎ ‎1. get to class late? ‎ ‎2. study with friends? ‎ ‎3. finish a test early? ‎ ‎4. worry about failing a test? ‎ ‎5. …‎ ‎1d. Listen again. Match these sentence parts.‎ ‎1. Peter is going to ... ___ ‎ ‎2. He isn't allowed to ... ___‎ ‎3. Peter wasn't allowed to... ___‎ ‎4. He could ... ___‎ ‎5. He should be allowed to ___‎ a. take the test.‎ b. pass the test.‎ c. fail a math test.‎ d. take the test later.‎ e. get to class late.‎ Explanation ‎1. fail a test 考试不及格（失败） ‎ ‎2. take a test 参加考试 ‎ ‎3. pass the test 通过考试 ‎4. be strict with 对某人严格要求 ‎5. worry about 担心…‎ IV. Discussion ‎1e. Read the statements. Then discuss them with your group. ‎ ‎1. Peter should be allowed to take the test later.‎ ‎2. Students need strict rules.‎ ‎3. Parents should not be too strict with teenagers.‎ A: I think Peter should...‎ B: I don't agree.‎ C: I think...‎ e.g. ‎ ‎ A: I think Peter should be allowed to take the test later.‎ B: I don't agree.‎ C: I think students need strict rules. ‎ A: It’s not fair if they don’t even give him a chance.‎ B: The school has to have rules.‎ C: But if he explains what happened, the teacher will understand.‎ ‎2a. Discuss the questions in your group.‎ ‎ Are you allowed to make your own decisions at home? What kinds of decisions?‎ V. Think about it ‎1. What’s your hobby? ‎ ‎2. Do you think hobby can get in the way of schoolwork?‎ VI. Reading ‎2b. First, look at the title of the passage. Answer "yes" or "no". Find out how many in your group agree with you. Then read the passage. Does your answer change? ‎ ‎2c. Read the passage again and answer the questions.‎ ‎1. What is Liu Yu’s hobby?‎ ‎2. What does Liu Yu want to be when he grows up?‎ ‎3. Why do Liu Yu’s parents not allow Liu Yu to practice his hobby at night?‎ ‎4. Do you think Liu Yu should be allowed to practice his hobby as much as he wants? Why or why not?‎ Read the passage again and fill in the chart.‎ Parents’ points Liu Yu’s points They worry about his ________.‎ He wants to be a __________________.‎ They think he should spend more time on ___________.‎ He just wants to do what he _______.‎ They think he needs to be ___________________________.‎ He is serious about _______.‎ They think it’s a difficult dream to _______.‎ He _______ himself.‎ VII. Language points ‎1. But sometimes these can get in the way of their schoolwork …‎ ‎ get in the way of 挡……的路；妨碍 ‎ e.g. Computer games will get in the way of his study.‎ ‎ 电脑游戏会影响他的学习 ‎2. My wife and I have supported every one of his races.‎ ‎ support v .& n. 支持 ‎ e.g. I hope you will support me in my efforts to discover the truth. 在我努力寻求揭发真相时，希望你能帮助我。 ‎ Your support has meant a lot to me during this difficult time. ‎ 在这困难时期，你的支持给了我很大的帮助。 ‎ ‎3. …but I’m serious about running.‎ ‎ be serious about 对……是认真的 ‎ e.g. You should be serious about your job. 你应该认真对待你的工作。 ‎ ‎4. My parents have always taught me how important it is to work hard at school and enter university.‎ ‎ enter v. 进来；进去 ‎ e.g. Please do not enter before knocking on the door. 进来前请先敲门。 ‎ ‎ He has no choice but enter that college. 他不得不进入那所大学读书。 ‎ ‎5. I think I should be allowed to make this choice myself.‎ ‎ be allowed to do 被允许做某事 ‎ e.g. You will not be allowed to do that.‎ ‎ 你将不被允许那样做。 ‎ 及时练 ‎1. When I was your age, my parents didn’t _________ me to go out at night.‎ A. let B. allow C. make D. ask ‎2. Should teenagers _______ allowed to make their own decisions?‎ A. is B. are C. be D. /‎ ‎6. Only then will I have a chance to achieve my dream. ‎ ‎ 这是一个倒装句，正常语序是I will have a chance to achieve my dream only then. 但由于与前文的连贯性及强调的需要，only then 被置于句首。‎ ‎ 英文的句子大多主语在前，谓语在后。但在一些句子中，由于修辞或句子结构上的需要，谓语被部分或完全置于主语之前，构成“倒装语序”。‎ only用于句子的开头，后接副词、介词短语或状语从句时，句子应倒装。例如：‎ Only yesterday did he find out that his watch was lost. ‎ 直到昨天他才发现他的手表丢了。‎ Only after a year did I begin to see the results of my work. ‎ 直到一年后，我才开始看到我工作的成果。‎ VIII. Learning actively LEARNING ACTIVELY When you learn any new language, actively use it in new sentences of your own.‎ ‎2d. Look in the passage for the words in bold. Then use them actively to complete ‎ sentences of your own.‎ ‎1. My parents worry about ___________.‎ ‎2. My parents have always taught me how important it is to ______________.‎ ‎3. I am serious about _______________.‎ ‎4. I think it is unfair _______________.‎ ‎5. I have always wanted to be ______________.‎ ‎6. My parents have nothing against _________.‎ ‎7. I need to think about what will happen if _______________.‎ ‎8. I need to spend more time on ____________.‎ IX. Speaking ‎2e. Discuss the questions with a partner. Use the information in the passage to support your opinion.‎ ‎ What is your dream job? Do your parents support your dream?‎ X. Homework ‎1. Read the passage again after school.‎ ‎2. Remember the words and expressions.‎ Section B 2 (3a-Self Check)‎ I. Revision ‎ Dear friends,‎ ‎ I am unhappy these days because my parents don’t allow me to practice 1______ ‎ as much as I would like to. I am 2__________ about running. I want to be a ‎ professional 3_____. I believe I can 4_______ my dream. But they are always talking ‎ about what will happen if I don’t 5_________. I know my parents 6_________about ‎ me, but they don’t believe in me. They think running may 7_____ in the way of my ‎ schoolwork. So they don’t 8_____ me to practice running 9___ school nights. They ‎ think I need to think about other possible jobs. What should I do? Should I be allowed ‎ to make my 10_____ decision? How much time should I spend on my training and ‎ my schoolwork? I need your help. ‎ Please write to me soon!‎ II. Discussion ‎3a.With a partner, discuss at least one rule at home that you do not agree with. Why ‎ do you not agree with it? Make some notes in the chart.‎ A: I don’t think we should be allowed to play computer games.‎ B: Sure, I agree with it. Because it is bad for us, we should follow the rule.‎ A: How about watch TV?‎ B: Well, I don’t agree with it. I think the rule should be changed. We can watch TV on ‎ the weekends.‎ A: Hum, do you think if we should be allowed to have part-time jobs?‎ B: I agree. We can learn a lot from working.‎ ‎ Rule ‎ Why you agree or disagree with it ‎ How you think the rule should be changed can’t play computer games agree -- ‎ sitting in front of the computer for hours playing games isn’t good no need to be changed can’t watch TV disagree –‎ not all TV programs are bad for students; need to relax sometimes, rather than spend all the time studying should be allowed to watch TV programs that have educational value (such as documentaries); should be allowed to watch TV programs on weekends.‎ must be home for dinner every day disagree –‎ takes away opportunities to spend time with friends; makes life uninteresting should be allowed to have dinner with friends as long as I don’t stay out too late and it does not clash with any important family activity III. Self Check ‎1. Match the words in the two columns and choose five phrases to make ‎ ‎ sentences.‎ take ‎ do ‎ get ‎ achieve ‎ make ‎ go shopping photos my dream ears pierced part-time work a choice get ears pierced I would like to get my ears pierced when I am twenty-one years old.‎ take photos This is a good place for tourists to take photos.‎ do part-time work It is common for university students to do part-time work to help pay for their studies.‎ achieve my dream I hope to achieve my dream of becoming a doctor.‎ make a choice It is difficult for me to make a choice between these two bags as I like both of them.‎ go shopping I go shopping with my parents every Saturday afternoon.‎ ‎2. Complete the sentences using the correct forms of the words in brackets. Translate them into Chinese.‎ ‎1. No matter how many difficulties we have, I believe all problems can________(solve) in the end.‎ ‎2. Mobile phones should __________ (keep) off during the meeting.‎ ‎3. Teenagers under 18 must _______________(not allow) to smoke or drink.‎ ‎4. Many parents think learning from books must ______________ (put) first, so teenagers should______________ (not encourage) to work part- time.‎ Keys: be solved be kept not be allowed ‎ be put not be encouraged 1. 不管我们有多少困难，我相信所有的难题到最后都可以得以解决。‎ ‎2. 开会时手机应该保持关机状态。‎ ‎3. 18岁以下的青少年决不允许喝酒或抽烟。‎ ‎4. 许多父母认为青少年在学校学习应该放在首位，因此他们不应该被鼓励去做兼职工作。‎ IV. 中考链接 ‎1. The river smells terrible. People must ________________ dirty thing into it.‎ ‎ (南京市中考题）‎ ‎ A. be stopped to throw ‎ ‎ B. be stopped from throwing ‎ ‎ C. stop to throw ‎ ‎ D. stop from throwing ‎ ‎2. This book _______ often _______ from the library. (北京市中考题）‎ ‎ A. aren’t; take away ‎ ‎ B. taken away ‎ C. isn’t; taken away ‎ ‎ D. be taken away Keys: BC V. Homework Write a diary entry explaining which rule(s) you do not agree with at home and how you think the rule(s) should be changed.‎ Use the following expressions to help you:‎ I do not agree with …‎ I think I should be allowed to …‎ I would like to …‎ I could … if I …‎ Unit 8 It must belong to Carla.‎ Section A 1 (1a-2d)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 能掌握以下单词：‎ truck, picnic, whose, pink, rabbit, magazine 能掌握以下句型：‎ ‎① The person must go to our school. ‎ ‎② —Whose book is this? ‎ ‎—It must be Mary's. /It must belong to Mary.‎ ‎2) 能够用情态动词表推测.‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎ 让学生根据已有事实推测可能性。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 掌握本课时中出现的生词truck, picnic, volleyball, whose, pink, rabbit, valuable, somebody, anybody ‎2) 学会描述表示物品所属提问和回答：‎ ‎—Whose book is this? ‎ ‎—It must be Mary's. ‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ Whose .......is this? 句型 ‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Finish 1a.‎ ‎ 1. Look at the chart in 1a, then discuss with your group mates. Try to fill in the chart with words to describe people. ‎ ‎2. Let some Ss say their answers. Let other Ss add more. ‎ Ⅱ. Presentation ‎ Present some pictures about the new words, then learn.‎ Ⅲ. Listening ‎1. T: Here are some things belonging to those five people. Listen and match each person with a thing and a reason.‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen. ‎ ‎3. Ss listen and try to match the each person with a thing and a reason. ‎ ‎4. Check the answers.‎ Ⅳ. Pair work ‎ ‎1. Look at the conversation in 1c and make conversations in pairs. ‎ ‎2. Let some pairs ask and answer in pairs. ‎ e.g. A: Whose book is this? ‎ B: It must be Mary's. J.K. Rowling is her favourite writer.‎ Ⅴ. Listening Work on 2a: ‎ T: Bob and Anna found a schoolbag at the park. Listen and write down the things in the schoolbag. ‎ ‎1. Look at the chart in 2a. ‎ ‎ 2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and check the words they hear. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording again to check the answers. ‎ Work on 2b: ‎ ‎1. Let Ss read the sentences below. Explain some main sentences for the Ss. Make sure they know what to do. ‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss to fill in the blanks with the right words. ‎ ‎3. Play the recording again to check the answers. ‎ Summary: 表推测的形容词的用法 Ⅵ.Pair work ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to make conversations about the schoolbag using the information in 2a. ‎ ‎2. Let some pairs act out their conversations before the class. ‎ e.g. A: Look! There's a schoolbag here.‎ ‎ B: What's inside? ‎ ‎ A: There’s a T-shirt, …‎ Ⅶ. Role-play ‎ ‎1. Read the conversations and Let Ss read after the teacher. ‎ ‎2. Explain some new words and main points in the conversation. ‎ ‎3. Ask Ss to role-play the conversation in groups. ‎ VIII. Language points ‎ 1. It must belong to Carla.‎ ‎ belong to 意为“属于”，它一般不用于 ‎ 进行时态和被动语态。如：‎ ‎ The hair band belongs to Anna. (√)‎ ‎ The hair band is belonging to Anna. (×)‎ ‎ The hair band is belonged to Anna. (×)‎ 此外, belong to sb. 通常可以和名词性物主代词或名词所有格(一般是’s 所有格)互相转换。如：‎ The blue jacket belongs to him / Jerry. →‎ The blue jacket is his / Jerry’s.‎ ‎2. Well, where did you last put it ?‎ ‎ last adv. 上次; 最近的一次; 最后一次 ‎ last除用于句末外, 还常置于句子中间。‎ ‎ e.g. When I last saw her, she was working in Shanghai.‎ ‎ 我上次见她时, 她在上海工作。‎ ‎ When did you see him last?‎ ‎ 你最近见到他是什么时候?‎ ‎3. I attended a concert yesterday so it might still be in the music hall.‎ ‎ 辨析 join/take part in/attend ‎ join指加入某个党派, 团体组织等, 成为其中一员, 意为“ 参军, 入党, 入团 ”。‎ e.g. join the Army/the Party/the League join sb. in (doing) sth. 和某人一道做某事 e.g. Will you join us in the picnic? 你参加我们的野炊吗？‎ join in多指参加小规模的活动如“游戏, 比赛”, 口语中常用。‎ e.g. Join in the basketball game. 参加篮球赛。‎ take part in 指参加会议或群众性活动, 着重说明主语参加该项活动并在活动中发挥作用。‎ e.g. We’ll take part in the sports meeting/club.‎ take an active part in 积极参加……‎ attend 正式用语 vt. 指参加会议, 婚礼, 葬礼, 典礼; 去上课, 上学, 听报告等。‎ 句子主语只是去听, 去看, 自己不一定起积极作用。‎ e.g. I attended a night school. 我上夜校。‎ ‎4. I think somebody must have picked it up.‎ ‎ must在此处表示推测, 意为“一定”。英语中当情态动词后接have done时, 表达对过去的事情进行推测, 故must have done something表示“过去一定做过了”这样的意思。‎ ‎ e.g. He’s playing outside. He must have finished his homework.‎ ‎5. I’ll call them now to check if anybody has it.‎ ‎ anybody pron. 任何人 ‎ 常用于否定句或疑问句中; 当用于肯定句中时, 相当于any person, 意为“任何 ‎ 人”。‎ ‎ e.g. I will not tell anybody the secret.‎ ‎       Is there anybody in the office?‎ ‎       Anybody could do it! ‎ IX. Exercises X. Homework ‎ ‎1. Recite the conversations in 2d.‎ ‎2. Finish the exercises in the workbook.‎ Section A 2 (3a-3c)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 学习掌握下列词汇： policeman, noise, wolf, happening, uneasy ‎2）阅读短文，能按要求获取相关的信息。‎ ‎3）通过阅读训练来提高学生们的阅读能力。‎ ‎4) 学习运用情态动词表推测。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ 面对身边暂时不可解释的现象，根据已有证据进行合理推测。不信谣，不传谣。 ‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 掌握本部分出现的生词和词组，达到熟练运用的目标。‎ ‎2) 阅读短文，获得相关的信息。通过阅读练习，来提高阅读能力。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ ‎1) 阅读短文，获得相关的信息的能力。‎ ‎2) 理解并运用所学的词汇及表达方式。‎ 三、教学过程 I. Revision ‎ ‎1. Have a dictation of the new words learned in the last class. ‎ ‎2. Check the phrases. ‎ II. Presentation ‎ Present the new words in the dialogues.‎ A: Do you hear strange noises outside our window?‎ B: Yes, something unusual is happening in our town.‎ A: My father called the policeman, but he couldn’t find anything strange.‎ B: Maybe it was a wolf, everyone in our town is feeling uneasy.‎ III. Reading ‎ Work on 3a: ‎ 1. Tell Ss to read the article and decide which might be the best title.‎ A. A Small and Quiet Town B. Strange Happenings in my town A. Animals in our neighborhood ‎ ‎2. 方法指导：先读懂所给的三个句子的意思，明确标题大意。然后快速阅读短文开头和结尾，争取在较短的时间内，确定课文大意。‎ ‎3. 学生们，按老师指导的方法进行阅读，确定课文大意。 ‎ ‎4. 最后，教师让部分说出自己的答案，并校对答案。‎ IV. Careful Reading ‎ ‎1. Work on 3b: ‎ ‎1. 学生们再次阅读短文内容，并完成3b中的内容。‎ ‎2. 学生们先读3b中的单词短语，理解其大意，然后仔细回读短文，找到相同意思的单词。‎ ‎3. 让学生们相互讨论，并校对答案。 ‎ ‎2. Work on 3c ‎ ‎1. Read the article carefully and write what people think about the strange noises.‎ ‎2. Ss work in pairs. Let students discuss the answers. ‎ ‎3. Check the answers with the students. ‎ V. Language points 1. It used to be very quiet. ‎ used to do sth 曾经，过去常常（现在不做了）‎ be used to do sth. (=be used for doing sth.) 被用来做……‎ be used to doing sth 习惯于做……‎ 2. ‎ However, these days, something unusual is happening in our town.‎ 构成：不定代词+形容词 (定语后置)‎ e.g. 一些重要的事情something important un- 表示否定 usual 通常的 unusual 不平常的 ‎ happy 快乐的 unhappy 不快乐的 3. ‎ Victor, a teacher at my school, is really nervous. ‎ a teacher at my school 在句中作同位语。它指的是 Victor 。‎ e.g. My sister, Helen, will have a picnic with me.‎ 我的姐姐海伦将和我一起野餐。‎ ‎4….but I couldn't see a dog or anything else, either. ‎ too “也” 肯定句。句末。‎ also “也”肯定句。句中，be后面,行为动词前。‎ either “也”否定句。句末。‎ e.g. She is a singer, too. 她也是个歌手。‎ ‎ He can also sing the English song. 他也可以唱英文歌。‎ ‎ If you don't go to the park, he won't go there ,either. 如果你不去公园，他也不去。‎ ‎5. One woman in the area saw something running away. ‎ see sb. doing sth. 看见某人正在做某事 ‎ （ 强调动作正在发生）‎ see sb. do sth. 看见某人做某事 ‎ ‎ （强调发生的整个过程）‎ e.g. I see mom cooking in the kitchen.‎ ‎ 我看见妈妈正在厨房做饭。 ‎ ‎ Lucy said she saw me do the housework.‎ ‎ 露西说她看见我做家务了。‎ ‎6. The noise-maker is having too much fun creating fear in the neighborhood.‎ ‎ have fun doing sth. 做某事玩得愉快。‎ ‎=have a good time doing sth.‎ ‎=enjoy doing sth.‎ e.g. I have fun flying kites. 我享受放风筝的乐趣。‎ VI. Homework ‎ ‎1. Make sentences with these words.‎ used to, have no idea, too... to... ,‎ see sb do sth，see sb doing sth ‎2. Review the article.‎ Section A 3 (Grammar Focus-4c) ‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 学习掌握下列词汇：laboratory, coat, sleepy, pocket ‎ ‎2）进行一步复习巩固学习Section A 部分所学的生词和词组。‎ ‎3）掌握情态动词的用法和物体所属的句型。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ 面对身边暂时不可解释的现象，根据已有证据进行合理推测。不信谣，不传谣。 ‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 复习巩固Section A 部分所学的生词和词组，达到熟练运用的目标。‎ ‎2) 总结情态动词的用法。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ ‎1) 学习运用情态动词的用法。‎ ‎2) 掌握物体所属的句型。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Revision ‎ Review some main phrases and sentences we learned in the last class.‎ Ⅱ. Grammar Focus Fill in the blanks.‎ ‎1. 这是谁的排球?‎ ‎_________ __________ is this?‎ ‎ 这一定是卡拉的。她热爱排球运动。‎ It _________ be ______. She loves volleyball.‎ ‎2. 这是谁的发带？‎ ‎_________ _________ is this?‎ 它可能是梅的发带。或者可能属于琳达。她们两人都是长头发。‎ It _____ be Mei’s hair band. Or it ______ belong to Linda. They___ have long hair.‎ ‎3. 那晚你看见了什么？‎ ‎______ did you see that night?‎ 我不确定，但肯定不可能是狗。它更大。我想也许是一头熊或一匹狼。‎ I'm ____ _____, but it ____ _____a dog.‎ It was bigger. I think it ____ _____ a bear or a wolf.‎ Ⅲ. Try to Find ‎ 情态动词表推测，可能性：must> can/could> may/might 一、must 表示可能性最大的肯定推测，意思是“一定、准是”。只能用于肯定句。如果要表示“一定不”，应该用can't。如果询问可能性时，应该用can。‎ e.g. He must know the answers. 他肯定知道答案。‎ He can't know the answers. 他肯定不知道答案 Can he know the answer? 他知道答案吗？‎ 二、can/could can表示推测“可能性”时，一般用于否定句或疑问句。can在疑问句中意思是“会，可能”。‎ e.g. He can’t pick her schoolbag up. 他不可能拿了她的书包。‎ could 用于表示某事有可能发生或可能是事实。‎ e.g. Don’t eat it. It could go bad. 不要吃它，可能坏了。‎ The plane could be put off by the storm. 这趟飞机可能会因为暴风雨而推迟。‎ could可用于表示客气、礼貌、委婉的请求语气。‎ Could you please help me with my homework？你能帮我完成我的家庭作业吗？‎ 三、 may/might may, might表示推测“可能性”时，意思是“可能”，“也许”。might不表示过去时态，语气更委婉，可能性更小。may, might表推测时，可用于否定句，但不用于疑问句。‎ e.g. He may/ might not be at home, but I'm not sure. 他可能不在家，不过我也不确定。‎ 四、推测时态 ‎1. must: 推测现在/ 正在/ 过去发生的动作。‎ e.g. He must have a car now.‎ ‎ (现在) 他一定有一辆小汽车。‎ ‎ He must be finishing his homework at home.‎ ‎ (正在进行) 他一定在家做作业。‎ ‎ He must have finished the work.‎ ‎ (过去) 他一定已完成了工作。‎ ‎2. can can/ can’t 后可接进行时/完成时，表示对现在发生的动作或过去发生的动作进行推测。‎ e.g. They can’t be reading in the library. 他们一定不在图书馆读书。‎ ‎ He can’t have gone to Shanghai because I saw him just now.‎ ‎ 他不可能去了上海，我刚看见他了。‎ ‎3. may/ might may，might 可以推测现在正在发生的动作或过去发生的动作，还可以推测将来的情况。‎ e.g. He may/might be sleeping now.‎ ‎ (现在) 他可能正在睡觉。‎ ‎ These people may/might have seen the film before.‎ ‎ (过去) 这些人以前可能看过这部电影。‎ ‎ It may rain. There are some clouds.‎ ‎ (将来) 可能会下雨。因为有一些乌云。‎ Ⅳ. Exercises Choose the correct answer.‎ ‎1. — Excuse me. Is this the right way to the Summer Palace?‎ ‎ — Sorry, I am not sure. It ________ be.‎ A. might B. will C. must D. can ‎2. — Isn’t that Ann’s husband over there?‎ ‎ — No, it ____ be him—I’m sure he doesn’t wear glasses.‎ A. can’t B. must not C. won’t D. may not ‎3. You ______ be tired—you’ve only been working for an hour. ‎ A. must not B. won’t C. can’t D. may not ‎4. — Is John coming by train?‎ ‎—He should, but he ________ not. He likes driving his car. ‎ A. must B. can C. need D. may Ⅴ. Practice ‎ Work on 4a. Choose the best way to complete each sentence using the words in brackets.‎ 1. 让学生们理解句子意思。‎ ‎ 1. A: Where’s Jean?‎ ‎ B: I’m not sure. She ______ (is/ might be/ must be) in the laboratory.‎ ‎ 2. A: Everyone is going to the pool after school.‎ ‎ B: Really? It _______ (must be / can’t be /could be ) hot outdoors.‎ ‎ 3. A: That’s the phone.‎ ‎ B: Hmm. I wonder who it _______ (must be / could be / should be).‎ ‎ 4. A: I wonder if there are Jim’s glasses.‎ ‎ B: They _______ (can’t be / might be / could be) his. He doesn’t wear glasses.‎ ‎ 5. A: I hear water running in the bathroom.‎ ‎ B: It _______ (could be / must be / can’t be) Carla. She was thinking of taking a shower.‎ ‎2. 根据句意选择正确的情态动词。‎ ‎3. 最后，通读一遍句子，进行综合理解，看句子内容是否通顺，合理。‎ ‎4. Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ ‎ Keys: might be, must be, could be, can’t be, must be ‎5. Explanation.‎ ‎ (1) be sure (of/about sth/doing) 确信...，对...有把握 be sure to do sth “ 必定” ，“ 必然会”, "准会"‎ ‎ (2) 表示“位移”的动词用现在进行时态表将来，例如：go去，come来，leave离开，arrive到达，return 回来，fly 飞。‎ ‎ (3) wonder v. “想知道”（want to know）‎ No wonder + 句子 “难怪.....”‎ e.g. No wonder you are angry. 难怪你觉得生气。‎ ‎ (4) think of 想要；打算 e.g. I thought of playing basketball. 我想打篮球。‎ Work on 4b. Complete these responses.‎ 1. ‎ Tell Ss to understand the sentences.‎ ‎ 1. A: Many people are wearing coats.‎ ‎ B: The weather must be ____.‎ ‎2. A: Sally has been coughing a lot.‎ ‎ B: She might be _______.‎ ‎ 3. A: This restaurant is always very crowded.‎ ‎ B: The food ________________.‎ ‎4. A: Whenever I try to read this book, ‎ ‎ I feel sleepy.‎ ‎ B: It can’t _____________________.‎ 2. ‎ Let Ss write down possible answers as much as possible.‎ 3. ‎ Let Ss check their answers with their partners.‎ 4. ‎ Check the answers together.‎ ‎ Keys: cold, sick/ ill, must be delicious, be interesting/ attractive Ⅵ. Group Work ‎ Look at this picture of a room. How much can you tell about the person who lives here? Is it a boy or a girl? What are his/ her hobbies? Discuss your ideas with a partner.‎ A：It could be a girl's room because it's very tidy.‎ B：I guess so. But it might be a boy's room because the clothes look like boys' clothes.‎ A：It could/ might/ can't be... because...‎ B：I guess so/ I don’t think so. But it might/ could/ must be ... because ...‎ Ⅶ. Homework ‎ Remember the Grammar.‎ Finish the exercise in 4c.‎ Section B 1 (1a-2e)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 能掌握以下单词：UFO, alien, run after, suit, express, not only...but also..., circle, Britain, receive, leader, midsummer, medical, prevent, energy, position, burial, honor, ancestor, victory, enemy, period ‎ ‎2) 能掌握以下重难句子：‎ ‎① For many years, historians believed Stonehenge was a temple where ancient ‎ ‎ leaders tried to communicate with the gods.‎ ‎②The large stones were put together in a certain way.‎ ③As you walk there, you can feel the energy from your feet move up your body. ‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎ 通过学习英国巨石阵, 培养对事物的探索精神。不信谣，不传谣。 ‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 掌握本课时出现的生词及用法。‎ ‎2) 进行听力训练，提高综合听说能力。 ‎ ‎3）阅读短文，获得相关信息，提高学生们的综合阅读能力。‎ ‎2. 教学难点 ‎1) 听力训练 ‎2) 阅读2b部分的短文并完成相关要求。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision ‎ ‎1. Daily greeting. ‎ ‎2. Let Ss recall the ideas of strange things. ‎ Ⅱ. Lead in ‎ Show some pictures of the UFO and aliens. ‎ Ⅲ. Writing Work on 1a ‎ ‎1. Ss look at the pictures in 1a. Try to understand what’s happening. ‎ ‎2. Let Ss write a sentence about each picture.‎ Possible answers:‎ ‎ The alien is running after the man. ‎ ‎ The man is running.‎ Work on 1b:‎ ‎1. Play the recording and number the pictures [1-3]. ‎ ‎2. Let Ss try to write more sentences to finish the story. Then discuss with their partners. ‎ e.g. Finally, the alien caught the man and took him to the UFO. But luckily, they let him go back to the earth. The man was scared. ‎ ‎3. Let some Ss write their sentences on the Bb. ‎ Ⅳ. Listening ‎ Work on 1c: ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to read the sentences in 1c and try to understand the meaning of them. ‎ ‎2. Play the recording for the Ss. Ss just listen for the first time. Play the recording again and check the sentences Ss hear. ‎ ‎3. Check the answers. ‎ Ⅴ. Pair work ‎ Work in pairs. Divide two people into a group. Give a conversation example. Let Ss read it together. Then role-play the conversation between the man and the woman.‎ A: Why do you think the man is running?‎ B: He could be running for exercise.‎ A: No, he's wearing a suit. He might be running to catch a bus to work.‎ B: Well, he might be late for work.‎ A: He looks kind of afraid.‎ ‎......‎ Ⅵ. Preparation for 2b ‎ Work on 2a Match each linking word or phrase with its purpose. Then check the answers.‎ Ⅶ. Reading ‎ Fast Reading ‎1. Tell Ss the following passage is the mystery of Stonehenge. Skim the article and ‎ underline the sentences with linking words or phrases.‎ ‎2. Check the answers with the Ss.‎ ‎ ①Stonehenge, a rock circle, is not only one of Britain's most famous historical places but also one of its greatest mysteries. ‎ ‎ ②People like to go to his place especially in June as they want to see the sun rising on the longest day of the year.‎ ‎ ③However, historian Paul Stoker thinks this can't be true because Stonehenge was built so many centuries ago.‎ ‎ ④One of the greatest mysteries is how it was built because the stones are so big and heavy.‎ ‎ ......‎ Careful Reading ‎1. T: Now let’s work on 2c. First, let Ss read the article again. Then try to put the right answers into the chart. ‎ ‎2. Check the answers with the class. ‎ Post reading Work on 2d ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to understand linking words in 2a again. ‎ ‎2. Then use these words to complete the sentences.‎ ‎3. Let some Ss say their answers.‎ ‎4. Check their answers with the class and tell Ss why. ‎ Work on 2e ‎1. Show some pictures of the mystery places that are similar to Stonehenge. ‎ ‎2. Let Ss discuss the following questions:‎ What do you know about these mysteries?‎ What is mysterious about them? ‎ ‎3. Let some Ss show their understanding. ‎ Ⅷ. Language points ‎1. express v. 表达，表示 ‎ ‎ expression n. 表达 ，表示，表情 e.g. It expresses my love for the novel. 这表达了我对这部小说的爱。‎ ‎ an expression of support 表示支持 ‎2. receive v. 接受；收到 e.g. Yesterday I received his gift, but I didn’t accept it so I returned it to him.‎ ‎ 昨天我收到了他的礼物，但是我没有接受并且退回去了。‎ ‎3. leader n. 领导，领袖 lead v. 带领 e.g. Workers lead the leaders around the factory.‎ ‎ 工人带着领导参观工厂。‎ ‎4. midsummer n. 仲夏, 中夏 ‎ mid-autumn 中秋 ‎ midnight 午夜 e.g. It is said that the story happened in the midsummer. 据说故事发生在仲夏。‎ ‎5. medical adj. 医疗的；医学的 ‎ medicine n. 药 e.g. Other people believe the stones have a medical purpose.‎ ‎ 其他人相信石头带有医疗目的。‎ ‎6. prevent v. 阻止；阻挠 prevent sb from doing 阻止某人做某事 ‎=stop sb from doing ‎ e.g. Nothing can prevent us from carrying out the plan. 什么也无法阻挡我们去实施这个计划。‎ ‎7. energy n. 精力；力量 e.g. He is saving his energy for next week’s race. 他正为下周的比赛养精蓄锐。‎ ‎8. position n. 位置, 地方, 姿势 e.g Tom raised himself to a sitting position. 汤姆坐了起来。 ‎ ‎9. burial n. 埋葬；安葬 bury v. 埋 e.g. His body was brought back to England for burial. 他的遗体已运回英国埋葬。‎ ‎10. honor v. 尊重，表示敬意 n. 荣幸（=honour）‎ e.g. It’s my honor to stand here to give my speech. 我很荣幸能站在这儿作演讲。‎ ‎11. victory n. 胜利，成功 e.g. They celebrated their victory cheerily.   他们兴高采烈地庆祝胜利。‎ ‎12. enemy n. 敌人，仇人 ‎ e.g. be one’s own worst enemy是自己最大的敌人 ‎13. period n. 一段时间；时期 e.g. the most difficult periods of history历史上最艰难的时期 ‎14. For many years, historians believed Stonehenge was a temple where ancient ‎ ‎ leaders tried to communicate with the gods.‎ ‎ 多年以来，历史学家们认为巨石阵是古代首领用来与神灵沟通的一座神庙。‎ ‎ 此句中的where ancient leaders tries to communicate with the gods是由关系副词where引导的一个定语从句，修饰名词temple.‎ ‎15. The large stones were put together in a certain way.‎ ‎ 这些大块的石头以某种方式被摆放在一起。‎ ‎ in a certain way表示“以某种方式”，其中certain表示 “某一；某个；某些”的意思，用于名词之前。‎ ‎ e.g. The doctor is only at this hospital on certain days. ‎ ‎ 那位医生只有在某些日子才在这所医院。‎ ‎16. As you walk there, you can feel the energy from your feet move up your body. ‎ ‎ 当你走到那儿，你能感觉到能量从你的双脚上升到你的身体里。‎ ‎ 此句中的feel是感官动词，其后可接宾语和不带to的动词不定式充当的宾语补足语，其用法与see, hear, watch等词一样。‎ ‎ e.g. We felt the house shake. ‎ Homework ‎ Find more information about the mysterious things. ‎ Section B 2 (3a-Self Check) ‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 复习情态动词表推测的用法，短语。 ‎ ‎2) 学会用情态动词来推测。 ‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎ 让学生根据已有事实推测可能性。面对暂时不可解释的事情，不信谣不传谣。 ‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 能根据上节所学短文，完成写段落关键词及短文填空的任务。‎ ‎2) 掌握本单元所学情态动词表推测的用法，并能正确运用此句型来进行表达。‎ ‎3) 能综合运用就本单元所学习的语言知识来写作推测事件发展可能性。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ 有条理地写出事件发生过程和事件发展可能性。 ‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Revision ‎1. Have a dictation of the new words and expressions. ‎ ‎2. Review the main phrases and sentences.‎ ‎ 1) 属于 belong to ‎2) 最喜爱的作家 favorite writer ‎3) 怎么啦? What’s wrong?‎ ‎4) 参加音乐会 attend a concert ‎5) 捡起 pick up ‎6) 不平常的事 something unusual ‎7) 奇怪的噪音 strange noises Important sentences:‎ Stonehenge, a rock circle, is not only one of Britain's most famous historical places but also one of its greatest mysteries.‎ However, historian Paul Stoker thinks this can't be true because Stonehenge was built so many centuries ago.‎ ‎…, but most agree that the position of the stones must be for a special purpose.‎ Most historians believe it must be almost 5,000 years old.‎ And perhaps we might never know, ...‎ II. Work on 3a ‎1. Tell Ss to read through the article in 3a on page 59 again. And answer the following questions.‎ ‎ What do you think the noise could be?‎ Why do you think that?‎ What could the noises be?‎ Why do you think so?‎ ‎2. Then talk with a partner about your inferences and reasons. ‎ ‎3. Let Ss tell out their answers. ‎ III. Writing ‎ Work on 3b ‎1. Tell Ss what they should do. ‎ Look at this newspaper headline and finish the article about the strange happenings.‎ No More Mystery in the Neighborhood Last week, in a quiet neighborhood, something strange happened...‎ We now know what was happening in the neighborhood...‎ Now the mystery is solved. People in the neighborhood...‎ Writing tips:‎ First part: background information about the mystery Second part: how the mystery was solved Third part: how the people in the neighborhood now feel ‎2. 写作指导： ‎ Ø ‎[单元话题分析]根据一些依据或者现象进一步判断出一个结论。本单元的重点就是谈论猜测和判断。‎ Ø 用情态动词表达猜测或判断,常见的有: must, may, might, could和can't等词。情态动词表示推测，可能性从小到大依次为：can't, might, may, could, must.‎ Ø 本单元话题涉及多种时态，因此要注意时态的正确使用。 ‎ ‎3. Ss try to write a short article. ‎ IV. Self Check ‎ Work on Self Check 1 ‎ ‎1. Let Ss read the sentences in Self check 1. Then Ss try to fill in the blanks with the correct words in the box. ‎ ‎ Fill in the blanks with must, might, or can't.‎ ‎1) That bright light ________ be a UFO-there's no such thing!‎ ‎2) I’m still waiting for the bus, so I _______ be a bit late for the party.‎ ‎3) That sweater _____ be Carla’s. She’s the only one who wears such colorful clothes.‎ ‎4) Tony ______ want to go to the concert. He likes music, but I'm not sure if he likes rock music.‎ ‎5) The person you saw at the supermarket _____ be Susan. I just talked to her on the phone and she’s at work right now.‎ ‎2. Let some Ss read their answers. Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ Work on Self check 2 ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss to write sentences for the things below. They should write sentences by using the chart.‎ Name Likes Dislikes Jessica take photos run Todd play the piano eat sweet food Mike play tennis watch movies Annie read cook ‎2. Understand the example. Ss try to complete the sentences by themselves. ‎ ‎1) DVD ‎ ‎ It can't be Mike's. He doesn't like to watch movies.‎ ‎2) bowl of ice-cream ‎ _________________________________‎ ‎3) camera ‎ _________________________________‎ ‎4) cookbook ‎ _________________________________‎ ‎5) tennis ball ‎ _________________________________‎ ‎6) running shoes ‎ _________________________________‎ ‎3. Let some Ss read their sentences to the class. ‎ ‎4. Correct the mistakes they have.‎ ‎5.Give some possible sentences. ‎ Homework ‎ Write a passage.‎ 昨晚天空中有不明飞行物体。对此，你的同学有不同的猜测。请根据下面表格中的信息写一篇80词左右的短文。‎ 人物 猜测 原因 Alice a UFO It flew very fast.‎ Jack a kite which can give off light It didn’t fly high.‎ Antonio a plane Its sound liked a plane sound.‎ Unit 9 I like music that I can dance to.‎ Section A 1 (1a-2d)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 能掌握以下单词及短语：prefer, lyrics, Australian, electronic, suppose, smooth, spare, director, case, in the case, war ‎2）掌握 I like /love/prefer music that…表达喜欢的音乐。‎ ‎3）掌握 I like music that I can dance to. / ‎ I like musicians who play different kinds of music. 句型的用法。‎ ‎3) 学习关系代词that/who引导的定语从句。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎1. 使学生学会谈论自己的喜好。‎ ‎2. 通过表达个人喜好，提高学生欣赏美的水平。‎ ‎3. 激发学生的学习兴趣和学习热情。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：1）prefer, different kinds of sing along with的用法。 ‎ ‎2）句型： I like music that I can dance to.‎ I like musicians who play different kinds of music.‎ ‎2. 教学难点：学习关系代词that/who引导的定语从句。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming up ‎ 师生问候。‎ Ⅱ. Lead-in ‎ Say What kind of books do you like? I like interesting books. I like books that are interesting.  Write…that are interesting on the blackboard. Point to it and ask who can make another sentence with it. Write another phrase on the blackboard, …that is comfortable to …. Help the students to make sentences with it.‎ Ⅲ. Presentation ‎ ‎1. 教师播放学生较熟悉的带有歌词或歌手的图片的流行歌曲， 激发学生的学习兴趣， 同事师生对话，引出本单元的内容学习，为完成1a做铺垫。‎ T: Do you like music/…?‎ S: Yes, I do. ‎ T: What kind of music /… do you like?‎ S: I like…‎ T: Which singer do you like?‎ S: I like…‎ ‎2. Play the tapes of different kinds of music for the students, only a short piece of each tape. Say, I like music that makes me relaxed. Write these four groups of words on the blackboard,…that has great lyrics,…that I can sing along with,…that isn’t too loud, …that I can dance to. Tell the students lyrics means the words of the songs. Ask the students, What kind of music do you like?‎ Say, You can answer with I like music…, I love music…, I prefer music… Explain prefer=like…better to them. Get one of the children to answer the question, then let this child ask the one next to him/her the same question. Set off a chain drill. Explain that I like music that isn’t means that I don’t like too loud music.‎ ‎3. Show students some different kinds of pictures of movies and ask students to discuss what kind of movies they like in pairs.‎ ‎4. Discussion: 1a. ‎ 让学生在小组内交流讨论自己的喜好，教师适时总结并完成对新词的学习，然后对单词进行强化训练， 让学生交流对一些歌曲的看法，写下句子并引出本节课的重点句型。‎ I prefer music that has great lyrics.‎ I love music that I can sing along with.‎ I like music that I can dance to.‎ 通过对这些句子的学习，引导学生归纳比较引导的定语从句及其结构特点，教师进行精讲点拨，培养他们的观察能力，为下一步的听力打好基础。‎ Ⅳ. Listening ‎ Listen to 1b and check the kinds of music Tony and Betty like.‎ 让学生看图表，明确表格中有谁，分别喜欢什么类型的音乐，完成相对应的选择。‎ Music that I can dance to Music that has great lyrics Music that I can sing along with Tony ‎ Betty ‎ Ⅴ. Pair work Finish 1c. Make a conversation between you and your partner about the music that you like. ‎ A: What kind of music do you like?‎ B: I like music that I can sing along with. What about you?‎ A: I prefer music that has great lyrics.‎ VI. Listening ‎ 1. Listen to the tape for the first time and finish 2a. ‎ ‎ 1. Carmen likes musicians who play different kinds of music. T F ‎ ‎2. Xu Fei likes the Australian singer Dan Dervish. T F ‎ ‎3. Carmen likes electronic music that’s loud. T F ‎ ‎4. Xu Fei prefers groups that play quiet and slow songs. T F ‎ 2. Listen to the tape for the second time and finish 2b. ‎ Carmen ‎ says ‎1. I really love Dan Dervish. I like musicians ______________________________‎ ‎2. The Modern are really great. I love electronic music ___________‎ Xu Fei ‎ says ‎3. I like musicians ______________________‎ ‎4. I think The Modern are too noisy. ‎ ‎ I prefer groups ______________________________‎ 通过听力训练，进一步熟悉练习that/who引导的定语从句。‎ VII. Practice ‎1. Make conversations using the information in 2a and 2b. ‎ A: Does Xu Fei like The Modern?‎ B: No, he doesn’t. He prefers…‎ ‎2. Ask a few pairs of students to present their conversations to the class.‎ VIII. Reading.‎ ‎1. Read the conversation and answer the questions.‎ ‎1. What kind of music does Scott like? Why?‎ ‎2. Does Scott like serious movies?‎ ‎3. What kind of movies does Jill want to see?‎ ‎2. Role-play the conversation in 2d.‎ 1. I’ll just listen to this new CD I bought.‎ 2. I suppose I’ll just listen to this new CD I bought.‎ 3. I like smooth music that helps me relax after a long week at work.‎ 4. I only like movies that are funny.‎ 5. In this case, I’ll ask someone who likes serious movies.‎ 6. I prefer movies that give me something to think about.‎ IX. Language points ‎1. Hmm, depends which movie.‎ ‎1) 本句省略了depends前的主语it和which movie后的从句部分we’ll watch，这是典型的口语表达形式。在口语和非正式场合，为保持语言简洁明了，交流者往往会省略彼此所知或逻辑上可明确推断的内容。例如：‎ Anything I can do for you? ‎ 我能为您做些什么吗？（省略句首部分Is there）‎ Please hand me one of those books; I don’t care which. ‎ 请把那些书递给我一本，不管哪本都行。（省略句尾部分you hand me）‎ ‎2) It depends (on) who/ what/ how/ whether…是一个常见句型。当depend后接疑问词及含有疑问词的短语和从句时，口语中会省略depend后的介词on，以求话语简练。例如：‎ It depends what day you catch me, and at what time of day. ‎ 这取决于你哪天见我，以及见我的时间。‎ Well, as for this matter, I can’t decide for now. Depends whether or not your dad will say yes. ‎ 嗯，这件事我现在决定不了，取决于你老爸是否会同意。‎ ‎2. I just want to laugh and not think too much.‎ 这句话中的to laugh和not think too much均为动词不定式，但后者在not和 think之间省略了to。英语语句中当多个不定式结构并列使用时，to出现在第一个结构中，后面的往往会省略。再如：‎ She likes to sing, dance and hang out with her friends. ‎ 她喜欢唱歌、跳舞、与朋友们外出消遣。 ‎ ‎3. I prefer music that has great lyrics.‎ 句中的prefer意为“更喜爱；更喜欢”，后可接名词、v.-ing形式或动词不定式。如：‎ I prefer the white bag. 我更喜欢那个白色的包。‎ Tony prefers staying / to stay at home on weekends. ‎ 托尼更喜欢周末待在家。‎ 此外，prefer还可用于句型“prefer ... to ...”中，意为“喜欢……而不喜欢(胜过)……”。如：‎ Linda prefers apples to pears. ‎ 琳达喜欢苹果而不喜欢梨。‎ I prefer reading books to watching TV. 我喜欢阅读而不喜欢看电视。‎ ‎4. I suppose I’ll just listen to this new CD I bought.‎ 仔细观察下面例句中suppose的用法和意义，然后补全结论部分所缺的内容。‎ a. We are supposed to get there on time.‎ b. I suppose she will be back next year.‎ c. —Do you suppose he will agree?‎ ‎ —Yes, I suppose so. / No, I suppose not.‎ a. We are supposed to get there on time.‎ ‎（1）观察例句a可知，“被期望/要求做某事”或“该做某事”可用 __________________ 结构表示，含有必须、应该做某事之意，相当于should。‎ b. I suppose she will be back next year.‎ c. —Do you suppose he will agree?‎ ‎ —Yes, I suppose so. / No, I suppose not.‎ ‎（2）例句b中“suppose +that从句”意为“猜测/假定……”，that可以省略，若为否定句，和think，believe等动词的用法一样，应该否定____(主语/从句)‎ ‎，即否定前移；例子c中对疑问句作肯定回答可用________________ ，否定回答可用No, I suppose not。‎ X. Grammar ‎ 在复合句中修饰名词或代词的从句叫定语从句 e.g. I like music that I can dance to.‎ ‎ music 是先行词，that是关系代词 ‎ He is the man who I met yesterday.‎ ‎ man是先行词，who是关系代词 RULES 人 (n.) + who/that + 从句 物 (n.) + that/which + 从句 ‎ 关系代词who; that;的作用：‎ ‎ a. 做代词，代替先行词 ‎ b. 在从句中担任句子成分：主语或宾语 ‎ c. 做连词，把主句和从句连接起来 who / that/which 在定语从句中做主语时，‎ 谓语动词的单复数应与先行词保持一致 I prefer shoes that______ cool. (be) ‎ I like a pizza that______ really delicious. (be)‎ I love singers who ______ beautiful. (be) ‎ I have a friend who _______ sports. (play)‎ 在2d中找定语从句。‎ ‎1. I suppose I’ll just listen to this new CD I bought.‎ ‎2. I like smooth music that helps me relax after a long week at work.‎ ‎3. I only like movies that are funny.‎ ‎4. In this case, I’ll ask someone who likes serious movies.‎ ‎5. I prefer movies that give me something to think about.‎ 用that/who填空 ‎1. The girl __________ you saw just now is my sister.‎ ‎2. Do you remember the words _________ we learned last year.‎ ‎3. This is the watch __________ my mother gave me for my birthday.‎ ‎4. I like the present ________ you’ve sent to me.‎ ‎5. The nurse ____ we talked about can speak English well.‎ ‎6. This is the man _______ I met yesterday.‎ ‎7. No one likes books _____ are boring.‎ ‎8. We prefer singers ________ write their own lyrics.‎ XI. Homework ‎1. Remember the language points and grammar.‎ ‎2. Read the conversation in 2d.‎ Section A 2 (3a-3c)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 学习掌握下列词汇：down, dialogue, ending, documentary, drama, plenty, plenty of, shut, shut off, superhero, once in a while ‎ ‎2) 能掌握以下句型：‎ ① While some people stick to only one kind of movies, I like to watch different kinds depending on how I feel that day.‎ ② When I’m down or tired, I prefer movies that can cheer me up.‎ ③ But they try their best to solve their problems.‎ ④ Laughing for two hours is a good way to relax. ‎ ⑤ Documentaries like March of the Penguins which provide plenty of information about a certain subject can be interesting,…‎ ⑥ I don’t mind action movies like Spider Man when I’m too tired to think.‎ ⑦ I can just shut off my brain…‎ ⑧ Once in a while, I like to watch movies that are scary. ‎ ⑨ But I’m too scared to watch them alone. ‎ ⑩ It doesn’t feel so scary anymore. ‎ ‎3) 进一步熟练掌握that/ which/ who引导的定语从句。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎1) 阅读短文，能按要求获取相关的信息。‎ ‎2) 通过阅读训练来提高学生们的阅读能力。‎ ‎3) 能用定语从句表达自己的喜好， 并能对自己过的电影，听过的CD等进行描述。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 掌握本课时中出现的生词down, dialogue, ending, documentary, drama, plenty, plenty of, shut, shut off, superhero, once in a while ‎ ‎2) 学会用that/which/who引导的定语从句描述自己喜好 ‎2. 教学难点：‎ 学会用that/which/who引导的定语从句描述自己喜好 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Revision ‎ ‎1. Work in pairs. ‎ Ask your partner about what’s his/her favorite movie/music/movie star /city/… and fill in the blanks.‎ Name Movie Music Movie star City A B 通过学生之间的讨论，熟练掌握引导的定语从句。‎ ‎2. Share your ideas with the class. ‎ II. Warming up ‎1. 引导学生使用常用句型：‎ What kind of… do you like? ‎ I like movies that…‎ I love music that…‎ I prefer movie stars who ….‎ ‎2. 展示表示电影类型的词汇。‎ Ⅲ. Reading ‎ ‎1. 阅读指导 ‎ 1) 快速阅读全文, 注意每段话的首句, 有利于理解每段的段落大意。‎ ‎2) 把含有定语从句的句子画出来, 帮助你理解并完成阅读任务。‎ ‎2. Work on 3a. ‎ Fill in the chart. List the different kinds of movies and the movie names. ‎ Kinds of movies Movie names Ⅳ. Careful Reading ‎ Work on 3b. Read the passage again and answer the questions.‎ ‎1. How does the writer describe each kind of movie?‎ ‎2. What kinds of movies does the writer prefer to watch when he or she is sad or tired?‎ ‎3. How does the writer feel after watching these movies?‎ ‎4. Does the writer like scary movies? When does he or she watch them?‎ Ss try to read and find the answers to these questions.‎ Then check the answers with the Ss Ⅴ. Practice ‎ Work on 3c: ‎ 1. 让学生先看课本表格：What kinds of movies do you like to watch? Complete the chart.‎ When I’m…‎ I like/prefer to watch movies that/which…‎ Examples/movie names happy sad tired bored ‎2. Work in groups and ask others what kinds of movies they like in different situations. ‎ ‎3. Share your ideas and compare them. ‎ Ⅵ. Language points ‎1. While some people stick to only one kind of movies, I like to watch different kinds depending on how I feel that day.‎ ‎ stick v. 粘贴；将……刺入 (stuck, stuck)‎ ‎ e.g. He stuck a stamp on the envelope. 他把一张邮票贴到信封上。‎ stick to 坚持；固守 e.g. Stick to your dream, you’ll succeed with your hard work. ‎ ‎ 坚持你的梦想，付出努力，你就会成功的。‎ ‎2. When I’m down or tired, I prefer movies that can cheer me up.‎ ‎ down adj. 悲哀；沮丧 用于系动词后作表语 ‎ ‎ e.g. When he is down, he often listens to gentle music.‎ ‎ 他心情沮丧时，常听柔和的音乐。‎ ‎ cheer up 使高兴；高兴起来；使振奋 e.g. Cheer up! Our troubles will soon be over. ‎ ‎ 振作起来！我们的困难很快就会过去。‎ ‎3. Documentaries like March of the Penguins which provide plenty of information about a certain subject can be interesting,…‎ plenty of 大量；充足 既可修饰可数名词复数形式， 也可修饰不可数名词。‎ ‎ e.g. There is plenty of coal in this area. ‎ ‎ 这个地区有丰富的煤。 ‎ ‎4. I can just shut off my brain…我就让大脑不思考 ‎ ‎ shut v. 关闭；关上 shut off 关闭；停止运转 e.g. Shut off the internet. 断开网络。‎ ‎5. Once in a while, I like to watch movies that are scary. ‎ once in a while 偶尔地；间或 e.g. He went to see them once in a while. ‎ 他偶尔去探望他们。 ‎ VII. Exercises VIII. Homework ‎ According 3c, write a report about the result of your group. ‎ ‎ Section A 3 (Grammar Focus-4c)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 学习掌握下列词汇：intelligent ‎ ‎2）进行一步复习巩固学习Section A 部分所学的生词和词组。‎ ‎3）掌握如何表达自己喜好的句型。‎ ‎4）掌握that/which/who引导的定语从句的用法。 ‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎1）使学生学会表达自己的喜好。‎ ‎2）能对自己看过的书籍，电影，听过的CD等进行简单的描述。‎ ‎3）通过表达个人的喜好， 提高自己的欣赏美的水平。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 复习巩固Section A 部分所学的生词和词组，达到熟练运用的目标。‎ ‎2) 总结 表达个人喜好的不同句型。‎ ‎3）总结that/which/who引导的定语从句的用法。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ that/which/who引导的定语从句的用法。‎ 三、教学过程 I. Revision and Leading in ‎ ‎1. Have a dictation of the new words learned in the last class. ‎ ‎2. Review some main phrases we learned in the last class. Check the homework. ‎ ‎3. Revision What kind of group/singers/… do you like?‎ ‎◆ What kind of music can’t you stand?‎ ‎◆ What kind of musicians don’t you like?‎ ‎◆ What about your classmates?‎ Fill in the following chart.‎ My opinion Classmate who agrees I like groups that ___________________‎ ‎____________________________________________‎ I love singers who_______________‎ ‎____________________________________________‎ I can’t stand music that_______________‎ ‎____________________________________________‎ I don’t like musicians who _______________‎ ‎___________________‎ ‎____________________________________________‎ i) 按照要求完成句子,每空一词。 1. I like quiet and slow music. (对画线部分进行提问)‎ ‎______ ______ ______ ______ do you like?‎ ‎2. That book is interesting. (同上)‎ ‎______ ______ ______ ______ ______ that book?‎ ‎3. That woman is my teacher. She is wearing a pink T-shirt. (合二为一)‎ The woman ______ ______ ______ a pink T-shirt is my teacher. ‎ ‎1. What kind of music 2. What do you think of 3. who is wearing ii). 用所给词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1. She prefers _______(stay) at home to playing outside. ‎ ‎2. Do you know a girl ________ (call) Li Na?‎ ‎3. Both of Alice’s parents are _________ (music). ‎ ‎4. She likes singers who write their own _______ (lyric). ‎ ‎1. staying 2. called 3. musicians 4. lyrics ‎ Warming up 老师找几幅熟悉的歌星、电影明星的图片，让学生用that/who引导的定语从句猜测他们的信息。‎ 引导学生使用定语从句回答问题， 并找部分同学把答案写在黑板上。‎ II. Grammar Focus ‎1. 学生阅读Grammar Focus中的句子，然后做填空练习。‎ ‎1). 你喜欢哪种音乐？ 我喜欢可以随之歌唱的音乐。‎ ‎_______ _______ ______ music do you like? ‎ I love music _____ /_____ I can ______ ______ _________.‎ ‎2). 许飞喜欢哪种团队？他更喜欢演奏宁静慢节奏的歌曲的团队。‎ What kind of _____ _____ XU Fei like?‎ He ______ group ______/_____ ______ quiet and slow songs.‎ ‎3). 你喜欢哪种电影？我更喜欢给我带来思考的电影。‎ ‎______ ______ ______ ______ _______ _____ ______?‎ I ______ movies ______ /______ ______ ______ _______ ______ _____ ______. ‎ ‎4). 卡门喜欢哪种音乐家？ 他喜欢表演不同音乐的音乐家。‎ What kind of _______ does Carmen like? ‎ She likes ______ _______ ______ ______ _______ _______ _______.‎ ‎1). What kind of, that/which ，sing along with 2). group does, prefers, that/which play ‎ ‎3). What kind of movies do you like , prefer , that/which give me something to think about ‎ ‎4). Musicians, musicians who play different kinds of music ‎ ‎2. 学生们根据记忆，看大屏幕来完成填空练习。‎ ‎3. 学生们完成填空试题后，可以打开课本检查答案，对错误的句子，单独进行强化记忆。‎ III. Grammar 定语从句是指在复合句中作定语的从句，定语从句所修饰的词叫先行词。‎ 定语从句通常放在先行词的后面，由关系代词或关系副词引导。本课我们将学 习由关系代词that或which及who引导的定语从句。‎ which, who, that 引导的定语从句 which, that 和who是定语从句中重要的引导词。下面的例句是由which, that和who引导的定语从句。请同学们仔细观察，然后补全结论部分所缺内容。‎ ‎【例句】‎ ‎1. China is a country which / that has a long history.‎ ‎2. This is the book which / that my mother bought me yesterday.  ‎ ‎3. The man who / that is standing by the door is her brother. ‎ ‎4. I like the boy who / whom / that I met at the party.‎ ‎【结论】‎ ‎1. 观察例句1和2可以看出，which引导的定语从句修饰的是____（人/物）。由例句3 和4可知，who引导的定语从句修饰的是_____（人/物）。 ‎ ‎2. 由例句1和3可知，which和who在定语从句中可以作_____语；观察例句2和4可以看出，which和who在定语从句中还可以作____语。‎ ‎3. 观察例句1和2可以看出，which在定语从句中作主语或宾语时均可由________代替；由例句3可知，who在定语从句中作主语时，可由________代替；由例句4可知，who在定语从句中作宾语时，可由________或________代替。‎ Keys: 物，人，主，宾，that, that, whom, that ‎【运用】 ‎ ‎ 将下列各题中的两个句子合并为含有that或which引导的定语从句的复合句。‎ 1. The pot is very expensive. It was used by my mom yesterday. ‎ ‎ _________________________________________________________________‎ ‎2. The magazine is mine. You read it this morning.   ‎ ‎ _______________________________________________________________‎ ‎3. The dog is cute. Tom is looking after it.     ‎ ‎ _______________________________________________________________‎ ‎4. That is the most interesting film. She has seen the film.  ‎ ‎ ________________________________________________________________‎ 选用that, who, whom 或 which填空。‎ ‎1. The girl _______________ you saw at the meeting is a good swimmer. ‎ ‎2. The town ___________ we visited a few years ago is much larger than before. ‎ ‎3. April 1st is a day ____________ is called April Fools’ Day.‎ ‎4. The girl ___________ often helps me with my English is from No. 8 Middle School.‎ ‎1. The pot that / which was used by my mom yesterday is very expensive. ‎ ‎2. The magazine (that / which) you read this morning is mine.‎ ‎3. The dog (that / which) Tom is looking after is cute.‎ ‎4. That is the most interesting film (that) she has seen.‎ ‎1. who/whom/that; 2. which/that; 3. which/that; 4. who/that IV. Practice ‎ ‎1. Work on 4a: Choose words from the different columns to make sentences.‎ I/You/‎ He/She/‎ We/They like(s)‎ love(s)‎ prefer(s)‎ food/clothes/‎ people/music/‎ actors/singers/‎ movies that/‎ which/‎ who is/are funny/comfortable/‎ inexpensive/slow/‎ sweet/salty/loud/‎ interesting/‎ intelligent ‎1). 让学生根据表格内容，用定语从句写句子，不同的学生有不同的答案。‎ ‎2). 让学生体会先行词是物时用that/which引导， 先行词是人时，用who/that引导。‎ ‎2. Work on 4b. ‎ ‎1) 让学生们阅读表格中的内容。‎ ‎2）让学生阅读4b中的问题。小组展开讨论，完成定语从句。‎ ‎3) 找部分同学到黑板上写下自己的答案， 共同校正答案。‎ V. Pair work. ‎ Work on 4c. ‎ A: What kind of food do you enjoy?‎ B: I enjoy food that is sweet. ‎ ‎…..‎ Example: ‎ A: What kind of groups do you like?‎ B: I like groups that wear really cool clothes.‎ A: That’s not really important to me. I like groups that can sing.‎ A: What kind of groups don’t you like?‎ B: I don’t like groups that sing others’ songs. ….‎ VI. Exercise ‎1. He is the man __________ is ready to help others. ‎ ‎2. The girl ________________ I spoke to just now is my friend. ‎ ‎3. The dress ___________ you bought in the city mall is made of silk.‎ ‎4. Bill likes music ___________ he can sing along with. ‎ ‎5. This is the village __________ I used to live in.‎ ‎6. Women always like buying many things _____________ they don’t need at all. ‎ ‎7. I’m studying a subject ___________ I am very interested in.‎ Keys: 1. that/who 2. that/who 3. that/which 4. that/which 5.that/which 6. that/which 7. that/which ‎ VII. Homework ‎ ‎1. 复习Grammar Focus 中的内容。‎ ‎2. Make a survey 调查你的家庭成员他们对电影，CD 食物，歌曲， 音乐制作人等的喜好，并写成一个小报告，向你的同学们汇报一下。‎ ‎ ‎ Section B 1 (1a-2e)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 能掌握以下单词：sense, sadness, pain, reflect, moving, look up, perform, lifetime, ‎ Pity, total, in total, master, praise, recall, wound, painful, ‎ ‎2) 能掌握以下重难句子：‎ ‎1. I like clothes that are unusual.‎ ‎2. I like writers who explain things well.‎ ‎3. I love movies that are scary.‎ ‎4. ..but it was one of the most moving pieces of music that I’ve ever heard.‎ ‎5. Abing’s father taught him to play many musical instruments, such as the drums, dizi, and erhu, ‎ ‎6. …and by age 17, Abing was known for his musical ability.‎ ‎7. Even after Abing got married and had a home again, he continued to sing and play on the streets.‎ ‎8. He performed in this way for many years.‎ ‎9. It is a pity that only six pieces of music in total were recorded for the future world to hear, but his popularity continues to this day. ‎ ‎10. Its sad beauty not only paints a picture of Abing’s own life but also makes people recall their deepest wounds from their own sad or painful experiences.‎ ‎3) 运用that/which/who引导的定语从句来谈论自己在乐队，书籍，电影等方面的个人爱好。‎ ‎4) 培养学生的阅读能力和归纳能力。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ 继续学习表达个人喜好， 包括书籍，电影，音乐，歌曲的进行简单的评论， 提高审美水平。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 掌握本课时出现的生词及用法。‎ ‎2) 进行听力训练，提高综合听说能力。 ‎ ‎3） 阅读短文，获得相关信息，提高学生们的综合阅读能力。‎ ‎2. 教学难点 ‎ ‎1. 听力训练 ‎2. 阅读2b部分的短文并完成相关要求。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision ‎ ‎1. Daily greeting. ‎ ‎2. Check the homework. ‎ ‎3. Let some Ss talk about what kind of movies/books/bands/actors/actresses…. they like.‎ Ⅱ. Lead in ‎ T: Do you remember some sentences that you talked about just now? ‎ S: Yes. ‎ T: What are they?‎ S1: I like movies that make me relaxed.‎ S2: I prefer books that give me something to think about.‎ S3: I love bands that play different kinds of music.‎ ‎….. ‎ What kind of bands do you like?‎ I love bands that…‎ ‎…make us happy.‎ ‎…play their own songs.‎ ‎…play different kinds of songs.‎ What kind of books do you like? ‎ I prefer books that…‎ I prefer books that give me something to think about.‎ OK, now let’s fill in the chart. Write names of your favorite movie, book, band.‎ III. Writing ‎ Work on 1a. ‎ ‎1. Ask Ss to write their favorite movie, book, and band and fill in the chart. ‎ Movie ‎ Book ‎ Band ‎ ‎2. Share their answers with others in class. ‎ Ⅳ. Listening ‎ Work on 1b: ‎ ‎1. Listen and write the three things that Michael likes in the first column of the chart. ‎ What Michael likes ‎ Why he likes it jacket He likes clothes that are unusual.‎ Work on 1c ‎2. Listen again. Write why Michael likes each thing in the second column of the chart in 1b. ‎ Check the answers. ‎ Keys: ‎ book, He likes writers who explains things well. ‎ movie poster He loves movies that are scary. ‎ Ⅴ. Group work ‎ ‎1. Work on 1d. Discuss your favorite things in 1a with your group. Say why you like each thing. ‎ Your favorite Why you like it Movie: Titanic Book ‎ Band ‎ ‎…‎ A: I like movies that are sad. I love Titanic. ‎ B: Oh, I don’t. I like movies that are scary. I really like …‎ 1. ‎ Let some group make a conversation before the class. ‎ ‎1) A: I like movies that are… I love…‎ B: Oh, I don’t. I like movies that are …‎ A: I don’t mind … movies, but …‎ ‎2) A: I like books that are interesting. I love Journey to the west.‎ B: No, I don’t. I like The Science Book for Girls and other intelligent beings. It helps us know how much fun science can be. ‎ ‎3) A: I like bands that play fast and loud music. Then I can dance to it. I like The Cool ‎ Kids.‎ B: Yeah, I like them, too. And I also like bands that write and play their own music. I like the Beyond.‎ VI. Lead in Work on 2a. How many Chinese musical instruments do you know about? Do you know any famous pieces of music that are played on these instruments? Make a list with your partner.‎ Show a picture of a concert. Tell Ss that the man is Abing. He wrote many pieces of beautiful music. He was a folk musician. He was born in Wuxi in 1893.‎ Which piece of his music is the most famous?‎ Ⅶ. Reading ‎ Fast Reading ‎1. Now look at the title of the following passage and read the passage and answer the following questions. ‎ ‎1) Which musician does the passage mainly talk about?‎ ‎2) What is the name of his most famous piece of music？‎ ‎3) How does the writer feel about this piece of music? ‎ ‎2. Check the answers with the students. ‎ Keys:‎ ‎1) Abing 2) Erquan Yingyue ‎ ‎3) He feels that it is sad but beautiful, and it not only paints a picture of Abing’s own life but also makes people recall their deepest wounds from their own sad or painful experiences.‎ 阅读指导：尝试使用阅读的策略帮助学生养成好习惯，培养自主学习，大胆尝试良好的阅读氛围。通读全文，先找出或总结出每段的主题大意。‎ 阅读策略：在阅读中注意具体的细节。具体的细节可能是举出的例子，涉及的原因，表达的观点或每段文章中的其他详细信息。‎ Careful Reading ‎1. Let Ss work on 2c. Read the passage again and use suitable words to complete the main idea of each paragraph. Then list the supporting details in each paragraph. ‎ Paragraph ‎ Main idea Supporting details ‎1‎ I was ____ by a piece of music named Erquan Yingyue.‎ The music was strangely beautiful…‎ ‎2‎ Abing lived a very _____ life.‎ ‎3‎ Abing’s musical skills made him very ______.‎ Keys:‎ ‎1. moved ‎ ‎◆ The music was strangely beautiful but under the beauty I sensed a strong sadness and pain. ‎ ‎◆ It was one of the most moving pieces of music that I’ve ever heard.‎ ‎◆ I almost cried along with it as I listened. ‎ ‎2. poor ‎ ‎◆ His mother died when he was very young. ‎ ‎◆ His father died when he was a teenager.‎ u He was poor and homeless.‎ ‎◆ He developed an illness and became blind. ‎ ‎◆ He lived on the streets and played music to make money. ‎ ‎3. popular ‎ ‎◆ He could play over 600 pieces, and he wrote many of them himself.‎ ‎◆ His most famous piece is still played and praised by erhu master today. ‎ ‎◆ Erquan Yingyue has become one of China’s national treasures. ‎ Paragraph 1: 指导：‎ 读本段文章可知：作者听到的二泉映月时被深深感动。支持这个观点的具体细节： ‎ ‎◆ The music was strangely beautiful but under the beauty I sensed a strong sadness and pain. ‎ ‎◆ It was one of the most moving pieces of music that I’ve ever heard.‎ ‎◆ I almost cried along with it as I listened. ‎ Paragraph 2: 指导：‎ 读本段文章可知：阿炳早期过着贫穷的生活。支持这个观点的具体细节：‎ ‎◆ His mother died when he was very young. ‎ ‎◆ His father died when he was a teenager.‎ u He was poor and homeless.‎ ‎◆ He developed an illness and became blind. ‎ ‎◆ He lived on the streets and played music to make money.‎ Paragraph 3: 指导：‎ 读本段文章可知：阿炳的音乐才能使他成为很受欢迎的人。支持这个观点的具体细节：‎ ‎◆ He could play over 600 pieces, and he wrote many of them himself.‎ ‎◆ His most famous piece is still played and praised by erhu master today. ‎ ‎◆ Erquan Yingyue has become one of China’s national treasures. ‎ Post reading Work on 2d ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss that they have to use the word in the box to fill in the blanks. At the same time, circle that or who to complete the sentences. Make sure Ss know what to do. ‎ Abing played music (that/who) could touch the hearts of people. When we listen to his music, we can ______ both the beauty and the sadness in it. It makes us think about the _____ and _______(that/who) we have experienced in the past. For this reason, many people _____ him as the musician (that/who) has greatly influenced erhu music. So it is really a ______ that not many pieces of his music were recorded.‎ 指导：‎ ‎1) 在定语从句中，如果先行词是物，关系代词我们可用that， 如果先行词是人， 关系代词可选用who/that.‎ ‎2) Try to guess the meaning of these words in the box. ‎ ‎2. Finish 2d. ‎ ‎3. Check the answers. ‎ Answers: that, sense, pain, wounds, that, praise, that/who, pity ‎ Work on 2e ‎1. Student A is foreign visitor who is interested in Abing and his music. Student B is a Chinese student who knows about Abing. Use the information in the passage to make a conversation.‎ ‎2. Ask some students to act in front of the class. ‎ e.g. A: What kind of musical instruments did Abing play?‎ ‎ B: He could play many instruments, but he is best known for playing the erhu.‎ ‎…..‎ Ⅷ. Language points ‎1. …I sensed a strong sadness and pain.‎ ‎ 1) sense v. 感觉到， 意识到 ‎ e.g. We all seemed to sense his sadness at that time.‎ ‎ 在那个时候我们好像都感觉到了他的悲伤。‎ sense n. 意识，感觉 e.g. People have five senses, sight, hearing, smell, taste, and touch.‎ ‎ 人有五种感觉：视觉，听觉，嗅觉，味觉和触觉。‎ ‎2) sadness n. 悲哀 ‎ ‎ e.g. Don't give yourself up to sadness, there's still hope!‎ ‎ 不要太悲伤，还有希望!‎ - ness是个名词后缀，一些形容词后加ness可变成名词，如：‎ happy—happiness kind--kindness sad adj. 悲伤的，忧愁的 e.g. She sang a sad song. 她唱着悲伤的歌。‎ ‎3) pain n. 疼痛，努力 ‎ e.g. He has pains in the arm. 他手臂痛。 ‎ ‎ painful adj. 痛苦的；疼痛的；令人不快的 ‎ e.g. He had a painful experience in the past.‎ ‎ 他过去有一段痛苦的经历。‎ ‎2. The piece had a simple name, Erquan Yingyue (Moon Reflected on Second Spring),…‎ ‎ piece表示音乐作品，相当于汉语的“一首歌；一支乐曲”等。‎ ‎ e.g. When he was a small boy, he could hum songs and difficult pieces of music. 当他还是个小孩子，就会哼唱歌曲和颇有难度的乐曲。‎ I especially like that short piece by Beethoven.‎ 我特别喜欢贝多芬的那首小曲。‎ reflect v. 反映，映出 e.g. His actions reflect his thoughts. 他的行为反映他的思想。‎ ‎3. Later I looked up the history of Erquan Yingyue… ‎ ‎ look up （在字典，参考书中，通过电脑）查阅，抬头看 e.g. It is unnecessary to look up every word you don’t know in the dictionary while ‎ your are reading.‎ ‎ 阅读时，碰到生词，不必都要在词典中查阅。‎ ‎ I looked up and saw him. 我抬起头来看见了他。 ‎ ‎4. He performed in this way for many years.‎ ‎ perform v. 表演，执行 ‎ e.g. He performed a dance for them. 他为他们表演了一个舞蹈。 ‎ ‎ He performed his duties perfectly. 他圆满地完成了自己的任务。 ‎ ‎5. It is a pity that only six pieces of music in total were recorded for the future world to hear, but his popularity continues to this day.‎ ‎ 1) pity n. 遗憾，怜悯 ‎ e.g. It’s pity that you missed the beginning of the movie.‎ ‎ 很遗憾你错过了电影的开头。‎ ‎2) total n. 总数，合计 e.g. Their expenses reached a total of 1,000 pounds. 他们的花费总计一千英镑。 Add this numbers together and give me the total. 把这些数字加起来，告诉我总数是多少。‎ in total 总共；合计 e.g. In total over 100 people attended the conference. 共计有百余人参加了这个会议。 ‎ total adj. 总的，全体的 e.g. What is the total population of Japan? 日本的总人口为多少? ‎ popularity 表示“声望；知名度”之意。当我们说to win popularity或to enjoy popularity即指“享盛名；得众望；受欢迎”。‎ e.g. Country music is growing in popularity. ‎ ‎ 乡村音乐正逐渐得到更多人的喜爱。‎ ‎6. …all the great erhu masters play and praise.‎ ‎ praise n. 赞扬，表扬 ‎ e.g. He won praises for his modesty. 他以自己的谦虚赢得别人的赞扬。 ‎ ‎ He deserves all the praise 他值得我们一切的赞美。 ‎ praise v. 赞扬，表扬 e.g. The teacher praised her many times because of her kindness.‎ ‎ 因为她的善良，老师表扬了她很多次。‎ ‎7. …makes people recall their deepest wounds from their own sad or painful experiences.‎ ‎ wound n. 伤口，创伤 ‎ e.g. He has a wound in the arm. 他臂上有一处伤。 ‎ wound v. 使（身体）受伤；伤害 e.g. Two soldiers were wounded in the attack. 在这次袭击中，有两名士兵受伤。 ‎ ‎ You must not wound her feelings. 你不可以伤害她的感情。 ‎ Ⅸ. Homework ‎ ‎1. 课后阅读短文，试着复述这个故事。‎ ‎2. Write a passage about Abing and his Erquan Yingyue. ‎ Section B 2 (3a-Self Check)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 复习that/who引导的定语从句的用法.‎ ‎2) 学会用that/who引导的定语从句描述自己的喜好，并能发表简单的评论。‎ ‎3）学会应用本单元的知识谈论自己的喜好和感受和原因， 并能在喜好上给别人提出建议。‎ ‎4）会用本单元的常见句型结构写出相应的短文， 提高学生的写作能力。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎ 继续学习有关个人喜好，使同学们共同提高审美水平， 提高整体素质。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 用that/who引导的定语从句描述个人喜好。‎ ‎2）有关个人喜好的写作。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ 有关个人喜好的写作。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision Review the main story of Abing. Let some Ss try to retell the story of Abing and his nusic. ‎ Ⅱ. Lead in ‎ Role-play the conversation. ‎ A: What kind of music do you like best?‎ B: I like music that is sad. ‎ A: Why do you like this kind of music? ‎ B: I think sad music is strangely beautiful ‎ A: How do you feel when you listen to this kind of music? ‎ B: I feel sad and want to cry when I listen to it.‎ ‎……‎ III. Practice Work on 3a. ‎ ‎1. Let Ss finish 3a. Make notes in the chart by themselves. ‎ ‎2. Share their ideas with others in class. ‎ IV. Writing ‎1. Use their notes to write an article for a newspaper or magazine to tell people about their favorite kind of music/movie and your favorite song/movie. ‎ Useful expressions：‎ My favorite kind of music/movie is… ‎ I like…because …‎ It was…by…‎ When I listen to /watch it, I feel…‎ I think you should listen to/watch it too because …‎ ‎2. Ask Ss to read the first paragraph in 2b. ‎ Example: ‎ My favorite kind of music is old music. I’ll Never Forget My Mom is my favorite song. I like it because it is beautiful. The lyrics are very great. It was written by Liu Zheng. Many famous singers like Cheng Lin, Liu Hegang, Tan Jing once sang it. When I listened to it, I thought of my mom. The mother’s love is the greatest love in the world. I was moved by these lyrics. I think you should listen to it, too because it can help us love our mothers more V. Self-check. ‎ Work on Self Check 1: ‎ ‎1. Let some Ss read the words in the box. Make sure all the Ss know the meaning of the words. ‎ ‎2. Let Ss read the sentences in Self check 1. Then Ss try to fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the words in the box. ‎ ‎3. Let some Ss read their answers. Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ Work on Self check 2 ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss that they have to fill in the blanks with who, that, which. More than one answers may be possible. ‎ ‎2. Ss think and try to complete the conversation by themselves. ‎ ‎3. Let some Ss read their answers to the class. ‎ ‎4. Ask some Ss to act out the conversation. ‎ Work on Self check3‎ ‎1. Let Ss complete the sentences about themselves. ‎ ‎2. 指导： 提醒学生注意that/who/which引导的定语从句的使用。‎ ‎3. Share their answers with the class. ‎ e.g. I don’t like music that/which is too loud.‎ I enjoy spending time in places that/which are relaxing.‎ I have friends who/that are friendly and helpful. ‎ I like movie stars who/that are beautiful or handsome. ‎ VI. Exercise: ‎ If time is enough, do some more exercises on big screen. ‎ 用“who”或“that”填空。‎ ‎1. The man ________ is talking with my mother is my father.‎ ‎2. That book is the one _______ I bought yesterday.‎ ‎3. I know the man ______ is a model worker.‎ ‎4. I can’t find a house _______ is suitable for us to live.‎ ‎5. Is there a zoo _______ we can see tigers around here?‎ ‎1. who/that 2. that 3. who/that 4. that 5. that ‎ 同意句改写。‎ ‎1. I like slow music. I like music ______ ______ ______.‎ ‎2. What do you think of the CD? ______ ______ ______ ______ the CD?‎ ‎3. I like friendly people. I like people ______ ______ ______.‎ ‎4. My father prefers quiet beaches. My father prefers beaches ______ ______ ______.‎ ‎5. I talked to the man. The man is our teacher. ‎ The man _____ _____ ______ _____ is our teacher.‎ ‎1. that is slow 2. How do you feel 3. who are friendly 4. that are quiet ‎ ‎5. who I talked to ‎ VII. Homework ‎ ‎1. 复习本单元内容。‎ ‎2. 对家人进行调查， 看他们喜欢什么样的音乐，书籍，电影等。和自己的喜好比较一下， 看有哪些相同点或不同点，写篇短文。‎ Unit 10 You’re supposed to shake hands.‎ Section A 1 (1a-2d)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 能掌握以下单词： custom, bow, kiss, greet, be supposed to, ‎ ‎2）掌握be supposed to句型的用法。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎1. 学习一些见面礼仪，生活习俗和对时间的看法。‎ ‎2. 了解西方国家的风土人情和习俗。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：be supposed to的用法 ‎2. 教学难点：中西方人们见面礼仪的差别。‎ ‎ 培养学生跨文化交际意识。‎ 三、教学过程 I. Lead-in 师生讨论： 学生在学校应该做哪些事情？引出新句型。‎ 如 ：Is it a good idea to come to class late?‎ S: No. ‎ T: That’s right. It’s not a good idea to come late. You’re not supposed to come to class late. You’re supposed to …‎ eat in class, do homework every day, raise your hand before talking等做更多的练习，引出be supposed to句型 II. Discussion ‎1. 大屏幕展示一张世界地图，师生对话：‎ T: Do you know where Brazil/ the United States/ Japan/Mexico/Korea is?‎ S:…‎ T: Do you know what people do when they meet for the first time?‎ S: …‎ ‎2. 利用多媒体播放各国初次见面的礼仪， 学习新单词：custom, bow, kiss, greet, ‎ III. Work on 1a-1c ‎ ‎1.1a ‎ 多媒体呈现1a图片， 让学生根据图画内容， 说说图中的握手， 接吻， 鞠躬是哪个国家的礼仪， 然后按要求把书本给出的“国家”和“习俗”连接起来。老师不要给出答案。‎ ‎2. Listening 1b.‎ ‎ Listen to the recording and check your answers to activities in 1a.‎ ‎3. Pair work:‎ A: What are people in Korea/… to do when they meet for the first time? ‎ ‎ B: They are supposed to bow. How about in the United States?‎ A: They’re supposed to shake hands. ‎ ‎4. 教师介绍本单元的目标语言：You’re supposed to ….‎ Ⅳ. Listening ‎ ‎1. Listening to 2a and 2b. What mistakes did Maria make? ‎ ‎2. Finish 2a and 2b. ‎ ‎3. Pair work Role-play a conversation between Maria and Dan. ‎ Dan: How was the dinner at Paul’s house last night?‎ Maria: Well, it was OK, but I made some mistakes. I was supposed to arrive at 7:00,‎ ‎ but I…‎ V. Role play Work on 2d Role play a conversation between Katie and John. Discuss different customs in different countries. ‎ VI. Consolidation 完成任务： 礼仪大荟萃 让学生展示上课前通过网络或书籍等形式查找到的各国礼仪， 并分类记录， 制成表格。‎ VII. Language points 进一步向学生讲解本单元的目标语言: be supposed to, be expected to.‎ ‎1. You are supposed to shake hands. ‎ ‎ be supposed to do… 应该……被期望做……，当句子的主语是人时，它可以用来表示劝告，建议，义务，责任等，意思是 “to be expected to do sth., or to have to do sth.”‎ e.g. You’re supposed to ask the teacher if you want to leave the classroom. 如果你要离开教室，应该先问问老师。 We are not to supposed to play football on Sunday.‎ ‎ 不准我们在星期日踢足球。‎ ‎2. That’s how people in Japan are expected to greet each other.‎ ‎ greet =to welcome or say “hello” 动词 “问候，打招呼” ‎ ‎ e.g. He greeted her by saying “good morning”. ‎ ‎ 他向她打招呼说 “早上好”。 She greeted me with a friendly smile. 她向我微笑致意。‎ VIII. Homework Write a passage about different customs in different countries.‎ ‎ Section A 2 (3a-3c) ‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 学习掌握下列词汇： relaxed, value, capital, noon, mad, effort, drop by, after all, get mad, make an effort ‎2）复习 be supposed to句型。‎ ‎3）如何正确的阅读课文。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎1）通过“应该” 与“不应该”进一步了解一些国家的礼仪和对时间的看法。‎ ‎2）了解不同国家的不同的时间观念， 加强对中国文化的理解。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 掌握本部分出现的生词和词组，达到熟练运用的目标。‎ ‎2) 阅读短文，获得相关的信息。通过阅读练习，来提高阅读能力。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ ‎1) 阅读短文，获得相关的信息的能力。‎ ‎2) 理解并运用所学的词汇及表达方式。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming up ‎ ‎1. 师生问候。‎ ‎2. 让学生展示上节课的演讲稿：各国礼仪的差异 Ⅱ. Lead-in ‎ ‎1. 展示一个哥伦比亚和瑞士风光的照片。使学生熟悉这两个国家的情况， 通过图片欣赏引出本节内容。‎ ‎2. Look at the pictures and say something about the two countries.‎ What do you know about Switzerland?‎ ‎ What do you know about Colombia? ‎ Ⅲ. Reading ‎ ‎1. Work on 3a: Tell Ss to read the article and answer the question:‎ In which country is it OK to be 15 minutes late for dinner? ‎ Ss read the article quickly and try to find the answer to the question. ‎ ‎2. 方法指导： ‎ 首先，对原文材料迅速浏览，掌握全文的主旨大意。 速读全文，抓住中心主旨很有必要，在速读的过程中，应尽可能多地捕获信息材料。其次，带着问题，再回到原文中去寻找、捕获有关信息。做好这类题的要领是：1）.明确题意，顺藤摸瓜。2）.按照要求，寻找答案来源。3）.找准关键词，明白其暗示作用。4）再读课文，看答案是否符合题意。‎ ‎3. 按指导的方法带着问题进行阅读。 ‎ ‎4. 最后，教师让部分学生说出自己的答案，并校对答案。‎ ‎ Key: In Colombia. ‎ Ⅳ. Careful Reading ‎ ‎1. Answer the questions according to the passages in 3a.‎ ‎ 1. Is it OK if people in Colombia arrive a bit late for a friend’s dinner?‎ ‎2. Who are pretty relaxed about time, Colombians or Swiss people?‎ ‎ 3. Colombians usually make plans to meet friends, don’t they?‎ ‎4. What are you supposed to do if you want to visit your friends in Switzerland? ‎ ‎5. What do people in Switzerland think of time?‎ ‎2. Work on 3b. Read the passage again and fill in the chart. ‎ Ideas and customs about…‎ Colombia Switzerland ‎ Being on time ‎ Visiting a friend’s house Making plans with friends ‎ V. Role-play 3c ‎ Role-play a conversation between Teresa and Marc. Teresa is late and Marc is mad.‎ 注意使用目标语言： In …, you’re supposed to…‎ A: Hi, Marc. Sorry, I’m a little late.‎ B: Teresa, you’re 10 minutes late!‎ A: It’s just 10 minutes! It’s no big deal!‎ B: Well, in Switzerland, you’re supposed to…‎ VI. Talking Say something about customs in Colombia and Switzerland about being on time and ‎ visiting friends.‎ VII. Language points ‎1. Where I’m from, we are pretty relaxed about time.‎ Where I’m from是一个由 “where” 引导的地点状语从句。‎ e.g. Just stay where you are. 就留在你原来的地方。‎ relaxed adj. 放松的，自在的 be relaxed about…对…感到放松 e.g. Don’t be afraid, just be relaxed about the interview.  不要害怕，轻松面试。  ‎ You just need to be relaxed about this examination.  ‎ 你只要放松地面对考试就可以了。‎ ‎2. We value the time we spend with our family and friends in our everyday lives.‎ ‎ value v. 珍视，重视 ‎ e.g. I’ve always valued my teachers’ advice.‎ ‎ 我一直很重视老师们所给的建议。‎ ‎ life n. 生活（可数名词）‎ ‎ e.g. Many people make different kinds of friends in their social lives.‎ ‎ 许多人在他们的社交生活中结交了各种不同的朋友。‎ ‎3. We often just drop by our friends’ homes.‎ drop by 顺便拜访，‎ e.g. Drop by my home this evening . 今晚到我家来谈谈。‎ ‎4. We’re the capital of clocks and watches, after all!‎ ‎ after all 毕竟 e.g. So you see, I was right after all. 你看, 毕竟还是我对吧。‎ You decided to come after all. 你毕竟还是决定来了。‎ ‎5. So I make an effort to be on time when I meet my friends.‎ ‎ make an effort 做出努力 ‎ e.g. I will make an effort to stop smoking. 我要尽力戒烟。‎ ‎ You should make an effort to improve your reading ability. ‎ ‎ 你应该努力提高你的阅读能力. ‎ ‎6. Also, we never visit a friend’s house without calling first.‎ ‎ 双重否定句。never和without都表示否定，合在一起表达肯定意义，“一定会”。‎ ‎ e.g. You will hardly ever be able to speak good English without practicing.‎ ‎ 你不练习几乎是不可能把英语学好的。‎ VIII. Exercises Ⅰ. Choose the correct answer.‎ ‎1. — How nice the music sounds!‎ ‎ — It does! The peaceful music will make you feel _______.‎ ‎ A. excited B. bored ‎ ‎ C. moved D. relaxed ‎【解析】D。relaxed作形容词，“放松的、宽松的、轻松自在的”，可作表语、定语或宾语补足语。作表语时，主语常为人。‎ ‎2. People in Colombia needn’t make plans to meet their friends. They often just drop by their homes.‎ ‎ A. give a ride to B. give up visiting ‎ C. forget to visit D. come over to ‎【解析】D。drop by “顺便看望(某人)、顺便到(某处)”, 用法同come over to。‎ Ⅱ. Complete the sentences.‎ ‎1. She seemed _______ (放松).‎ ‎2. He likes ___________ (拜访) his friend’s home on Sunday.‎ ‎3. —I’m sorry I didn’t do a good job.‎ ‎ —That’s OK. You have tried your best ________ (毕竟).‎ ‎4. Beijing is the ______ (首都) of China.‎ ‎5. At _____ (正午), the sun is high in the sky. ‎ ‎6. I got ____ (很生气的) with him for being late.‎ ‎ Keys: relaxed, dropping by, after all, capital, noon, mad Homework ‎ Write a short passage about manners in Colombia and Switzerland in 80 words.‎ Section A 3 (Grammar Focus-4c)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 学习掌握下列词汇：passport, clean…off, chalk, blackboard, northern, coast, season, knock, eastern, take off, worth, manner ‎2) 进行一步复习巩固学习Section A 部分所学的生词和词组。‎ ‎3) 掌握be supposed to, be expected to, be important to的句型。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ 进一步了解不同国家的风土人情，体会文化礼仪差异，了解中国的基本礼仪。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 复习巩固Section A 部分所学的生词和词组，达到熟练运用的目标。‎ ‎2) 总结 be supposed to, be expected to, be important to的不同句型。‎ ‎2. 教学难点 be supposed to, be expected to, be important to 的不同句型 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Revision ‎ 根据汉语提示完成句子。‎ ‎1. Walking on the beach makes you feel ________ (放松的).‎ ‎2. Beijing is the _________ (首都）of China. ‎ ‎3. We usually have lunch at ______（中午）. ‎ ‎4. If you _____ _____ _____ _____ (不努力）to study, you won’t pass the English ‎ exam.‎ ‎5. You should be easy on these students. ____ ____ (毕竟）, they are kids. ‎ ‎6. The Chinese people are great people and _____（重视）customs and traditions above almost everything.‎ ‎7. Just remember – you can’t ___ ___ (发火）at what they tell you. ‎ Ⅱ. Grammar Focus.‎ ‎1. 学生阅读Grammar Focus中的句子，然后做填空练习。‎ ‎1) 你第一次遇到某一个人应该做什么？ ‎ ‎________ ______ you ______ ______ ______ when you meet someone for the ‎ first time? ‎ ‎2) 你应该握手。 ‎ You _______ _______ ________ ________ _________.‎ ‎3）你不应该亲吻。‎ You ________ ________ _______ kiss. ‎ ‎4) --你应该什么时候到？‎ ‎--我应当7点钟到。‎ ‎--When were you ________ _______ _________?‎ ‎--I _______ ________ ______ _______ at 7:00. ‎ ‎5) --我应该穿牛仔裤吗？‎ ‎--不应该穿，希望你穿西服打领带。‎ ‎--__________ I ________ _________ wear jeans?‎ ‎--No, you _______ ________ _______ wear a suit and tie.‎ ‎6) --让别人一直等不礼貌吗？ ‎ ‎--对，让别人一直等不礼貌。‎ ‎--_________ ________ ________ to keep others waiting? ‎ ‎--Yes, it’s _______ _________ _______ others waiting.‎ ‎7) --准时很重要吗？‎ ‎--是的，准时是很重要。‎ ‎--Is _______ ________ ______ _______ on time?‎ ‎-- Yes, it’s important to be on time. ‎ ‎2. 学生们完成填空试题后，可以打开课本检查答案，对错误的句子，单独进行强化记忆。‎ Ⅲ. Grammar ‎1. be supposed to do sth. ‎ 意为“(按规定、习惯、安排等）应该做某事，可用来表示劝告、建议、义务、‎ 责任等，相当于should的用法。 否定形式为“be not supposed to do sth.” 表 示不该或禁止做的情。‎ e.g. If you want to eat ice-cream, you are supposed to ask you mum. ‎ 如果你想吃冰淇淋，应该先问问你妈妈。‎ ‎2. be expected to表达“被期许（预期）会做某事, 希望做某事，表示一种可能性。‎ e.g. She was expected to arrive before dinner. 希望她晚餐前到达。‎ be supposed to do相对于be expected to do主观性更强一些。‎ ‎3. It be + adj. +to do sth.‎ ‎ It be important to do sth. ….做某事很重要。‎ e.g. It is important to learn English well. 学好英语很重要。‎ IV. Consolidation Work on 4a. ‎ ‎1. 让学生读句子，学习新词，了解句意，选择合适的短语填空。‎ ‎2. Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ Work on 4b. ‎ ‎1. 让学生通读短文, 学习新词，理解大意。‎ ‎2. 方法指导： 根据我们所学的短语：be supposed to do sth. / be expected to do sth./ be important (adj.) to do sth. 再结合题目，用适当的形式尝试填空。‎ ‎3. 找部分学生到黑板, 写出自己填写的答案。‎ ‎4. 共同检查, 核对答案。‎ Group work.‎ Work on 4c. ‎ Learn new word: manner Make a list of advice for someone coming to your country as an exchange student for the first time. Work with your group to give advice about:‎ time what to do for someone’s birthday meeting people visiting someone’s home table manners giving gifts ‎ V. Exercises VI. Homework ‎ ‎1. 复习Grammar Focus 中的内容。‎ ‎2. 根据小组对4c讨论的结果，写一篇短文。‎ Section B 1 (1a-2e)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 能掌握以下单词：empty basic, exchange, go out of one’s way, make …feel at home, teenage, granddaughter, behave, except, elbow, gradually, get used to ‎2) 能掌握以下重难点句子：‎ You’re supposed to …‎ You’re not supposed to…‎ It’s impolite to …‎ You shouldn’t …‎ ‎3) 提高学生的听力水平。‎ ‎4）培养学生的阅读能力，理解关键词和短语的能力。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎1）通过对一些国家的风俗习惯和饮食文化。餐桌礼仪的了解，进一步提高学生对文明生活的认识。‎ ‎2）通过学习了解各国的基本礼仪。‎ ‎3）培养学生良好的合作能力和良好的行为习惯。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 掌握本课时出现的生词及用法。‎ ‎2) 进行听力训练，提高综合听说能力。 ‎ ‎3）阅读短文，获得相关信息，提高学生们的综合阅读能力。‎ ‎2. 教学难点 ‎1. 运用所学内容谈论餐桌礼仪。‎ ‎2. 在听的过程中获取有用的信息。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision ‎ ‎1. Daily greeting. ‎ ‎2. Check the homework. ‎ ‎3. 让学生展示“哥伦比亚和瑞士的礼仪”的短文。对于好的给予鼓励。‎ Ⅱ. Lead in ‎ 利用大屏幕展示一些国家吃饭的情景，或一些在餐馆吃饭的图片，边放边介绍， 让学生对中西方就餐文化有所了解， 并引入新课。‎ Ⅲ. Presentation ‎ ‎1. Work on 1a. How much do you know about table manners around the world? Take the following quiz. Circle T for true or F for false after each sentence.‎ Mind your manners!‎ ‎1. In India, you’re supposed to eat with your hands. T F ‎2. In China, you’re not supposed to stick your chopsticks into the food. T F ‎3. In Korea, the youngest person is expected to start eating first. T F ‎4. In France, you’re supposed to put your bread on the table. T F ‎5. In China, it’s impolite to use your chopsticks to hit an empty bowl. T F ‎1）先让学生自己做，老师指导，让他们理解每个句子的意思。 ‎ ‎2）共同讨论，核对答案。‎ ‎2. Listening. Work on 1b. Steve is going to China to study. His friend Yang Ming is telling him about the table manners in China. Listen and number the pictures in the order you hear them.‎ Work on 1c. Listen again. Match the sentence parts.‎ ‎____ 1. You’re not supposed to…‎ ‎____ 2. It’s impolite to…‎ ‎____ 3. You shouldn’t…‎ a. stick your chopsticks into your food.‎ b. point at anyone with your chopsticks.‎ c. start eating first if there are older people at the table.‎ 让学生看1b插图。说一说他们在干什么？然后让学生听第一次录音，把插图的顺序写出来。‎ 再让学生第二次听录音，把1c两部分句子连起来。‎ Ⅳ. Practice ‎ ‎1. 让学生齐读1c 句子。‎ ‎2. 让学生两人一组操练1d. ‎ Talk about other manners in your country. ‎ A: We are supposed to…‎ B: Yes, It’s impolite to…‎ Ⅴ. Consolidation ‎ 根据听力和同学的讨论，说说我们的餐桌礼仪，学生四人一组开展活动，共同讨论， 把每个观点都记录下来。从而达到反复操练目标语言的目的。‎ ‎1. You’re not supposed to start eating first if there are older people at the table.‎ ‎2. You shouldn’t point at anyone with your chopsticks.‎ ‎3. It’s impolite to stick your chopsticks into your food.‎ ‎4. It’s impolite to use your chopsticks to hit an empty bowl.‎ ‎5. You are not supposed to talk when you’re eating dinner. ‎ ‎6. It’s not necessary to order too many dishes. ‎ ‎7. It’s impolite to make a big noise when you are eating soup.‎ ‎8. You’re not supposed to put your clothes into a bowl or plate when picking up your food with chopsticks. ‎ Ⅵ. Group work. ‎ Work on 2a. What do you know about customs in foreign countries? What do you think is the biggest challenge when visiting a foreign country?‎ e.g. My cousin went to America, and she said that learning basic table manners was her biggest challenge. She never knew what she was supposed to do at the dinner table.‎ 提前预习或查阅资料， 了解外国的一些餐桌礼仪，你认为到外国参观时最大的挑战是什么？‎ 让学生分享他们的答案。‎ Ⅶ. Reading Lead-in 播放一个法国人就餐的图片，让学生观察法国人就餐的习惯，然后老师问，他们可以用手拿水果吃吗？设置悬念，引导学生阅读。‎ Fast Reading 1. ‎ Let Ss read the passage fast and check the sentences (T or F)‎ ‎1) Li Yue enjoys her change life in France. ( )‎ ‎2) Li Yue was never nervous before she arrived in France. ( )‎ ‎3) People are supposed to put their bread on their plates. ( )‎ ‎2. Read the passage again and check the answers with the Ss. ‎ Careful reading.‎ ‎1. 2a Read the letter and answer the questions.‎ ‎1) Why is Li Yue in France?‎ ‎2) Does she enjoy staying with her host family? How do you know?‎ ‎3) How does she feel about making mistakes when she speaks French?‎ ‎4) What is the biggest challenge she is facing? ‎ REVIEWING Taking notes or summarizing the main ideas can help you move language from your short-term to long-term memory.‎ ‎2. 阅读技巧点拨：‎ ‎1) 阅读过程中对于不认识的生词或短语，要学会根据上下文或已经学过的知识猜测意思。‎ ‎2) 对于以what、who、which、when、where、how或者why等词引导，就文中某句、某段或某一具体细节进行提问并要求回答，正确理解题干和信息句的意义是关键。速读全文，抓住中心主旨，应尽可能多地捕获信息材料。‎ 细读题材，各个击破。阅读时，要有较强的针对性。对于捕获到的信息，要做认真分析，仔细推敲，理解透彻，只有这样，针对题目要求，才能做到稳、准。‎ Post reading Work on 2c.‎ ‎1. Tell Ss that they have to learn to guess the meanings of the words they don’t know when they read the passage. Make sure Ss know what to do. ‎ ‎2. Ss read the passage again and replace the underline words with the phrases in the box. ‎ ‎1. Making mistakes in French used to make Lin Yue nervous. ‎ ‎2. It was quite hard for her to feel good about speaking French.‎ ‎3. The host family tried very hard to help Lin Yue.‎ ‎4. Lin Yue has slowly learned how to be like her French friends.‎ went out of their way be comfortable doing gradually gotten used to being ‎(something) worry (someone)‎ Work on 2d. Review the passage and make notes about French customs in the chart.‎ Dos Don’ts ‎ You’re expected to put your bread on the table.‎ ‎…‎ You are not supposed to put your bread on your plate.‎ ‎…‎ Don’ts： ‎ You are not supposed to eat anything with your hands except bread.‎ You’re not supposed to say you are full.‎ You are not supposed to put your elbows on the table.‎ Dos: ‎ You’re expected to cut up your fruit and eat it with a fork.‎ You’re expected to say “That was delicious” if you don’t want any more food. ‎ VIII. Language points ‎1. They go out of their way to make me feel at home.‎ ‎ go out of one’s way 特地；格外努力 ‎ e.g. John went out of his way to make his girl friend happy. ‎ ‎ 约翰想方设法使他的女朋友高兴。‎ make sb. feel at home 使某人感到宾至如归 e.g. I’m doing everything I can to make them feel at home.‎ ‎ 我在尽我一切所能使他们感到宾至如归。‎ ‎2. You wouldn’t believe how quickly my French has improved because of that.‎ ‎ You wouldn’t believe …是一个常用句式，相当于汉语所说的“你无法想象……‎ ‎；你想都想不到……；你绝不会相信……”，表示所陈述的事情超出想象之外。与此类似的表达还有You would never believe…或You would hardly believe…。例如：‎ You wouldn’t believe that he found his long-lost sister in Taiwan! ‎ 你绝对想不到他在台湾找到了失散多年的姐姐！‎ You would never believe what quick progress he’s made ever since he attended your class. ‎ 你根本无法想象，自从他听了您的讲课后进步有多大。‎ ‎3. My biggest challenge is learning how to behave at the dinner table.‎ ‎ learning how to behave at the table是现在分词短语，在此用作句子的表语。再如：‎ ‎ His main hobby is fishing. 他的主要爱好是钓鱼。‎ ‎ The most important thing is getting there in time. 最重要的事是及时到达那里。‎ behave ‎【讲解】behave是不及物动词，意为“表现；行为”，behave well / badly表示“表现好/糟糕”。它的名词形式behaviour(举止；行为)，是不可数名词。‎ ‎【运用】请根据汉语意思补全英语句子，每空一词。‎ ‎(1) 如果你那样表现，你会让人厌恶的。‎ ‎ ____ you _______ like that, you’ll get yourself disliked.‎ ‎(2) 如此的行为可能招致麻烦。‎ ‎ ______ ________ may cause trouble.‎ ‎4. … but I’m gradually getting used to it. get used to 习惯于 ‎ e.g. We get used to this way of speaking,.‎ ‎ 我们习惯了这种说话方式。‎ 辨析：‎ ‎① be/get used to sth./doing sth. 习惯于…‎ ‎ e.g. He got used to living in the country. ‎ ‎ 他习惯住在乡下。‎ ‎② used to do sth. 过去常常做某事（现在不做了）‎ ‎ e.g. He used to plant roses.‎ ‎ 他过去常常种植玫瑰。‎ ‎5. Another example is that you’re not supposed to eat anything with your hand except bread, not even fruit.‎ ‎ except作介词，意为“除……之外”，和but意义相似，但语气上要比but更加强烈。‎ ‎1) Everyone is here except him.‎ ‎2) We have classes except Saturday and Sunday.‎ ‎ 通过观察例句1和例句2，我们可知except后可以跟 ______ 和 ______ 。‎ ‎3) I can take a holiday at any time except in September.‎ ‎ 通过观察例句3，可知，except后也可跟__________。‎ ‎4) He never came to visit except to borrow something.‎ ‎5) He will do anything except lent you money.                                                    ‎ ‎ 通过观察例句4，可知except后可接动词不定式。意思是“除了做……”。但在例句5中except后为“lend you money”，所以我们可知若except前含不定代词时，就要______________________。‎ ‎【运用】将下列汉语句子翻译成英语。‎ ‎1. 除了烹调，她别的都会干。‎ ‎ ______________________________‎ ‎2. 我除了要通过考试之外，没有别的心愿。‎ ‎ ____________________________________________‎ IX. Group work Work on 2e.‎ ‎1. Group work. ‎ Compare the table manners in France and China in your group. How are the same or different? Make a list.‎ e.g. In France, people put their bread on the table. But in China, we always put our food on a plate or in a bowl. We never put food on the table. ‎ ‎2. Share their ideas about the table manners in France and China. ‎ X. Homework ‎ 根据2e，写一篇短文关于中国和法国不同的餐桌礼仪。‎ Section B 2 (3a-Self Check)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1）复习be supposed to do sth句型。掌握生词suggestion用法。‎ ‎2）复习并学会用be supposed to, be expected to, be important to, be impolite to等表达各国饮食起居，生活习惯和对时间的看法。‎ ‎3）运用所学礼仪知识，句型，词汇进行写作。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ 学习不同国家的餐桌礼仪，尊重不同的文化，养成良好的习惯。‎ 二、教学重难点 写作的方法和技巧。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision ‎1. Greeting. ‎ ‎2. 让学生展示作文：Table manners in different countries. ‎ Ⅱ. Lead in ‎ ‎1. Ask Ss to discuss the different table manners in different countries in a group. ‎ China France Brazil ‎…‎ meet for the first time being on time visiting friends table manners ‎ ‎…‎ ‎2. Ss say something about Chinese customs and Chinese table manners and discuss: ‎ How do a person behave properly in China? ‎ ‎1) What are table manners in France, Korea and other countries?‎ ‎2) Discuss Chinese customs and table manners.‎ ‎3) How do a person behave properly in China? ‎ III. Presentation Work on 3a.‎ ‎1. Your pen pal is coming to China on an exchange program. He/She is asking you about Chinese customs and what he/she is supposed to do or not. Make notes in the chart.‎ Table manners ‎ It’s polite/impolite to…‎ House rules You’re supposed/not supposed to…‎ Going out with people ‎ You should…‎ ‎2. Fill in the chart and say the Chinese customs in English. ‎ Chinese customs Table manners • It’s polite to ask older people to start eating first at the table. ‎ • It’s not polite to pick up your bowl to eat.‎ • You’re supposed to use chopsticks to eat.‎ • It’s not polite to stick your chopsticks into your food.‎ • It’s impolite to point at anyone with your chopsticks.‎ • It’s impolite to knock your empty bowl with your chopsticks.‎ • ‎…‎ House rules ‎◆ You’re supposed to greet the host family.‎ ‎◆ You’re supposed to shake hands with people. ‎ ‎◆ You’re supposed to say “nihao” to people. ‎ ‎◆ You’re not supposed to bow, kiss or hug with people.‎ ‎◆ …‎ Going out with people • You should call first.‎ • You should make a going-out plan with friends.‎ • ‎…‎ Ⅳ. Writing ‎ Work on 3b. ‎ ‎1. Write a letter to your pen pal to give him/her advice and suggestions on how to behave properly in China.‎ ‎2. 写作技巧点拨：‎ ‎1) 英语书信的写法：‎ 称呼Dear…， 左起顶格写。‎ 正文换行，也要顶格写，是信的核心部分。因此要求正文层次分明、简单易懂。‎ 祝福的话语， 正文下换行，顶格写， 如: Best wishes! Take care! Happy New Year! Happy Birthday! 等。‎ 结束语在正文下面的一、二行处，第一个词开头要大写，句末用逗号。结束语的写法 Yours, Your loving…, Sincerely yours、Yours sincerely或Sincerely；在结尾语下面的署名必须亲自签名，也不加任何的标点符号。‎ ‎2) Useful expressions: ‎ 有关文化礼仪的写作常用句型 You’re (not) supposed to….‎ You are expected to…‎ It’s polite/impolite to…‎ It’s important to…‎ You should…. ‎ ‎3. Give Ss an example: ‎ Dear Tony,‎ You must be excited about coming to China soon. Let me give you some suggestions and advice about Chinese customs. When you are eating at the table, it’s impolite to stick your chopsticks into your food. You are not supposed to point at anyone with your chopsticks. In our house, you’re supposed to shake hands with my father for the first time. You are not supposed to kiss when you meet my mother. You can say hello to her with a big smile. When you go out with people, you are expected to call first, it’s important to make plans to do something interesting or go somewhere together. ‎ Have a safe trip and I look forward to meeting you soon.‎ Best wishes!‎ Lin Jie V. Self Check ‎ Work on Self Check 1: ‎ ‎1. Let some Ss read the words in the box. Make sure all the Ss know the meaning of the words. ‎ ‎2. Let Ss read the sentences in Self Check 1. Then Ss try to fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the words in the box. ‎ worth capital basic traffic empty mad knocking ‎1) In many countries, it is impolite to show up at someone’s house for the first time with ______ hands. You should always bring a small gift.‎ ‎2) Billy was very uncomfortable at a fine-dining restaurant last night because he didn’t know ______ table manners.‎ ‎3) It is _______ spending the time to learn about the customs of a country before you go there. That way, you will know what you are supposed to do in different situations.‎ ‎4) The ______ is always the worst in the ________ city. It is important to leave earlier if you are traveling by car.‎ ‎5) Sandy went into her sister’s room without _________ on the door. That made her sister ______.‎ ‎3. Let some Ss read their answers. Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ Keys: empty, basic, worth, traffic, capital, knocking, mad Work on Self Check 2 ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss that they have to complete the statements below. They should write sentences about the customs with “ be (not) supposed to, be expected to, be polite/impolite to”. ‎ ‎2. Ss think and try to complete the statements by themselves. ‎ In my culture, when you…, ‎ you’re supposed to ____________‎ you’re not supposed to _________‎ you’re expected to _____________‎ it’s impolite to ________________‎ it’s important to ______________‎ ‎3. Let some Ss read their sentences to the class. ‎ ‎4. Correct the mistakes they have. ‎ VI. Exercise: ‎ If time is enough, do some more exercises on the big screen. ‎ 用所给单词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1. You are _________ (suppose) to　shake hands when you meet a Chinese friend.‎ ‎2. A knife is _________ (use) for _______(cut) things.‎ ‎3. We Chinese eat with chopsticks, while the westerners eat with ___________(knife) and forks. ‎ ‎4. On weekends I feel completely __________(relax). ‎ ‎5. It’s _________(polite) to make a big noise in the school library. ‎ Keys: 1. supposed 2. used, cutting 3. knives 4. relaxed 5. impolite ‎ VII. Homework ‎ ‎1. Write a letter to your friend.‎ ‎2. 编写一份手抄报。‎ ‎ 把收集到的各国见面礼仪，餐桌礼仪，风俗习惯等信息制成一份手抄报。‎ Unit 11 Sad movies make me cry.‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ 单词：friendship 友谊, king 君主, pale 苍白的, queen 王后, examine 检查, nor 也不, palace 王宫, power 权力, wealth 财富, grey 阴沉的, lemon 柠檬, fame 名声, Prime 首相的 句型：The loud music makes me nervous.‎ ‎ Soft and quiet music makes me relaxed.‎ ‎ Money and fame don’t always make people happy.‎ ‎ She said that the sad movie made her feel like crying.‎ 能够用英语描述事情对自己感情的影响，复习被动语态。‎ ‎2.情感态度价值观目标：‎ 了解一些表达感情的词，能正确的表达自己的感情，并培养学生正确处理事情，特别是不好的事情对自己的正面影响。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 掌握本课时中出现的生词 ‎2) 能够用英语描述自己的情感。‎ ‎3）正确理解make 的用法。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ 掌握make的用法 Section A 1 (1a-2d)‎ I. Leading in: Kinds of movies Review the kinds of movies and answer the question “How do you feel about the movie?”‎ II. Learning ‎1. 1a. Look at the two restaurants below. Which would you like to go to? Why?‎ ‎2. 1b.Listen and fill in the blanks. Then match the restaurants with the statements.‎ ‎3. 1c.Role-play a conversation between Amy and Tina.‎ Tina: I’d rather go to Blue Ocean because I like to listen to quiet music while I’m eating. ‎ Amy: But that music makes me sleepy. I want to have the hamburgers at Rockin’ Restaurant.‎ Tina: Let’s go to the Rockin’ Restaurant. I love their hamburgers.‎ Amy: Those awful pictures on the walls make me uncomfortable, and the loud music makes me nervous.‎ Tina: So where do you want to go, Amy?‎ Amy: Let’s go to Blue Ocean. The soft music makes me relaxed.‎ ‎4. 2a. Listen and number the picture (1-4) in the order you hear them.‎ ‎5. Listen again. Complete the statements.‎ ‎1. Waiting for Amy drove Tina__________ (crazy).‎ ‎2. Amy said loud music made her__________ (nervous).‎ ‎3. Loud music makes John_____________. (want to dance)‎ ‎4. T e movie was so sad that it made Tina______. (cry)‎ ‎5. Sad movies don’t make John cry. They just make him______________ (want to leave).‎ ‎6. Role-play the conversation.‎ ‎7. 2d Pole-play the conversation.‎ Nancy: Hey Bert, I think I’ve made Alice mad and I’m not sure what to do about it.‎ Bert: What happened?‎ Nancy: You know Julie is Alice’s best friend, right?‎ Bert: Uh-huh.‎ Nancy: Well, the more I got to know Julie, the more I’ve realized that we have a lot in common. So we’ve been spending more time together lately.‎ Bert: But what’s wrong with that?‎ Nancy: Umm ... it makes Alice unhappy because she thinks Julie is now bet her friends with me than with her.‎ Bert: I see. Mmm ... why don’t you ask Alice to join you each time you do something with Julie? Then she won’t feel left out.‎ Nancy: Oh, good idea! That can make our friendship stronger.‎ III. Language points.‎ ‎1. I’d rather go to the Blue Ocean Restaurant because I like to listen to ‎ ‎ quiet music while I’m eating.　 ‎ ‎ would rather do sth.，意为“宁可，宁愿 还是……好些”。‎ ‎ e.g. I’d rather play tennis than swim. 比起游泳我宁愿去打台球。‎ ‎2. Yes, she was, and waiting for her drove me crazy.‎ ‎ drive v. 迫使 drive sb.+adj.，使某人怎样drive sb. crazy/mad 使某人发疯/发狂 ‎ e.g. That thing almost drive me crazy. 那件事几乎要使我发狂了。‎ ‎ You’ll drive mum mad one of these days. 你这样总有一天会把妈妈急疯了的。 ‎ ‎3. What happened? ‎ happen 发生，不及物动词，‎ ‎ 常见的用法有 ‎ (1) “sth.+happen+地点/时间”，“某地/某时发生了某事”‎ ‎ e.g. What’s happening outside? 外面发生什么事了?‎ ‎(2) “sth.+happen to+sb.” 意为“某人出了某事(常指不好的事发生在某人身 ‎ 上)”。‎ e.g. A car accident happened to him yesterday. 昨天他发生了交通事故。‎ ‎(3) “sb.+happen+to do sth.” 意为“某人碰巧做某事”‎ e.g. I happened to meet her in the street.‎ ‎ 我碰巧在街上遇见她。‎ ‎4. The more I got to know Julie, the more I’ve realized that we have a lot in ‎ ‎ common. ‎ ‎ the+比较级+从句 ，the +比较级+从句 “越……, 越……”‎ ‎ e.g. The harder you work, the greater progress you will make.‎ ‎ 你越用功，进步就越大。‎ ‎5. Why don’t you ask Alice to join you each time you do something with Julie?‎ ‎ Why don’t +sb.+do sth.?‎ ‎ =Why not + do sth.? 为何不……？用来提出建议或劝告。‎ ‎ e.g. Why don’t you go with us? ‎ ‎ Why not go with us? 你为什么不和我们一起去呢？‎ ‎6. Then she won’t feel left out.‎ ‎ to be/feel left out 表示“被遗忘；被忽略；被冷落”之类的意思。‎ ‎ e.g. No one speaks to him, he always feels left out. ‎ ‎ 没人跟他讲话，他总是觉得被人冷落。‎ IV. Homework ‎1. Recite the conversation in 2d.‎ ‎2. 翻译下列句子 ‎1）一直等她让我很生气。‎ ‎2）愿待在家里也不愿去公园。‎ ‎3）为什么不去看电影呢？‎ ‎4）汶川在2008年发生了一场大地震。‎ ‎5）我们在一起越多，我们就越开心。‎ Section A 2 (3a-3c)‎ I. Review ‎1) 一直等她让我很生气。‎ ‎2) 我宁愿待在家里也不愿去公园。‎ ‎3) 为什么不去看电影呢？‎ ‎4) 汶川在2008年发生了一场大地震。‎ ‎5) 我们在一起越多，我们就越开心。‎ Keys: Waiting for her drove me angry.‎ I’d rather stay at home than go to the park.‎ Why don’t you/not go to the movies?‎ A big earthquake happened in Wenchuan in 2008.‎ The more we get together, the happier we are. ‎ II. Free talk What can make you happy?‎ III. Reading ‎1. 3a Read the story and answer the questions.‎ ‎1) Can medicine help the ill king? Why or why not?‎ ‎2) Why does power not make the prime minister happy?‎ ‎3) Why does money not make the banker happy?‎ ‎4) Why does fame not make the singer happy?‎ Keys: No. The doctor says there is nothing was wrong with his body.‎ He’s always worried about losing his power. Many people are trying to take his ‎ position.‎ He’s always worried about losing his money. Someone tries to steal his money every day.” ‎ He’s always worried about being followed by others, so he cannot be free!‎ ‎2. 3b Find words or phrases from the story with meanings similar to these ‎ phrases.‎ ‎1) did not want to eat _________________‎ ‎2) was asked to come and help ________________‎ ‎3) look carefully at __________________‎ ‎4) becoming less important ___________________‎ ‎5) get my job __________________‎ Keys: didn’t feel like eating be called in examine losing … power take my position ‎3. 3c Role-play the story with your group.‎ ‎ King: I’m unhappy. I sleep badly and don’t feel like eating.‎ Doctor: It’s all in his mind. Neither medicine nor rest can help him. What he needs is the shirt of a happy person to wear. That’ll make him happy.‎ Prime Minister: Although I have a lot of power, it doesn’t make me happy. I’m always worried about losing my power. Many people are trying to take my position.‎ Banker: Oh, I’m afraid I’m not happy either, I have a lot of wealth, but I’m always worried about losing my money. Someone tries to steal my money every ‎ day.‎ Singer: It’s true that I’m famous and everyone loves my songs. But I’m not happy because I’m always worried about being followed by others. I cannot be free!‎ IV. Language points.‎ ‎1. He slept badly and didn’t feel like eating. 他的睡眠很糟糕，他也不想吃东西。‎ ‎ feel like doing 想做某事 ‎ e.g. I feel like having a drink. 我想喝点酒。‎ ‎2. His face was always pale as chalk. 他总是面色苍白。‎ ‎ (as) pale as chalk是一种明喻修辞结构，虽然英语把苍白比作chalk(白垩，一种白色石灰岩)，但汉语不可真译，相当于我们说的“惨白；苍白”。‎ ‎ e.g. You look as pale as chalk today. What’s wrong?‎ ‎ 今天你看着面色苍白，哪里不舒服？‎ 另外值得注意的是，汉语描述不健康的人的面部颜色时常用“白”字，如“煞白；苍白；灰白”等等，英语常用pale来表达。‎ e.g. He suddenly went pale. 他突然面色苍白。‎ ‎3. One day, a doctor was called in to examine the king.‎ ‎ 一天，医生被传唤去给国王检查身体。‎ ‎ call in 召来，叫来 ‎ e.g. He only waited two minutes before he was called in. ‎ ‎ 他只等了两分钟就被叫了进去。 ‎ ‎ Call in the doctor at once. ‎ ‎ 马上去请医生来。‎ call短语归纳 call back 唤回，叫回； 回电话，再打电话 call up (给……)打电话； 想起，回忆起 call away 叫走，叫开 ‎ ‎4. Neither medicine nor rest can help him. 药物和休息对他都无帮助。‎ ‎ neither 表示“两者都不”；‎ ‎ 常用词组：neither…nor 既不……也不，谓语动词跟最近的主语一致 ‎ e.g. Neither he nor I am from Beijing. 他和我都不在北京。‎ both, either & neither ‎★neither表示“两者都不”， 作主语时，谓语动词常用单数形式。‎ ‎ e.g. Neither of his parents is a doctor. 他的父母都不是医生。‎ ‎★both表示“两者都”，作主语时，谓语动词用复数形式。‎ ‎ e.g. Both of his parents are doctors. 他的父母都是医生。‎ ‎★either表示“两者中的任何一个”，作主语时，谓语动词常用单数形式。‎ ‎ e.g. Either of his parents is a doctor. 他的父母中有一个是医生。‎ ‎【链接】‎ both ... and ... 连接主语时，谓语动词用复数形式；either ... or ... 与neither ... nor ... 连接主语时，谓语动词常与离它最近的主语在人称和数上保持一致。‎ e.g. Both my sister and my mother are teachers.‎ ‎ Either Tom or I have to clean the room.‎ ‎ Neither the twins nor John knows how to spell the word.‎ 将下列句子翻译成英语。‎ ‎1) 那两个双胞胎女孩都有礼貌。‎ ‎2) 她的两个哥哥都不喜欢垃圾食品。‎ ‎3) 他或者我准备去参加会议。‎ Keys: Both of the twin girls are polite.‎ Neither of her brothers likes junk food. ‎ Either he or I am going to the meeting.‎ ‎5. I’m always worried about losing my power. Many people are trying to take my position. 我总在担心失去我的权力。 很多人都想要取代我的位置。‎ ‎ 1) be worried about =worry about 担心 ‎ e.g. We are all worried about my grandpa’s health.‎ ‎ 我们总是担心我爷爷的健康。‎ ‎2) take one’s position 取代某人的位置 ‎ 同义词组：take one’s place ‎ e.g. He takes my position/place. 他取代了我的位置。‎ ‎6. It’s true that I’m famous and everyone loves my songs.‎ ‎ 我很有名气，每个人都喜欢我的歌曲，这是事实。‎ ‎ It’s+ adj. +that 从句 某事/做某事是怎样的 e.g. It is important that we all should attend the meeting. ‎ 重要的是我们每个人都应该参加这个会议。‎ ‎7. I’m always worried about being followed by others. 我总是担心被人跟随。‎ ‎ be followed by 被跟随 ‎ e.g. Lightning was quickly followed by heavy thunder. 闪电过后，很快就是雷声滚滚（打雷跟在闪电之后）‎ ‎8. …find a happy man in three day’s time.‎ ‎ in three days’ time 3天的时间 ‎ in+时间段 在一段时间内，用于将来时 ‎ e.g. I will be back in three days. 我三天之内回来。‎ V. Homework ‎1. 我今天不想打篮球。‎ ‎2. 她的爸爸和妈妈都不喜欢看足球。‎ ‎3. 父母总是很担心我们的学习。‎ ‎4. 学生们应该学好英语，这很重要。‎ ‎5. 一个星期后他会去北京。‎ Section A 3 (Grammar Focus-4b)‎ I. Review ‎1. 我今天不想打篮球。‎ ‎2. 她的爸爸和妈妈都不喜欢看足球。‎ ‎3. 父母总是很担心我们的学习。‎ ‎4. 学生们应该学好英语，这很重要。‎ ‎5. 一个星期后他会去北京。‎ Keys: I don’t feel like playing basketball today.‎ Neither her father nor her mother likes watching football game.‎ Parents are always worried about our study.‎ It’s important that students should learn English well.‎ He will go to Beijing in a week.‎ II. Grammar Focus The loud music makes me nervous.‎ Soft and quiet music makes me relaxed.‎ Money and fame don’t always make people happy.‎ She said that the sad movie made her cry.‎ make的使役用法：‎ make作使役动词，意为“使；迫使”，其 常用结构如下：‎ ‎◆ make + sb. + adj. 意为“使得某人……”。如：‎ ‎ The news made him happy. ‎ ‎ 这个消息让他很开心。‎ 可用到的形容词有：‎ happy，pleased，surprised，angry，‎ annoyed，sad，upset，unhappy，worried，anxious，excited，relaxed，stressed out，tense，calm，scared，comfortable，sick …‎ ‎◆ make + sb. + do sth.意为“使得某人做某事”。(不能带不定式符号to) 。如：‎ ‎ Nothing will make me change my mind. ‎ ‎ 什么也改变不了我的想法。‎ 注意：make sb. do sth.的被动结构是sb. be made to do sth.，意为“某人被迫做某事”。当make 用于被动语态时，必须带不定式符号to。如：‎ He was made to lie in bed all day.‎ 他被迫每天躺在床上。‎ ‎【运用】‎ 用make将下列句子翻译成英语。‎ ‎1. 妈妈让她每天弹钢琴一小时。‎ ‎ ______________________________‎ ‎2. 这个故事让王飞很伤心。‎ ‎ ______________________________‎ ‎3. 我们被迫在宾馆待了三天。‎ ‎______________________________‎ Keys: Mom makes her play the piano for an hour a day.‎ This story makes / made Wang Fei sad.‎ We were made to stay in the hotel for three days.‎ III. Practice. ‎ Make sentences with “make...”.‎ ‎ The snow makes the world white.‎ ‎ The war makes the boys frightened.‎ ‎ The two dogs make us feel funny.‎ IV. Work on 4a. ‎ ‎1. Think of appropriate words for the blanks. Then compare your choices you’re your partner.‎ ‎ Dear Diary, June 29th I thought today was going to be really bad. To start with, it was cloudy and grey, and cloudy days make me ______________. And this was the day we would get our exam results back, but I didn’t answer the exam questions very well last week. That made me ____________. ‎ I walked to school with my best friend Holly. She didn’t say much to me. That made me a little _________. In class, the teacher handed back our exams. That made me __________. But I found out that I didn’t do too badly. That made me very _________. Then things got even better. Holly bought me my favorite lemon juice and turkey sandwich for lunch, and we talked a lot. That made me _______________. ‎ Keys: feel sad anxious upset nervous glad happy ‎2. How do these things make you feel? Write about your feelings.‎ When I read about endangered animals, it makes me feel worried about the future.‎ V. Work on 4b. ‎ Complete the survey. Then ask two other students.‎ What makes you ...?‎ You ‎ Student 1‎ Student2‎ happy ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ want to cry ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ uncomfortable ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ angry ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ nervous ‎ ‎ feel like dancing ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ A: What makes you angry?‎ B: When people throw rubbish on the streets, it makes me angry.‎ C: Me, too. It makes me want to tell them to clean up the streets.‎ VI. Homework 完成句子 ‎1. 他父亲为了赚钱，从早忙到晚。‎ His father is busy all day in order to ________.‎ ‎2. 看足球赛使我疯狂。‎ ‎_____________________________________‎ ‎3. 轻柔的音乐使约翰昏昏欲睡。‎ The soft music ______ John ___________.‎ ‎4. 红色使人们吃得更快些。‎ The color red ________ people _________ faster.‎ ‎5. 长时间等她使我生气了。‎ Waiting a long time for her _________________.‎ Section B 1 (1a-2e)‎ I. Revision Complete the following sentences.‎ ‎1. 他父亲为了赚钱，从早忙到晚。‎ His father is busy all day in order to ________. (make money)‎ ‎2. 看足球赛使我疯狂。‎ ‎______________________________ (Watching football game makes me crazy.)‎ ‎3. 轻柔的音乐使约翰昏昏欲睡。‎ The soft music ______ John ___________. (makes, sleepy)‎ ‎4. 红色使人们吃得更快些。‎ The color red ________ people _________ faster. (makes, eat)‎ ‎5. 长时间等她使我生气了。‎ Waiting a long time for her _______________. (makes me angry)‎ II. Free talk ‎ What’s the ending of the story about the unhappy king.‎ III. Guess ‎1. Work on 1a. Look at the possible endings to the story about the unhappy king. Do you think any of these is the right one? If so, which one?‎ a. The general cannot find a happy person and the king remains unhappy forever.‎ b. The general finds a happy person with power, money and fame.‎ c. The general realizes he is a happy person and gives his shirt to the king to wear.‎ d. The king suddenly becomes happy without the shirt of a happy person.‎ ‎2. What are some other possible endings to the story? Discuss your ideas with your partner.‎ Tom: The general found a poor man. The man was very happy.‎ Lily: The poor man gave his shirt to the general.‎ Ⅳ. Listening ‎1. Work on 1c. Listen to The Shirt of a Happy Man(Part II) and check (✔) the things that happened in the rest of the story.‎ ‎ The general searched for three days and found a happy person.‎ ‎ The general could not find a happy person.‎ ‎✔ The general saw a poor man on the street.‎ ‎✔ The poor man was a happy man.‎ ‎ The poor man gave the general his shirt.‎ ‎2. Work on 1d. Listen again. Answer the questions.‎ ‎1) How long did it take the general to find the happy man?‎ ‎2) What was the poor man doing on the street?‎ ‎3) What made the poor man so happy even though he had no power, money or fame?‎ ‎4) Do you think the general will return to the king with the poor man’s shirt? Why or why not?‎ ‎3. Role-play ‎ Do you agree with the poor man’s thoughts about happiness? Discuss your ideas with your group. Then role-play the rest of the story.‎ V. Reading ‎1. Free talk. ‎ Work on 2a. Have you ever made a mistake? How did it make you feel? Talk to your partner about what happened.‎ In the English exam last week, I was too nervous that I made a spelling mistake. It made me feel very angry about myself.‎ ‎2. Presentation. ‎ Learn some new words.‎ ‎3. Work on 2b. Skim the story and number the events in the correct order.‎ ‎_______ Peter got home and went to his room.‎ ‎_______ Peter talked to his teammates.‎ ‎_______ Peter missed a goal.‎ ‎_______ Peter’s father gave him advice.‎ ‎_______ Peter realized that he had been worried for no reason.‎ ‎4. Work on 2c. Read the story again and answer the questions.‎ ‎1) Why did Peter feel angry and worried?‎ ‎2) What kind of advice did Peter’s father offer to his son?‎ ‎3) Do you agree with Peter’s father? Why or why not? ‎ ‎4) What happened after Peter told his teammates that he was sorry?‎ ‎5) Why did Peter think that he was on a winning team even though they lost the last game?‎ VI. Language points ‎1. The general finds a happy person with power, money and fame. ‎ with 表示伴随，“带着……, 与…… 一起， 随着，有” ； 反义词： without 意思是“没有”。两个词的后面均可接名词或动名词。‎ e.g. He left without saying a word. 他一句话都没有说就走了。‎ ‎2. How could he have missed scoring that goal?‎ ‎ could have done 表示“过去本能够做某事但未做”，含责备意义。‎ ‎ e.g. How could he have been such a fool? 他怎么这么糊涂？‎ ‎ How could she have forgotten what kind of man he was?‎ ‎ 她怎么能忘记他是哪种人呢？‎ ‎3. He was really worried that his coach might kick him off the team.‎ ‎ kick v. 踢；踹 ‎ kick sb. off 开除某人 ‎ e.g. Tim made a huge mistake, and the manager kicked him off the company.‎ ‎ 蒂姆犯了一个很大的错误，经理把他开除出了公司。‎ ‎4. Ten minutes later, Peter heard his father knocking on his bedroom door. ‎ ‎ knocking 在这里做hear 的宾补。‎ 相同用法的词还有：‎ ‎ see/ watch/ find/ hear/ notice sb. doing sth.‎ ‎ e.g. When Lisa was alone at home, she heard something making noise outside.‎ ‎ 当丽莎独自在家时，她听到外面有响声。‎ ‎5. But whatever it was, don’t be too hard on yourself. ‎ ‎ be hard on sb. 过于严格地要求某人; 对某人过于严厉; 以刻薄的方式批评、对待某人 ‎ e.g. Today some teachers are too hard on their students.‎ ‎ 如今一些老师对学生要求过于严厉。‎ ‎ Perhaps I’m too hard on my daughter.‎ ‎ 或许我对我女儿要求过头了。‎ ‎6. Besides, wining or losing is only half the game. ‎ ‎ besides “除……以外还有”，表示包括后面提到的人或物在内。‎ ‎ except “除去”， 表示不包括后面所提到的人或物在内。‎ ‎ e.g. All the students went to the park except Jim. (Jim没去)‎ ‎ Lucy went to the cinema besides Lily. (Lily 也去了)‎ ‎7. The next day, Peter went to soccer practice with courage rather than fear in his heart.‎ ‎ courage n. 勇气；勇敢 ‎ rather than 并非；而不是 ‎ e.g. I, rather than you, should do the work. 该做这工作的是我而不是你。‎ ‎ The most valuable thing is time, rather than money.‎ ‎ 最珍贵的是时间，而不是金钱。‎ ‎8. But I think if we continue to pull together, we’re going to win the next one. ‎ ‎ pull together 齐心协力；通力合作 ‎ e.g. If all of us pull together, there must be something we can do to improve the environment.‎ ‎ 如果我们都能齐心协力，我们一定能做点什么来改善环境。‎ VII. Practice Work on 2d. Find idioms or phrases from the story to replace the underlined parts of these sentences.‎ ‎1. He could not believe that he did not get the ball into the basket.‎ ‎2. She was worried because she had disappointed her parents.‎ ‎3. Tony was sad that he was asked to leave the team.‎ ‎4. You should learn to relax and not put so much pressure on yourself.‎ ‎5. The teacher told the students to work hard together and not give up.‎ VIII. Role-play a conversation between Peter and his father.‎ ‎ Father: What’s wrong, Peter? You look sad.‎ Peter: I missed scoring a goal. I made my team lose the game.‎ ‎…‎ IX. Homework Translate the following phrases.‎ ‎1. 使……失望 2. 开除 ‎3. 而不是 4. 齐心协力 ‎5. 在肩上 6. 停止做某事 ‎7. 敲门 8. 和……交流 ‎9. 向……学习 10. 继续做某事 Section B 2 (3a-Self Check)‎ I. Revision 翻译下列短语 ‎1.使……失望 let...down 2. 开除 kick sb. off ‎3. 而不是 rather than 4. 齐心协力 pull together ‎5. 在肩上 on one’s shoulder 6. 停止做某事 stop doing ‎7. 敲门 knock on the door 8. 与…… 交流 communicate with ‎9. 向……学习 learn from 10. 继续做某事 continue to do II. Free talk ‎ ‎3a Think of some experiences that made you feel very happy or sad. Tell your partner about them. Use the following ideas to help you.‎ ‎● winning/losing a competition ‎● getting good/bad grades on an exam ‎● performing something well/badly in front of a big group of people ‎● getting into a fight with your best friend ‎● your first trip outside your hometown III. Writing ‎ ‎3b Write a story similar to the one in 2b using your notes in 3a. In your story, explain the following:‎ What happened?‎ When did it happen?‎ Where did it happen?‎ How did it make you feel? Why?‎ What did you learn from the experience?‎ 写作指导：本文根据要求是一篇记叙文。它主要是说明事件的时间、背景、起因、过程及结果，即我们通常所说的五个“ W ”（what, who, when, where, why ）和一个“ H ”（how ）。人称应是第一人称，时态应是过去时。‎ IV. Self Check ‎1. Put the words in the appropriate place in the chart.‎ nervous unhappy uncomfortable worried comfortable relaxed angry awful happy uneasy Positive: comfortable, relaxed, happy Negative: nervous, unhappy, uncomfortable, worried, angry, awful, uneasy ‎2. Write sentences using the words given.‎ e.g. 1. sad movies/cry Sad movies make me cry.‎ ‎2. speaking in front of many people/nervous Speaking in front of many people makes me nervous.‎ ‎3. money and fame/ not always happy Money and fame doesn’t always make you happy ‎4. soft piano music/relaxed ‎ Soft piano music makes me relaxed.‎ ‎5. rainy days/stay at home and watch TV Rainy days makes me stay at home and watch TV.‎ ‎3. Number the things [1–6] (1 = least important, 6 = most important). Write six sentences about your choices.‎ ‎ ________ fame ________ power ________ friendship ‎ ________ wealth ________ health ________ family e.g. Fame is not very important. It can make me nervous if too many people follow me around.‎ ‎ Power is not important to me. I don’t like to control others.‎ ‎ Wealth is not very important. I prefer to live a simple life.‎ Health is important. A healthy body makes it possible for me to do many things in life.‎ ‎ Friendship is very important. Spending time with friends makes me happy.‎ ‎ Family is the most important to me. My family around me makes me feel comfortable and contented.‎ V. Exercise ‎ ‎1. The rainy day _______ me sad and angry. ‎ ‎ A. make B. makes C. making D. to make ‎2. The movie made _______ feel energetic. ‎ ‎ A. he B. his C. they D. them ‎3. Loud music always makes us ______. ‎ ‎ A. want dance B. to want dance C. want to dance D. to want to dance ‎4. Excuse me, could you help me? I don’t know ______ exchange money. ‎ ‎ A. how to B. how C. how can D. how can I ‎ ‎5. ______ his new sunglasses _______ Tony look mysterious. ‎ ‎ A. Wears…make B. Wears …makes C. Wearing…make D. Wearing…makes ‎6. As students, we are supposed to spend more time ______. ‎ ‎ A. study B. studied C. studying D. to study ‎7. Loud music may make people ____ fast.‎ ‎ A. to eat B. eat C. eated D. eats ‎8. I want ____ whether he’s all right.‎ ‎ A. to know B. know C. knowing D. Knows ‎9. The children were made ____ homework first.‎ ‎ A. do B. to do C. did D. doing ‎ 10. Don’t worry about her, Madam. Your daughter is ____ danger now.‎ ‎ A. in B. out C. out of D. at ‎11. Loud music makes me ____. So I feel very happy.‎ ‎ A. energetic B. stressed out C. energy D. stress out ‎12. I can’t wait ____ the present box.‎ A. open B. to open C. opening D. opened Answers: 1-5:B D C A D 6-10:C B A B C 11-12: A B VI .Homework ‎1. Finish your composition.‎ ‎ 2. Review the whole unit.‎ Unit 12 Life is full of the unexpected.‎ Section A 1 (1a-2d)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 能掌握以下单词及短语：unexpected, by the time, backpack, oversleep, ring, give …a lift, ‎ ‎2）掌握By the time I got outside, the bus had already left. ‎ ‎ When I got to school, I realized I had left my backpack at home.‎ ‎3) 掌握过去完成时时态，结构及用法。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ 能学会合理安排自己的学习和生活，做到守时守信。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：过去完成时的用法。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：用过去完成时叙述过去的事件。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warm-up ‎ Greeting. ‎ Ⅱ. Lead-in ‎ Do you remember any unexpected situation in your daily life?‎ 展示几张尴尬的人的图片。‎ Ask: What do you think of the people in these pictures? ‎ Ss: They look scared/bad.‎ T: What happened to the boy?‎ Ss: He broke his arm. He is getting an electric shock.‎ T: I was late for work today. When I got up, I found my clock had rung. It was 7:30. ‎ By the time I went to the bathroom, my son had been in. So I had to wait. When I went out, I found my motorbike had broken down. (‎ 老师讲述自己迟到的经历，激起学生对一下内容的学习)。‎ Now look at the picture, let’s learn something about Tina’s bad day。 ‎ Ⅲ. Presentation ‎ ‎1. Work on 1a. Ask Ss to look at the pictures in 1a and ask: What happened to the girl? ‎ ‎2. Think and discuss in group: What happened to the girl? ‎ Possible answers: She got up late. By the time she got up, someone had already gotten in the bathroom. She rushed out the door. The bus had left before she got to the station. When she got to school, she realized she had left her backpack at home. …. ‎ ‎3. Ask Ss to tell a story about the girl. ‎ Ⅳ. Listening ‎ Work on 1b. ‎ ‎1. Listen to the tape of 1b. Complete the sentences. ‎ ‎1. By the time I got up, my brother _____ already _______ in the shower.‎ ‎2. By the time I got outside, the bus _____ already ______.‎ ‎3. When I got to school, I realized I _____ ______ my backpack at home.‎ ‎2. 过去完成时用法： ‎ ‎(1) 构成：由“助动词had (用于各种人称和数) + 过去分词”构成 ‎ 否定式：had not + 过去分词 ‎ ‎ 缩写形式：hadn’t ‎ ‎(2) 用法：过去完成时表示在过去某一时间或动作之前已经发生或完成了的动作。‎ ‎(3) 它所表示动作发生的时间是“过去的过去”。‎ ‎① 表示过去某一时间可用by, before 等构成的短语来表示。‎ ‎② 也可以用when, before 等引导的时间状语从句来表示。 ‎ ‎③ 还可以通过状语从句或通过上下文暗示。‎ 例如：‎ When I got there, you had already eaten your meal. ‎ 当我到达那里时，你已经开始吃了。‎ By the time he got here, the bus had left. ‎ 在他到达那里之前，汽车已经离开了。‎ V. Pair work Work on 1c. Take turns being Mary. Look at the pictures and talk about what happened this morning. ‎ A: What happened? ‎ B: I overslept. By the time I got up, my brother had already gotten in the shower. ‎ ‎…‎ VI. Listening ‎ 1. Listen to the tape for the first time and finish 2a. ‎ ‎ Listen to Mary continue her story. Number the pictures [1-4] in the correct order.‎ ‎ ‎ 2. Listen to the tape for the second time and finish 2b. ‎ ‎ Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the verbs in brackets. Then listen again and check your answers.‎ ‎1. When I _______ (get) home, I realized I ________ (leave) my keys in the backpack.‎ ‎2. By the time I _____ (get) back to school, the bell _________ (ring).‎ ‎3. By the time I _______ (walk) into class, the teacher __________ (start) teaching already.‎ ‎3. Retell the story.‎ 通过听力训练，进一步熟悉练习过去完成时的构成和用法。‎ VII. Practice ‎1. Finish 2c. Make up an ending for the story and share it with your partner. ‎ The teacher looked at Mary and asked her if she had finished the homework. Mary told her the unexpected things she met with this morning but they sound like excuses to the teacher. Therefore, Mary was asked to finish the homework in the class. What an unforgettable day it is for Mary!‎ ‎2. Ask several students to tell their stories in class. ‎ VIII. Role-play.‎ ‎1. Ask Ss to role-play the conversation in 2d.‎ ‎2. Answer the questions: ‎ ‎1) Why was Kevin late for class? ‎ ‎ 2) How did Kevin get to school? ‎ IX. Consolidation Finish a task: 想想自己是否有倒霉的经历，向全班同学讲述自己的事情的经过。‎ I had a bad day last weekend…..‎ 通过完成一个任务， 让学生运用所学内容，既巩固了所学的语言目标，又拓展了学生的思维，培养学生在实际生活中运用所学知识解决实际问题的能力。‎ X. Language points ‎1. Life is full of the unexpected.‎ ‎ unexpected adj. 出乎意料的；始料不及的 e.g. It will not be unexpected if Tom comes late again, because he is always like this.‎ ‎ 如果汤姆又迟到了，一点也不意 外，因为他一向如此。‎ ‎2. By the time I got up, my brother had already gotten in the shower.‎ by the time 在……以前,常引导表示过去的时间状语从句，主句常用过去完成时，即had+动词过去分词 e.g. By the time I got there, he had already left. ‎ 在我到那儿之前，他已经离开了。‎ ‎3. So I just quickly put on some clothes and rushed out the door.‎ rush out 冲出去, 冲出……‎ e.g. Henry rushed out the room and disappeared in the rain.‎ ‎ 亨利冲出房间, 消失在了雨中。‎ ‎ Julia rushed out and didn’t return. 朱丽叶冲了出去, 再没回来。‎ ‎4. Luckily, Carl’s dad saw me on the street and gave me a lift in his car.‎ gave …a lift 捎……一程 e.g. Could you give me a lift, please?‎ ‎ 请问你能否捎我一程？‎ ‎ Jim gave me a lift on my way home yesterday.‎ ‎ 吉姆昨天在我回家的路上捎了我一程。‎ 如果有时间的话， 再做以下练习吧！‎ Exercises 用方框内短语的适当形式填空。‎ by the time, wake up, rush out ‎1. Tom __________, running after his brother in the dark night yesterday.‎ ‎2. __________ I was 10, I had been able to either play piano or violin. ‎ ‎3. _________, Sammy! I have been late for you to go to school. ‎ 根据句意和汉语提示，填写单词。‎ ‎1. There will be an __________ (意外的) surprise.‎ ‎2. The children _________ (冲，奔) out the school when the bell rang. ‎ ‎3. Yesterday the girl ________ (违反) the rule and her teacher was angry.‎ ‎4. When I was about to read my book, I found I ________ (忘了带) it at home.‎ XI. Homework Write out the story of Mary, note to use the target language．‎ Section A 2 (3a-3c)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 学习掌握下列单词和短语：block, in line with, worker, stare, disbelief, above, burn, burning, alive, airport, till , west ‎2) 能掌握以下句型：‎ Life is full of the unexpected. ‎ I was about to go up when I decided to get a coffee first. ‎ As I was waiting in line with other office workers, I heard a loud sound. ‎ Before I cold join the others outside to see what was going on, the first plane had already hit my office building. ‎ ‎3) 进一步熟练掌握过去完成时的用法。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎1) 通过学习使学生认识到生活中充满着许多出乎预料的事件，培养学生正确看待事物的积极心态。‎ ‎2）能运用所掌握的语法，句型和词汇进行交流。‎ ‎3）能比较流利地讲述自己曾经有的特别的一天。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1)掌握本课时中出现的生词 block, in line with, worker, stare, disbelief, above, burn, burning, alive, airport, till , west ‎2) 学会用过去完成时叙述自己曾经有的特别的一天。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ 用过去完成时叙述自己曾经有的特别的一天。‎ 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Revision ‎ ‎1. Could you please make sentences with these words and phrases below?‎ unexpected adj. 出乎意料的 by the time … 在……以前 backpack n. 背包 oversleep v. 睡过头；睡得太久 ‎2. Please make your own sentences.‎ By the time I got home, _____________.‎ By the time I came in, ______________.‎ By the time I got to school, __________.‎ By the time the bell rang, ___________.‎ By the time I got up, _______________.‎ ‎3. Retell the story of Mary’s bad day according to the pictures in 1a and 2a. ‎ Ⅱ. Discussion Tell Ss Life is full of the expected. Did you experience the expected things? Share your story with the class.‎ Ⅲ. Reading ‎ Work on 3a. Read the passage and answer the questions: ‎ ‎1) Which two events does the writer mention?‎ ‎2) How did the writer end up missing both events?‎ ‎1. Ask Ss to have a look at the questions before they start. ‎ ‎2. Let Ss complete the work on their own. ‎ ‎3. After a while, ask some students to report their answers to the class．Write the events on the blackboard as they report．‎ Keys: 1. The writer mentions the September 11 attack in New York and the ‎ earthquake in New Zealand.‎ ‎ 2. The writer went to get a coffee first and was not in the office when the plane hit the World Trade Center. He/she had overslept and missed his/her flight, so he/she was able to avoid the earthquake. ‎ ‎4. After checking the answers, tell students to read the article again more carefully．‎ Tell them to find out the words or sentences which they can’t understand this time．‎ Do some explanation and make sure that the students make everything clear about the article．‎ ‎5. Ask students to pick out the sentences with the Past Perfect Tense．Tell them to underline them and come up with the reason to use the tense．‎ 阅读方法指导：‎ 快速阅读全文，注意描述事件的关键词或短语，有助于整篇文章的理解。‎ 这些关键词可能是动词或动词短语，可能是介词短语，形容词，或连词等。 ‎ 第一段：found a job, arrived at, was about to, even though, stared, in disbelief, the burning building alive ‎ 第二段：woke up, went off, had taken off , till, unexpectedly , turned into ‎ Ⅳ. Careful Reading ‎ Work on 3b. ‎ ‎1. Ask Ss to read the passage again and find words from the passage with opposite meanings to the words below. ‎ ‎1. lost -- 2. west -- 3. below -- 4. dead -- 5. empty --‎ Keys: 1. found 2. east 3. up 4. alive 5. full ‎ ‎2. Let Ss write a sentence with each word on their own. ‎ e.g. I found the money on the floor.‎ 1. Ask several students to write their sentences on the blackboard. ‎ 2. Check their answers together. ‎ V. Practice Finish 3c. ‎ ‎1. Work in pairs. Retell one of the events to your partner. ‎ ‎2. Ask some Ss to retell one of the events to the class. Practice their skills. ‎ Keys: On September 11, 2001, I arrived at my building in the morning and was about to enter the office building, when suddenly I decided to buy a coffee. The unexpected thing came about when I was waiting in the line that a plane crashed the office building where I work. People were staring at the burning plane in disbelief. How dangerous it was! ‎ Ⅵ. Language points ‎ ‎1. I was about to go up when I decided to get a coffee first.‎ ‎ be about to 忙于；即将做某事。侧重于表示动作马上就要发生，常与when引导的从句连用，但不与具体的时间状语连用。 ‎ ‎ e.g. One of my friends is about to have her second baby. ‎ 我的一个朋友马上就要生第二个小孩了。‎ ‎2. I went to my favorite coffee place even though it was two blocks east from my office. ‎ ‎ even though 即使， 虽然， 尽管， 用于引导让步状语从句。‎ ‎ block n. 街区 ‎ e.g. He’s the best teacher, even though he has the least experience. ‎ ‎ 他虽然经验最少，却是最好的老师。‎ ‎3. We stared in disbelief at the black smoke rising above the burning building. ‎ ‎ stare v. 盯着看， 凝视 ‎ 表示看得比较仔细，有时候也带有吃惊的意味去看，常与at, into连用。‎ ‎ e.g. Don’t stare at me like that. 别那样盯着我看。‎ in disbelief 不相信 ，疑惑， 怀疑 e.g. Tamara stared at him in disbelief, shaking her head. ‎ ‎ 塔玛拉一边狐疑地盯着他看，一边摇着头。‎ ‎ She looked at him in disbelief. 她全然不信地看着他。‎ above prep. ‎ ‎1)（表示位置）在…正上方；高于”（与 below相对）。‎ ‎ e.g. That big high-rise above us is where Brian lives. ‎ ‎ 我们上面的那座摩天大楼就是布赖恩住的地方。‎ ‎ He lifted his hands above his head. 他将双手举过头顶。‎ ‎2) 表示在地位、级别、能力、资历、重要性等方面“超过”、“在……之上”、“比……强”。‎ ‎ e.g. He is above the others in ability. 他的能力优于其他人。‎ ‎ He is above me in every way. 他各个方面都比我强。‎ ‎3) adv. 在上面 e.g. There are snowy peaks above. 上面是白雪皑皑的群峰。‎ ‎ See the examples given above. 见上述例子。‎ burn v. 着火，燃烧 ‎(burnt, burnt / burned, burned)‎ burning adj. 着火的；燃烧的 e.g. Ouch! The sand is so hot! I can burn my feet.    ‎ ‎ 哎哟！沙子这么烫！会烫伤脚的。‎ ‎ He was trapped in a burning house.   ‎ ‎ 他被困在正在燃烧的房屋里。‎ ‎4. I felt lucky to be alive. ‎ ‎ alive 一般作表语；也可以作后置定语或宾补。 “活(着)的；在世的；(继续)存在的”；反义词是dead。‎ ‎ e.g. Do you know she’s alive? 你知道她还活着吗？‎ ‎ People alive should try their best to live better. (后置定语) ‎ ‎ 活下来的人应该尽力生活得更好。‎ ‎ Tom was kept alive in the big fire.‎ ‎ ( 宾补) 汤姆在这次大火中活下来了。‎ 辨析 alive, living, lively alive “活着的”，在句中常作表语或定语。作表语时，常可与 living互换；作定语时，常要放在被修饰词之后。‎ living“活着的”，在句中用作表语或定语。‎ lively“活泼的”，在句中可作表语或定语。‎ ‎5. But by the time I got to the airport, my plane to New Zealand had already taken off.‎ ‎ airport n. 机场 ‎ take off 脱掉； 起飞 ‎ e.g. He took off his hat and bowed as he passed. 他经过时脱帽鞠躬。‎ ‎ We eventually took off at 11 o’clock and arrived in Venice at 1:30. ‎ ‎ 我们终于在11点起飞，1:30 到达威尼斯。‎ VII. Exercises ‎ Complete the sentences.‎ ‎1. 我在动物园里见过活鳄鱼。‎ ‎ I have seen a _____ crocodile in the zoo.‎ ‎2. 他是那场火灾中唯一活下来的人。‎ ‎ He is the only person ____ in the fire.‎ ‎3. 露西是个活泼的孩子，大家都喜欢她。‎ ‎ Lucy is a _____ child and everyone likes her.‎ ‎4. The boy ____________________ (正要开始) but someone spoke first.‎ ‎5. Hurry up. The train ______________ (马上就要开了).‎ Keys: living, alive, lively, was just about to begin, is about to start Homework ‎ Recall the unexpected in your daily life and try to tell them to your friends in English.‎ Section A 3 (Grammar Focus-4c)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 学习掌握下列词汇：cream, workday, pie, show up, bean, market, by the end of, ‎ ‎2）进行一步复习巩固学习Section A 部分所学的生词和词组。‎ ‎3）巩固过去完成时的用法 ‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎1）能运用所掌握的语法，句型和词汇进行交流。‎ ‎2）能比较流利地讲述自己曾经有的特别的经历。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：‎ ‎1) 复习巩固Section A 部分所学的生词和词组，达到熟练运用的目标。‎ ‎2) 总结过去完成时的不同句型。‎ ‎3）总结过去完成时的用法。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：‎ 过去完成时的用法 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Revision ‎1. Have a dictation of the new words learned in the last class. ‎ ‎2. Review some main phrases we learned in the last class. Check the homework. ‎ 把下列短语翻译成英语 ‎1. 即将 2. 倒杯咖啡 ‎3. 排队等候 4. 起床 ‎5. 出去 6. 迟到 ‎7. 到时候 8. 闹铃响 ‎9. 开始做某事 10. 搭便车 ‎3. Revision 过去完成时的构成：had+动词的过去分词 II. Lead-in ‎ T: What happened to you on a bad morning? ‎ Ss…‎ 引导学生用过去完成时回答。‎ III. Grammar Focus. ‎ ‎1. 过去完成时讲解。‎ ‎2. 学生阅读Grammar Focus中的句子，然后做填空练习。‎ ‎1）当我到达学校的时候， 我才意识到我把书包忘在家里了。‎ When I got to school, I realized I ______ ______ my backpack at home. ‎ ‎2）到我返回学校的时候， 铃声已经响过了。‎ ‎_____ _____ _____ I got back to school, the bell ______ _______.‎ ‎3）我到达公共汽车站之前， 汽车已经离开了。‎ Before I _____ _____ the bus stop, the bus ______ _______ _______.‎ ‎4）我决定先买一杯咖啡，然后再准备去办公室，‎ I ______ ______ ______ go up to my office when I decided to get a coffee first.‎ ‎5）就在我和别的工作人员一起排队等候的时候，听到了一个巨大的声响。‎ As I ______ _______ ______ ______ with the other office workers, I ______ _____ _____ ______. ‎ Keys: 1. had left 2. By the time , had rung 3. got to, had left 4. was about to 5. was waiting in line , heard a loud sound ‎ ‎3. 学生们根据记忆，看大屏幕来完成填空练习。‎ ‎4. 学生们完成填空试题后，可以打开课本检查答案，对错误的句子，单独进行强化记忆。‎ IV. Try to Find ‎ ‎1. 由when, by the time, before等引导时间状语从句时，若描述发生在过去的事，主句常用过去完成时(had + 过去分词)表示动作发生在过去的过去。‎ ‎2. be about to do, be doing等表示即将或正在做某事时，常用when引导从句表示突然发生的动作，when可省略。‎ Ⅴ. Practice ‎ ‎1. Work on 4a. ‎ Ask Ss to make sentences using by the time or before on their own.‎ 1) Ask five students to the blackboard to write their sentences.‎ ‎1. Tim went into the bathroom. Mary got up.‎ ‎ By the time Mary got up, Tim had already gone into the bathroom.‎ ‎2. The coffee became cold. I put cream (n. 奶油) in the coffee.‎ ‎ __________________________________‎ ‎3. The teacher collected the math homework. I got to school.‎ ‎ __________________________________‎ ‎4. I completed the work for my boss. The workday (n. 工作日) ended.‎ ‎ __________________________________‎ ‎5. The movie started. I arrived at the cinema.‎ ‎ __________________________________‎ ‎6. My mother finished making the apple pie (n. 果馅派). I got home from my language course.‎ ‎ __________________________________‎ 2) Correct their sentences together in class. ‎ ‎2. Work on 4b. ‎ ‎1) Let Ss read the words or phrases in the box and try to understand the meanings of them. ‎ ‎2) Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the words by themselves.‎ ‎1. By the time I arrived at the party, everyone else _____ already __________.‎ ‎2. When he put the noodles into a bowl, he realized he ____________ to add the green beans (n. 豆).‎ ‎3. By the time my mother came back from the market (n. 市场), I ____ already __________ the door to go for my piano lesson.‎ ‎4. Before she got to the airport, she _________ ___ about the earthquake. ‎ ‎5. When she _________ the movie theater, she _____ remembered she had forgotten to feed her dog.‎ ‎6. Before she got a chance to say goodbye, he ____________ the building.‎ ‎3) Correct their answers together. ‎ Work on 4c. ‎ 1) Let Ss think about his/her day yesterday. ‎ 2) Let them write two true statements and one false statement about their day yesterday.‎ 3) Ask their classmates to guess the false statement. ‎ e.g. 1. By the time I left for school in the morning, ___________________________.‎ ‎2. By the end of the school day, _____________________‎ ‎3. By dinner time, _____________________________‎ VI. 如果有时间的话，再做以下练习吧！‎ 用括号里所给词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1. When Tim get back home, he started to realize that the thief ________ (come) to his house.‎ ‎2. By the time I received the letter, I ____________ (tell) the content of it.‎ ‎3. When I was born, I _____ (cry) heavily the first time in my life.‎ ‎1. had come 2. had been told 3. cried ‎ 翻译下列句子：‎ ‎1.当他到达学校的时候，老师已经开始上课了。‎ ‎2.当我出来的时候，我爸爸已经离开家了。‎ ‎3.在我拿书包以前我把门锁上了。‎ ‎4.在她做完作业之前我妈妈已经回来了。‎ VII. Homework ‎ ‎1. 复习Grammar Focus 中的内容。Try to make sentences with before, by the time ‎ and be doing … when, and make use of the past perfect tense.‎ ‎2. 写作： 描述一次难忘的经历。‎ Section B 1 (1a-2e)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1) 能掌握以下单词：fool, costume, embarrassed, costume party, announce, spaghetti, hoax, sell out, discovery, lady, cancel, officer, believable, disappear, embarrassing ‎ ‎2) 能掌握以下重难点句子：‎ ‎3) 提高学生的听力技能。培养学生从所听到的对话中获取信息的能力。‎ ‎4）培养学生的阅读能力，理解关键词和短语的能力。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ ‎1）了解部分西方节日的文化常识。‎ ‎2）了解不及时做某事而造成的危害，培养学生养成良好的行为习惯。‎ 二、教学重难点 ‎1. 教学重点：根据所学词组写一篇短文。‎ ‎2. 教学难点 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming- up and revision ‎ ‎1. Daily greeting. ‎ ‎2. Exercise 根据对话内容，从方框内选择合适的句子补全对话。（有两项多余) ‎ A. Why were you late?‎ B. My bike broke down halfway.‎ C. I usually get to school on time.‎ D. Have you ever been late for school?‎ E. He said I shouldn’t stay up so late at night.‎ F. I rushed to the bus shop without breakfast.‎ G. By I got to the school, the class had been on 15 minutes. ‎ A: Can I ask you some questions, Lisa?‎ B: Sure.‎ A: (1) _________‎ B: Yes, I have. But only once last term. ‎ A: (2) _________‎ B: I stayed up watching the football match the evening before, so I overslept the next morning.‎ A: What did you do after you got up?‎ B: (3) _________ But unfortunately, by the time I got there, the bus had already left.‎ A: Poor guy! And then?‎ B: So I started walking. Luckily, my uncle drove by and gave me a ride.‎ A: But you didn’t make it in the end, did you?‎ B: No, I didn’t. (4) _________ ‎ A: What did your teacher say?‎ B: (5) _________ ‎ A: Yes, he is right. Thanks for your answering.‎ B: It’s my pleasure.‎ Keys: 1—5 D A F G E ‎ Ⅱ. Lead in ‎ ‎1. Finish 1a. Put these words in the correct columns in the chart. Some words can go in more than one column.‎ fool invite ‎ costume embarrassed ‎ go off call get dressed empty show up realize ‎ change clock tired stay up Nouns ‎ ‎(people, place, things)‎ Verbs ‎ ‎(action words)‎ Adjectives ‎ ‎(description words)‎ ‎2. Tell Ss nouns are probably about people, things, places. Verbs are about action words. Description words are probably adjectives.‎ ‎3. Work on 1a. ‎ ‎4. Share the answers with others in class.‎ ‎5. Ask Ss make sentences with the words in 1a. ‎ Keys: fool costume change clock ‎ fool invite go off get dressed show up realize change ‎ stay up embarrassed tired empty Exercises:‎ Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the words or phrases.‎ rush realize invite show up stay up ‎ 1. I was waiting for the school bus but it didn’t come. Then I ________ it was Saturday.‎ 2. I woke up late this morning. I had to really ______ to get to school on time.‎ 3. There’s a good TV show tonight but it’s at 1:00 am. I don’t want to _________ that late.‎ 4. Sally _______ me to her birthday party. It’s at her house on Saturday.‎ 5. Do you know where John is? He was going to meet me earlier but he didn’t _________.‎ ‎1. realized 2. rush 3. stay up 4. invited 5. show up ‎ III. Work in pairs. ‎ ‎1b Tell your partner something that happened to you recently. Use two or more words in 1a.‎ Last Friday, my friend invited me to his birthday party…..‎ Ⅳ. Presentation ‎ Ask the students what they know about April Fool’s Day. ‎ What did you do on Last April Fool’s Day?‎ BBC——飞翔的企鹅 ‎2008年，BBC摄制组在南极附近拍摄了自然历史系列《进化的奇迹》（Miracles of Evolution）。里面讲述了阿德利企鹅飞翔的故事。这个飞翔企鹅的视频成了互联网上观看最多的视频之一。解说员特瑞•琼斯（Terry Jones）解释说，这些企鹅 不是挤在一起忍受冬季的严寒，而是飞去几千英里以外的南美洲热带雨林，享受热带温暖的阳光。如此有爱的愚人节玩笑是相当具有迷惑性的。作为具有专业精神的媒体，BBC随后揭秘了他们是如何制作翔企鹅特效的——其实就是动画 啦。‎ 最著名的玩笑：BBC——意大利面条树大丰收 还是在遥远的1957年，英国的BBC电视台在4月1日播出了这样一条消息 ：多亏刚过去的温和冬天，以及有效的控制了面条树虫害，瑞士南部一户农家的意大利面条喜获大丰收。画面中，一名女子仔细的将意大利面条从树上摘下来，把它们放到太阳下晒干。‎ 因为在当时，意大利菜在英国还不常见。许多英国人并不知道意大利面条是用小麦粉做成的。上百通电话打到BBC，有人指出消息错误，有人疑惑不解，甚至有人询问：怎么自己种意大利面条树呢？‎ 这可以算是电视媒体最早加入4月1日愚人节整人活动行列的例子。多年后的CNN文章，还评价它是史上最大的一个玩笑。‎ Ⅴ. Listening ‎ Work on 1c: ‎ ‎1. 1c Dave, Nick and Joe are talking about April Fool’s Day. Listen and write each person’s name under the correct picture.‎ a: No name b: Joe c: Nick d: Dave . ‎ ‎2. Listen to the tape for the second time and finish 1d. ‎ ‎1d Listen again. Who says each of the phrases below? Write D for Dave, N for Nick and J for Joe.‎ ‎1) ______ a costume party ‎2) ______ my alarm went off ‎3) ______ stayed up all night ‎4) ______ was tired ‎5) ______ was really embarrassed ‎6) ______ the other kids showed up ‎ Keys: D N J J D N ‎ VI. Group work ‎ Work on 1e. ‎ ‎1e Tell April Fool’s Day stories in your group. Use the information in 1c and 1d. ‎ e.g. A: What happened to Dave on April Fool’s Day?‎ B: Well, a friend invited him to a costume party, ….‎ Let some group make a conversation before the class. ‎ VII. Work in pairs.‎ Work on 2a. ‎ ‎2a Have you ever played jokes on others, especially on Aril Fool’s Day? Have you ever been fooled by others? Tell your story to your partner.‎ Ⅷ. Lead in ‎ Show some pictures of April Fool’s Day. ‎ IX. Reading ‎ Fast Reading.‎ ‎1. Work on 2b.‎ Read the passage quickly. Match the paragraphs with the main idea.‎ Paragraph 1 The most famous trick played Paragraph 2 Examples of funny stories that happened on April Fool’s Day.‎ Paragraph 3 An introduction to April Fool’s Day ‎ Paragraph 4 A sad story that happened on April Fool’s Day ‎ ‎ ‎ Careful Reading ‎1. Work on 2c. Let Ss read the passage carefully, and answer these questions. ‎ ‎1) Why did the supermarkets run out of spaghetti one April Fool’s Day? ‎ ‎2) What did the TV show say the special water could do? ‎ ‎3) Why did the TV star’s joke have a bad ending?‎ ‎4) When did Orson Wells tell people about aliens from Mars landing on the earth?‎ ‎5) Why did so many people believe Orson Wells?‎ ‎6) Which of these stories is the most believable? Which is the least believable? ‎ ‎ Why?‎ ‎7) Would you be fooled by any of these stories? ‎ Answers：‎ ‎1) A reporter announced that there would be no more spaghetti as spaghetti farmers in Italy had stopped growing spaghetti.‎ ‎2) It was said that the special water would help people lose weight.‎ ‎3) He lost both his girlfriend and his show.‎ ‎4) It was in October 1938.‎ ‎5) Orson Welles made it sound so real that hundreds of people believed the story.‎ ‎6) I think the story of a famous movie star is the most believable. The story of aliens from Mars is the least believable. Because the movie star is living with people. People never see any aliens on the earth. ‎ ‎2. Work on 2d. Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the verbs on brackets. ‎ ‎2d Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the verbs in brackets.‎ ‎1) After the spaghetti story __________(appear) in the news, everyone _______ ‎ ‎ (rush) to the supermarkets.‎ ‎2) By the time people ________ (find out) the story was not true, all the spaghetti ‎ ‎ in the supermarkets _______________ (disappear).‎ ‎3) By the time the day ______ (end), more than 10,000 people _________ (call) the TV station to ask about the special water. ‎ ‎4) By the time the show _____ (end), the TV star ________ (lose) his girl friend.‎ ‎5) By the time police officers ____ (tell) the country that the story was a hoax, many people ____________ (run away) from their homes. ‎ Keys: appeared rushed ‎ found out had disappeared ‎ ended had called ‎ ended had lost ‎ told had run away Post reading Work on 2e. ‎ Tell your funny story from 2a to the class. The class will vote for: ‎ a. the funniest joke ‎ b. the most embarrassing joke c. the most creative joke ‎ A: What’s your story?‎ B: Last year, on the first day of school, my sister put a piece of paper on my back that said “Please say hello”. All morning at school…‎ Ⅸ. Language points ‎1. Explain the new words in this period: ‎ ‎1. fool ‎ n. 傻瓜；愚人；受骗者 ‎ e.g. People always think I'm a fool, and I dare say they're right. ‎ 人们总认为我是个傻瓜，想必他们是对的。‎ vt. 愚弄，欺骗； ‎ e.g. He was fooled by his friend on April Fool’s Day.‎ 愚人节那天他被他的朋友愚弄了。‎ ‎2. embarrassed adj. 局促不安的； 为难的； 尴尬的； 窘迫的 , ‎ e.g. He looked a bit embarrassed. 他看起来有点尴尬。‎ embarrassing adj. 使人尴尬的，令人为难的 ‎ e.g. That was an embarrassing situation for me. 那种情形让我难堪。‎ ‎3. sell out 卖完；售完；出售 ‎ e.g. The next day the bookshops sold out. 第二天书店就卖断了货。‎ ‎4. discovery n. 发现，发觉；（剧情的）发展；被发现的事物； ‎ e.g. He knows that he had made a real discovery. ‎ 他知道他已经发现了一件真正的珍品。‎ ‎5. marry v. “嫁，娶，结婚”‎ ‎ e.g. Henry didn’t marry until he was over fifty．亨利直到过了50岁才结婚。‎ ‎⑴ marry sb. 表示“嫁给某人” 、 “娶了某人”或“和某人结婚”‎ ‎⑵ get/be married to sb. ‎ e.g. John is going to marry Jane. 约翰要和简结婚了。‎ ‎6. The other kids showed up.‎ show up 露面，到场；（使）看得见；‎ e.g. We waited until five o'clock, but he did not show up. ‎ 我们一直等到了5点，但是他始终没有露面。‎ ‎7. Many April Fool’s jokes may end up being not very funny.‎ end up (doing sth.)（以…）结束； 最终成为； 最后处于 ‎ e.g. Every time she tried to argue with her husband, she ended up crying her eyes out. 每回她试着和她丈夫争辩，她总是以流泪结束。‎ end up sth. 表示“结束某事”。 ‎ e.g. The scientist ended up his speech at last. 那个科学家最后结束了演讲。‎ end up with sth. （以…）结束 e.g. The students began with speaking English, but ended up with speaking Chinese. ‎ 同学们以说英语开始， 却以说汉语结束。‎ 根据汉语意思完成英语句子。‎ ‎1.记者刚刚结束了他的报道。‎ ‎ The reporter has just _________________.‎ ‎2. 聚会以一曲舞蹈结束。‎ ‎ The party ______________ a dance.‎ ‎3. 他们做了很多工作，结果什么也没得到。‎ ‎ They did much work, but they ________________ nothing.‎ Keys: ended up his report  ended up with  ended up getting X. Homework ‎ Review the Past perfect tense.‎ Section B 2 (3a-Self Check)‎ 一、教学目标： ‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标：‎ ‎1）掌握本单元基础知识， 掌握过去完成时的结构和用法。‎ ‎2）能够根据所学知识进行写作， 提高学生的写作能力。‎ ‎2. 情感态度价值观目标：‎ 二、教学重难点 过去完成时的用法 三、教学过程 Ⅰ. Warming up and revision ‎1. Have a dictation of the new words and expressions this unit. ‎ ‎2. Retell the stories of April Fool’s Day . ‎ 根据句意，用括号内所给动词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1) By the end of last year, I ___________ (be) to the West Hill Farm three times.‎ ‎2) By the time I got up, Mom _________ (go) out for some exercise.‎ ‎3) I ______________(learn) 1,000 English words by last term.‎ ‎4) By 9 o’clock last night, we __________ (get) 200 pictures from the spaceship.‎ ‎5) When I went into the classroom, the final bell ___________ (ring). I was happy that I wasn’t late.‎ Keys: had been had gone had learned had gotten had rung ‎ 根据句意和汉语提示，填写恰当的短语完成下列句子。‎ ‎1) He ___________ (醒来) very early and went out for a walk in the park.‎ ‎2) I ______________ (让她搭便车), so she invited me to have dinner. ‎ ‎3) I hope that all of you will come to the meeting ____________ (准时).‎ ‎4) His car ___________ (出故障), so he had to get it repaired. ‎ ‎5) This Monday my alarm clock didn’t __________ (发出响声) and I got up late.‎ Keys: woke up gave her a lift on time broke down go off ‎ Ⅱ. Lead-in ‎ Do you have any experience on April Fool’s day? Now can you remember a lucky or an unlucky day? What happened? Make some notes about what you remember. ‎ III. Practice.‎ ‎1. Work on 3a. Make notes. ‎ Can you remember a lucky or an unlucky day? What happened? Make some notes about what you remember. ‎ What was the date?‎ What happened first?‎ Was this lucky or unlucky? Why?‎ What happened next?‎ How did the day end?‎ How did you feel about this day?‎ ‎2. Share your ideas with others in class. ‎ IV. Writing ‎1. Write a story about your lucky or unlucky day and tell your story to a partner or the class. Use your notes to write a story about your lucky or unlucky day.‎ 写作指导： 常见的表达句型：‎ ‎ My lucky/unlucky day ‎ I will always remember the date…‎ This was the luckiest /unluckiest day of my life…‎ When I woke up that morning…‎ Later that day…‎ I couldn’t believe …‎ Then/After that…‎ Finally…‎ I think….‎ What a lucky/an unlucky day! ‎ ‎2. Ask Ss to write a passage in class. ‎ ‎3. Tell your story to your partner or the class. ‎ Example: ‎ My lucky day I will always remember the date –April Fool’s Day last year. ‎ This was the luckiest day of my life. ‎ When I woke up that morning, I brushed my teeth, washed my face, then I read English for half an hour. It was time to eat my breakfast. My little brother gave me a piece of Oreo. I was very glad to eat it first. Then I felt strange. It tasted special. What was it? I looked at my little brother. He laughed loudly and said nothing. ‎ Later that day, I knew he put toothpaste (牙膏) into the Oreo. I couldn’t believe I was fooled by him. I brushed my teeth again. After that, my brother gave me a box of Oreo, and said “Happy April Fool’s Day.” ‎ Finally I was happy to get these delicious biscuits. ‎ I think I had a happy and lucky day. ‎ What a lucky day! ‎ V. Self-check. ‎ Work on Self Check 1: ‎ ‎1. Let some Ss read the words in the box. Make sure all the Ss know the meaning of the words. ‎ ‎2. Let Ss read the sentences in Self check 1. Then Ss try to fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the words in the box. ‎ cancel miss west accident ‎ lady officer market unexpected ‎ Last Saturday after my French course, I decided to drive to the ________ to buy a meat pie for dinner. As I was heading ________, I saw a huge truck in the middle of the road.‎ There had been a(n) _________ and there were many police _______ around. I ‎ turned around and decided to go to a nearby mall.‎ However, I ________ the road that led to the mall. Then I saw a restaurant that sold chicken noodles. I went inside and the _____, who was the owner, served me the most delicious bowl of chicken noodles ever. I had made a(n) ____________ discovery! I’m so glad that I _________ my plan to go to the market.‎ 1. Let some Ss read their answers. Check the answers with the Ss. ‎ Keys: market west accident officers missed lady unexpected canceled ‎ Work on Self check 2 ‎ ‎1. Tell Ss that they have to fill in the blanks with Past Perfect Tense. More than one answers may be possible. ‎ ‎2. Ss think and try to complete the sentences by themselves. ‎ ‎3. Let some Ss read their answers to the class. ‎ ‎4. Share their answers together. ‎ e.g. ‎ ‎1) A: Why didn’t you hand in your science homework?‎ ‎ B: Before I could start working on it, my baby brother started crying and I had to look after him as my mother was sick.‎ ‎2) A: Why didn’t you take a shower this morning?‎ B: By the time I got up, my sister had already gone into the bathroom and the bus was honking for me to hurry up.‎ 1) A: Why did you have to walk home from school?‎ B: By the time I left my school, the school bus had already left. ‎ VI. Exercise ‎1. We ______ four thousand new words by the end of last year. ‎ ‎ A. learned B. had learned ‎ ‎ C. have learned D. will learn ‎2. He told us that he ______ the letters in the morning.‎ ‎ A. will post B. have posted ‎ C. was posting D. had posted ‎3. — Did you see Mr Smith when you were in France?  ‎ ‎ — No. When I _______ France, he _______ to China.‎ ‎ A. had arrived in; had gone ‎ ‎ B. arrived in; has been ‎ C. got to; had gone ‎ ‎ D. had got to; had been ‎ VII. Homework ‎ ‎1. 复习本单元内容。‎ ‎2. 对家人进行调查， 看他们在生活或工作中有没有被人愚弄或是否愚弄过别人，写篇短文，和大家分享。‎ Unit 13 We’re trying to save the earth!‎ 一、教学目标：‎ ‎1. 语言知识目标 基本词汇：litter, advantage, bottom, fisherman, coal, ugly, cost, wooden, plastic, takeaway, bin, shark, fin, method, cruel. Harmful, chain, ecosystem, industry, law, scientific, afford, reusable, transportation, recycle, napkin, upside, gate, bottle, president, inspiration, iron, work, metal, creativity, ‎ 基本词组：be harmful to, at the top(of sth.), take part in, turn off, take action, throw away, put sth. to good use, pull… down, bring back 基本句型：We’re trying to save the earth!‎ ‎ The river used to be so clean.‎ ‎ The air is badly polluted.‎ ‎ No scientific studies have showed that shark fins are good for health.‎ ‎ We should help save the sharks. ‎ ‎2. 技能目标: 能正确运用现在进行时，现在完成时，被动语态，情态动词和used to 句型。‎ ‎3. 情感目标: 有环境危机意识，学会关注环境保护环境。‎ 二、教学重难点： ‎ ‎1. 教学重点：（1）能 正确运用现在进行时，现在完成时，被动语态，情态动词和used to 句型。‎ ‎ （2）保护环境的措施方法。‎ ‎2. 教学难点：能正确运用现在进行时，现在完成时，被动语态，情态动词和used to 句型。三、教学步骤:‎ Section A 1 (1a-2d)‎ I. Presentation Show the picture of the earth and tell students the earth is polluted now. ‎ For example: (1) The factories that burn coal pollute the air with a lot of black smoke.‎ ‎(2) Factories put waste into the river.‎ ‎(3) People should throw away litter in the bin.‎ ‎ (4)There are more cars on the road.‎ II. Learning Here are some words related to different kinds of pollution. Write them in the box below. Then add more words.‎ loud music cars rubbish planes littering ships factories smoking building houses mobile phones noise pollution air pollution water pollution ‎ ‎____________ ___________ _____________‎ ‎____________ ___________ _____________‎ ‎____________ ___________ _____________‎ ‎____________ ___________ _____________‎ Keys : noise pollution loud music planes mobile phones building houses air pollution factories smoking cars building houses water pollution ships rubbish littering factories III. Listening ‎1. 1b Listen and complete the sentences.‎ What was the problem? The river was _____________. Even the bottom (底部) of the river was full of ________. There were no more ______ for fishermen (渔民) to catch. What caused the problem? People are throwing _______ into the river. Factories are putting ______ into the river. How should the problem be solved? We should write to the ____________ and ask them to ___________ the factories. Everyone should help to __________ the river. Keys: really dirty rubbish fish litter waste government close down clean up ‎2. Listen again and check (√) the sentences you hear.‎ ‎1) We could go fishing in the river.‎ ‎2) The river was really dirty.‎ ‎3) The river has always been the nicest river in this town.‎ ‎4) We should ask the teachers for help.‎ Keys: 2 3 ‎ IV. Practice ‎1. Role-play the conversation in 1c.‎ Mark: The river was dirty. Even the bottom of the river was full of rubbish.‎ Tony: But it used to be so clean!‎ Mark: Yes, but people are throwing litter into the river.‎ Tony: Everyone in this town should play a part in cleaning it up!‎ ‎2. Make conversations using the pollution in 1a.‎ A: The river has always been the nicest river in this town.‎ B: Yes, it used to be so clean.‎ A: But I was there last weekend and the river was really dirty.‎ B: What caused the problem?‎ A: People are throwing litter into the river.‎ B: What should we do?‎ A: Factories are also putting waste into the river.‎ B: Yes, everyone in this town should play a part.‎ A: We should write to the government and ask them to close down the factories.‎ B: What else can we do?‎ A: Everyone should help to clean up the river.‎ V. Language points ‎1. We’re trying to save the earth! 我们正在竭尽全力拯救地球!‎ ‎ try to do =try one’s best to do 努力去做某事。‎ ‎ e.g. Every student should try to study hard in order to study in a university.‎ ‎ 为了进入大学学习，每个学生都应该努力学习。‎ ‎2. Here are some words related to different kinds of pollution.‎ ‎ be related to 与…有关 ‎ e.g. I am not related to him in any way. 我和他无任何关系。 ‎ ‎3. Everyone in this town should play a part in cleaning it up!‎ ‎ play a part in 在……方面起作用 ‎ e.g. A good diet plays a large part in helping people live longer.‎ ‎ 健康的饮食在帮助人们长寿方面起着非常大的作用。‎ play a part 在……中扮演角色 ‎ e.g. He was invited to play a part in this TV play. ‎ ‎ 他被邀请参加这个电视剧的演出。‎ ‎4. Even the bottom of the river was full of rubbish.‎ ‎ Yes, but people are throwing litter into the river.‎ litter 和 rubbish 都可指“垃圾”，用作不可数名词。‎ rubbish 指“没用的东西(被扔或将要丢弃的无用的东西)”不可回收。‎ litter 指“(室内或公共场所)乱扔的废物(纸屑、不要的包装纸、废瓶等)”还可回收 e.g. Throw the rubbish out. 把垃圾扔出去。 ‎ ‎　　 The room is full of rubbish. 房间里堆满了垃圾。 　　 Pick up your litter after a picnic. 野餐后将废弃物收拾好。 ‎ VI. Listening ‎1. 2a Listen to the interview. Circle the kinds of pollution that Jason and Susan talk about.‎ A. land pollution B. air pollution C. noise pollution D. water pollution Keys: B A ‎2. 2b Listen again and complete the sentences.‎ ‎1) The air is badly polluted because there are ___________ on the road these days.‎ ‎2) Factories that burn coal also ________ the air with a lot of black smoke.‎ ‎3) There is also too much rubbish and waste. People _________________ things every day.‎ ‎4) People are also littering in ______________ like parks. This is turning beautiful places into ugly (丑陋) ones. ‎ Keys: more cars pollute are throwing away public places ‎3. Listen and answer the questions.‎ ‎1) Who is the interviewer talking to?‎ ‎2) What are they talking?‎ ‎3) What other problems do they see?‎ Keys: Susan and Jason.‎ The environmental problems.‎ There’s too much rubbish and waste in the streets.‎ VII. Practice (2c)‎ Use the information in 2a and 2b to role-play conversations between Jason and Susan.‎ Jason: The air has become really polluted around here. I’m getting very worried.‎ Susan: Yes, I used to be able to see stars in the sky.‎ Jason: The problem is that… ‎ VIII. Discussion Ask students what we should do to save the earth. Help students answer, turn off the lights when you leave a room; stop riding in cars; stop using paper towels or napkins; recycle books and paper.‎ IX. Reading ‎1. Read 2d and complete the chart.‎ Problems Solving problems air pollution waste pollution wooden (木头的) chopsticks or plastic forks rubbish ‎2. Role-play the conversation.‎ Interviewer: Jason and Susan, what are your ideas for solving these problems?‎ Jason: Well, to cut down air pollution, we should take the bus or subway instead of driving.‎ Susan: Yeah, or ride a bike. There are other advantages (优点) of bike riding. It’s good for health and it doesn’t cost (花费) anything!‎ Interviewer: Great ideas! What about waste pollution?‎ Susan: Mmm, I think simple things like bringing a bag to go shopping can help. I started doing that a year ago.‎ Jason: Me, too. Also, I never take wooden chopsticks or plastic (塑料) forks when I buy takeaway (外卖食品) food. I use the ones at home.‎ Susan: And remember to throw rubbish in the bins and keep public places clean and beautiful for everyone.‎ Interviewer: So together, our actions can make a difference and lead to a better future!‎ X. Summary and language points ‎1. This is turning beautiful places into ugly ones.‎ ‎ turn… into… 把……变成……‎ e.g. The icy rain seemed like to turn into snow.‎ ‎ 渐渐地冻雨又变成雪花的模样。 ‎ ‎2. It’s good for health and it doesn’t cost anything!‎ ‎ cost v. 花费；使付出 ‎ 指花费金钱，主语通常是物。cost的过去式和过去分词均为cost。 ‎ e.g. The new shirt cost Mr Wang 200 yuan. 王先生花了200元买了新衬衫。‎ ‎ How much does the new computer cost? 新电脑花了多少钱？‎ take, spend, pay & cost take，spend，pay和cost都可以表示“花费”，但它们的用法各有不同。‎ ‎1) take多表示花费时间，常用于It takes sb. some time to do sth.这一句型中，其中it作形式主语。‎ ‎ e.g. It usually takes me 40 minutes to cook the dinner.‎ ‎2) spend多表示花费时间和金钱，主语通常是人，常用于sb. spend(s) some time / money on sth.和sb. spend(s) some time / money (in) doing sth.两种句型。‎ ‎ e.g. David spent 2,000 yuan on the new machine.‎ ‎ My father spends an hour (in) watching the news on TV every day.‎ ‎3) pay多表示花费金钱，主语通常是人，常用于sb. pay(s) some money for sth.句型。 ‎ ‎ e.g. Tommy paid 20 yuan for his breakfast yesterday.‎ ‎4) cost多表示花费金钱，主语通常是物，常用于sth. cost(s) (sb.) some money. 句型。‎ ‎ e.g. The new dress cost Linda 88 yuan.‎ 根据句意用take, spend, pay或cost的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1) That new car ________ them lots of money.‎ ‎2) Mona __________ 50 yuan on the books just now.‎ ‎3) It usually _______ me an hour to do my homework.‎ ‎4) You should __________ some time practising your pronunciation.‎ ‎5) My brother _______ 6, 000 yuan for the new computer yesterday.‎ Keys cost   spent  takes spend paid ‎3. So together, our actions can make a difference and lead to a better future!‎ ‎ make a difference (to…) 表示(对……)产生影响或作用 ‎ e.g. Do you think his words would make any difference to the final decision?‎ ‎ 你认为他的话会对最后的决定产生影响吗？ ‎ The new teacher always encourages little Tom. This has made a big difference ‎ to him.‎ 新来的老师总是鼓励小汤姆，这对他影响很大。‎ XI. Exercises 用动词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1) We’re trying _______ (save) the earth.‎ ‎2) There used to_____ (be) clean and beautiful.‎ ‎3) There are too many ______ for ________to catch (fish).‎ ‎4) It’s bad for environment to use _________ (wood) chopsticks.‎ Keys: to save be fish fishermen wooden XII. Think about The earth is badly polluted. Please make a poster and think of what we can do.‎ XIII. Homework ‎1. Copy the new words and remember them. ‎ ‎2. Read the listening materials of 1b, 2a.‎ Section A 2 (3a-3c)‎ I. Revision (1) Role-play 2d.‎ (2) Translate these sentences into English.‎ ‎①甚至是河底都满是垃圾。‎ ‎②这个小镇上的每个人都应该参加打扫。‎ ‎③骑自行车有其它的优点。‎ ‎④我买外卖食品从来不拿木筷子和塑料叉子。‎ II. Lead in ‎ (1) Teacher tells students the earth is badly polluted. What should we do to save ‎ the earth? Let’s take action. For example:‎ ‎ ①Turn off the lights when you leave a room;‎ ‎ ②Take buses instead of driving cars ③Recycle books and paper.‎ ‎(2) There are some animals are endangered. We should do something to protect the animals and the environment! ‎ III. Discussion ‎ (1) Have you ever seen a shark?‎ ‎(2) What do you know about sharks? ‎ IV. Reading (1) Sharks are endangered, read the passage and judge the sentences.‎ ‎①Shark’s fin（鱼鳍）soup is famous and expensive all around the world.‎ ‎②We have to kill a whole shark to get a bowl of shark’s fin soup.‎ ‎③People cut off sharks’ fins and throw the sharks back into the ocean.‎ ‎④Sharks are in the bottom of the food chain in the ocean’s ecosystem.‎ ⑤WildAid and the WWF are environmental protection groups in China.‎ ⑥Shark’s fin s are good for health.‎ (2) Complete the fact sheet in 3a. ‎ Where shark fin soup is popular ‎ ‎ Number of sharks caught and traded every year How much the numbers of ‎ some kinds of sharks have ‎ fallen in the last 20 to 30‎ years Two environmental groups ‎ which are against “finning”‎ V. Practice (3b)‎ ‎ (1) Read the passage and dill in the blanks with the words in the box.‎ ‎1. Many people do not realize they are killing a whole shark ______ they enjoy a bowl of shark fin soup.‎ ‎2. Sharks are at the top of the food chain, ____ if their numbers drop, the ocean’s ecosystem will be in danger.‎ ‎3. Many think that sharks are too strong to be endangered, _____ they are wrong.‎ ‎4. _________ there are no scientific studies to support this, a lot of people believe that shark fins are good for health.‎ ‎5. Sharks may disappear one day ___ we do not do something to stop the sale of shark fins.‎ ‎ (2) Retell the passage according to the words below.‎ shark’s fin soup, in southern China ‎ each time cut off no longer not only…but also… ‎ at the top drop be endangered the strongest around 70 million fallen by over 90 percent WildAid and the WWF develop laws scientific studies VI. Language points ‎1. A shark can no longer swim and slowly dies. 鲨鱼不能再游泳然后慢慢死掉。‎ no longer意思是“不再” ‎ e.g. I’m no longer a student. 我不再是个学生了。 ‎ 有两个短语和no longer同义，即not…any longer和not…any more，但他们侧重的方面不同。‎ no longer和not…any longer侧重时间。 ‎ e.g. He no longer lives here.= He doesn’t live here any longer. ‎ ‎ 他不在这儿居住了。(一个时间以前他住在这儿，过了这个时间，他就离开 了。) ‎ not…any more侧重侧重程度和数量 e.g. You can drink no more. = You can’t drink any more. ‎ ‎ 你不能再喝了。(喝酒的量到了一定程度，不能再继续下去了。) ‎ ‎2. This method is not only cruel, but also harmful to the environment.‎ ‎ 这种方法不但残忍而且对环境有害。‎ not only…but also…‎ 用于连接两个表示并列关系的成分，着重强调后者，其意为“不仅……而且……”; 其中的also有时可以省略。‎ e.g. 1) She not only plays well, but also writes music.‎ ‎ 她不仅很会演奏，而且还会作曲。 ‎ ‎ 2) Not only men but also women were chosen. ‎ ‎ 不仅仅是男的，女的也有被选中的。 ‎ 若连接两个成分作主语，其谓语通常与靠近的主语保持一致。‎ e.g. Not only you but also he has to leave. 不只是你，他也得离开。 ‎ not only放在句首，后接句子时要用倒装结构。 ‎ e.g. Not only had the poor man been fined, but also he had been sent to prison.‎ ‎ 这个可怜的人不仅被罚款，而且还被送进了监狱。 ‎ be harmful to 对… 有害 e.g. Smoking is harmful to the health. 吸烟有损健康。‎ ‎ Playing computer games much is harmful to students.‎ ‎ 电脑游戏玩太多对学生有害。‎ ‎3. Sharks are at the top of the food chain in the ocean’s ecosystem.‎ ‎ 鲨鱼位于海洋生物系统食物链的顶部。‎ at the top of 在...最高地位; 用最高[最大]的(速度, 声音等) ‎ e.g. I looked at the top of his head, his hair shiny and parted smoothly. ‎ ‎ 我看他的头顶, 头发光亮, 分得平滑。‎ ‎ He shouted at the top of his voice in order that he might be heard.‎ ‎ 他尽力大声叫喊, 以便别人能听见。‎ ‎4. If their numbers drop too low, it will bring danger to all ocean life. ‎ ‎ 如果它们的数目降至过低，会给所有海洋生物带来危险。‎ 此句复数形式的number表达全海洋中鲨鱼的总量。当表示数值的高或低时，‎ number要用high或low修饰。‎ e.g. In that country, the number of children going to school is higher in cities than in towns and village.‎ 在那个国家，城市儿童入学人数比乡镇及农村要高。‎ 常与number搭配的动词有grow, fall等。‎ e.g. The number of families that own cars has been growing quickly recently.‎ ‎ 近来拥有轿车的家庭数量增长很快。‎ ‎5. Environment protection groups around the world, such as WildAid and the WWF, are teaching the public about “finning”. ‎ ‎ 世界各地的环境保护组织，如野生救援协会和世界自然基金会，都在教育公众有关“猎翅”的行为。‎ ‎1) 句中fin本为名词，指 “鱼鳍”。此句中的finning由动词化的fin（割鲨鱼鳍以获取鱼翅）的-ing形式转化而成，指课文中所陈述的 “猎翅”这一行为。‎ ‎2) WildAid和WWF组织 WildAid（美国野生救援协会）是保护野生动物及栖息地环境的一个非盈利性的机构，1999年注册成立，其宗旨是保护及救助世界范围内的野生动物；WWF（世界自然基金会）英文全称为World Wide Fund for Nature，成立于1961年，是享有国际盛誉，全球最大的独立性非政府环境保护组织之一。‎ VII. Homework Write 5 measures to protect the environment.‎ Section A 3 (Grammar Focus-4c)‎ I. Revision ‎1. Check if you know these phrases.‎ ‎① 不同种类的污染 ② 河底 ‎③ 把垃圾扔到河里 ④ 在…中起作用 ‎⑤ 在中国南部 ⑥ 对……有害 ‎⑦ 在……顶部 ⑧ 海洋生态系统 ‎2. Translate these sentences into English. ‎ ‎① 甚至是河底都满是垃圾。‎ ‎② 这个方法不仅残酷还对环境有害。‎ ‎③ 鲨鱼处于海洋食物链的顶部。‎ ‎④ 许多人相信鱼翅对健康有好处。‎ II. Grammar Focus Pay attention to the sentences.‎ ‎1) We’re trying to save the earth.‎ ‎2) The river used to be so clean.‎ ‎3) The air is badly polluted.‎ ‎4) No scientific studies have shown that shark fins are good for health.‎ ‎5) We should help save the sharks.‎ ‎1. 现在进行时: Present Progressive 定义：表示说话时（瞬间）正在进行的动作，也表示目前或现阶段一直进行的动作。‎ 结构: be (am/is/ are) + v.-ing 标志词：Look, Listen, now, right now…‎ e.g. Look! The boy is crying.‎ ‎2. used to do与be used to doing used to do sth. 表示过去常常做某事, 而现在往往不做了, 后接动词原形。‎ be used to doing sth. 表示习惯于做某事。‎ e.g. I used to get up at six o’clock.‎ ‎ Joe is used to drinking a cup of coffee every morning.‎ ‎3. 被动语态：Passive voice 定义：表示主语是动作的承受者，即行为动作的对象的一种语态。‎ 结构：be + 过去分词 e.g. A new school was built last year. ‎ ‎ Our classroom is cleaned every day.‎ ‎4. 现在完成时: Present Perfect 定义：表示动作已经完成, 但对现在造成影响; ‎ 或者表示从过去某一时间开始一直延续到现在并还可能持续下去的动作。 ‎ 结构: has/have + 过去分词 标志词：already, yet, ever, never, since, for…‎ e.g. I haven’t finished my homework yet.‎ ‎5. 情态动词 ‎1) 情态动词本身有一定的词义，表示说话人的情绪、态度或语气，但不能单独作谓语，只能与其他动词构成谓语。常见的有：can (could), may (might), must, need, shall (should), will (would)等。‎ ‎2) 情态动词无人称和数的变化, 后接动词原形。否定式是在情态动词后面加not。个别情态动词有过去式形式, 可用来表达更加客气、委婉的语气。‎ ‎ e.g. Ken can climb up the tress like a koala.‎ ‎ Tracy could ride a bicycle when she was five years old.‎ ‎ You mustn’t play with fire. It is dangerous.‎ III. Practice ‎1. Work on 4a. Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the verbs in brackets.‎ ‎ Joe: _____ you ever ______ (take) part in an environmental project ?‎ Eric: Yes, I have. I ______ (help) with a Clean-Up Day last year. It was _________ (consider) the biggest clean-up project this city ____ ever ‎ ‎ ____ (have).‎ ‎ Joe: How many people ____ (take) part?‎ Eric: I _______ (think) more than 1,000 people ______ (come) to help out.‎ Joe: That’s fantastic! I guess everyone in this city is ______ (try) to improve the environment.‎ Eric: Yes, we can’t afford to ____ (wait) any longer to take action!‎ ‎ Learn some new words and expressions.‎ ‎2. Work on 4b. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate modal verbs from the box. The words are:‎ can, would, could, have to, should, must, may/might ‎ People __________ think that big things ______ be done to save the earth. Many forget that saving the earth begins with small things. For example, you ____ save ‎ electricity by turning off the lights when you leave a room. You ______ also use reusable bags instead of plastic bags. I think it’s a great idea that you now ______ pay for plastic bags in some stores. And instead of driving to school or work, you __________ ride your bike or walk. If it’s far, you __________ take the bus. All these small things ______ add up and become big things that ______ improve the environment. Let’s take action now!‎ Learn some new words and expressions.‎ ‎3. Work on 4c. Make a list of things that people can do to help the environment and discuss your list with your partner. ‎ ‎ use public transportation (n.交通运输);‎ turn off the lights when you leave a room;‎ use reusable bags instead of plastic bags;‎ ride your bike or walk to school or work;‎ stop using paper napkins;‎ recycle books and paper ‎…‎ ‎4. Discussion. ‎ A: I think that everyone should use public transportation.‎ B: I disagree. It’s difficult for parents with young children to use public transportation…‎ IV. Language points ‎1. We can’t afford to wait any longer to take action!‎ ‎ afford v. 承担得起；提供, 给予 ‎ afford to do sth. (常与can, be ble to连用) 买得起；有足够的……‎ e.g. We can’t afford to pay such a price. 我们付不起这个价钱。‎ ‎ Dancing affords us pleasure. 跳舞给我们带来快乐。‎ ‎2. …save electricity by turning off the lights when you leave a room. ‎ ‎ turning off 关掉 ‎ e.g. Please turn the television off before you go to bed. ‎ 睡觉前请关掉电视。‎ 拓展：turn相关短语 turn around 转身 ‎ turn up 调高（音量）‎ turn down 调低；拒绝 turn into 变成；进入 ‎ turn on 打开，发动 ‎ turn off 关掉，关闭 turn out to be 结果是 turn over 移交 V. Homework Finish the exercises in the workbook.‎ Section B 1 (1a—2e)‎ I. Revision ‎ Role-play this conversation.‎ ‎ A: I think that everyone should use public transportation.‎ ‎ B: I disagree. It’s difficult for parents with young children to use public transportation…‎ ‎ A: But we can do other things. For example, we can go to school on foot.‎ ‎ B: You are right. We should turn off the lights when we leave the room.‎ II. Leading in ‎ (1) Tell students we should do these things to protect the environment. ‎ ‎ Turn off the lights when you leave a room;‎ ‎ Stop riding in cars; ‎ Stopping using paper towels or napkins;‎ ‎ Recycle books and paper.‎ Turn off the shower while you are washing your hair.‎ You can help reduce pollution by putting that soda can in a different bin. ‎ Don’t use paper napkins.‎ ‎(2)What can we do to help save the earth? Rank these items from the easiest (1) to the most difficult(5). (1a)‎ ‎______stop riding in cars ‎ ______recycle books and paper ‎ ______turn off the lights when you leave a room ‎ ______turn off the shower while you are washing your hair ‎______don’t use paper napkins ‎(3) Compare your answers in 1a with your partner. ‎ III. Listening 1c&1d (1) Listen and check (√ ) the things that Julia and Jack talk about.‎ (2) Check ( ) the things that Julia is doing now, the things she will do in the future and the things she would never do.‎ (3) Check the answers with the whole class.‎ Things Julia and Jack talk about Things Julia is doing now Things Julia will do in the future Things Julia would never do ‎___ turning off the light ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎___ turning off the shower ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎___ stopping using paper napkins ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎___ taking your own bags ‎ ‎ when shopping.‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎___ not riding in cars ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎___ riding a bike ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎___ recycling paper ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ (4) Listen again and answer the questions below.‎ ‎①Who read a book?‎ ‎②Would Julia turn off the shower when she is washing the hair?‎ ‎③Does Jack live close to school? ‎ Get one student to write the answers on the blackboard.‎ Keys: Jack. ‎ No, she would never do that. ‎ Yes, he does.‎ IV. Practice (1) Make a conversation using the information from the chart in 1c. Say what is true for you.‎ (2) Guessing game Show some pictures to students and get them to guess what these things are made from.‎ V. Reading ‎ Use pictures to presentation the new words. ‎ (1) Read the passage and answer the questions below ‎①Who is Amy Hayes?‎ ‎②How many people are mentioned in the passage? Who are they?‎ Keys: She is a unusual woman in the UK.‎ Three. They are Amy Hayes, Jessica Wong and Wang Tao.‎ (2) Read the passage and complete the chart below.‎ Names ‎ What materials did they use?‎ What did they make?‎ Keys: ‎ Amy Hayes • windows and doors of old buildings that have been pulled down • an old boat • rocks • old glass bottles（n.瓶子）‎ a house Jessica Wong old clothes; especially old jeans bags Wang Tao iron (n. 铁) and other materials from old cars beautiful art pieces (1) Read paragraph 2 and answer the questions.‎ ‎①Did she win an award? What was it from?‎ ‎②Where did her windows and doors come from?‎ ‎③What does the sentence “she lives in a house in the UK that she built herself ‎ out of rubbish” mean?‎ ‎ Keys: ‎ ‎ Yes, she did. It was from the Help Save Our Planet Society.‎ They came from old buildings around her town that were pulled down.‎ 她住在英国，房子是她自己用废弃物建造而成。‎ (2) Read paragraph 3 and answer the questions.‎ ‎①Is Jessica Wong good at recycling? What does she do?‎ ‎②Where does she sell her bags?‎ ‎③What will she write in her book?‎ Keys: ‎ Yes, she is. She uses old clothes that people don’t wear anymore to make bags.‎ Her shop and website.‎ New ways to use old clothes.‎ (3) Read paragraph 4 and answer the questions.‎ ‎①What does Wang Tao hope to set up? Why?‎ ‎②Translate the sentence “Not only can the art bring happiness to others, but it also shows that even cold ,hard iron can be brought back to life with ‎ a little creativity .” into Chinese.‎ Keys: ‎ A “metal art” theme park. ‎ Because he wants to show people the importance of environmental protection.‎ 艺术不但可以给人们带来快乐，而且也说明只需要一点创造力，即使是 冰冷、坚硬的铁也可产生活力。‎ VI. Language points ‎1.Do you often throw away things you don’t need anymore?‎ ‎1) throw away扔掉，丢弃浪费 (机会、优势或好处)‎ e.g. I never throw anything away. 我从来不扔任何东西。 ‎ ‎2) 错过(机会等)，放过；未能很好利用(机会等)‎ e.g. Don’t throw away this opportunity. 不要错过这个机会。‎ ‎3) 浪费(时间、金钱等)乱花(钱等)‎ e.g. It will be time and money thrown away. 这将是浪费时间和金钱。 ‎ ‎2. Have you ever thought about how these things can actually be put to good use?‎ put sth. to good use 好好利用 e.g. Your creative talents can also be put to good use, if you can work up the ‎ energy. 如果你能让自己精力充沛起来，你的创作才能也能得到很好的发挥。‎ ‎3. She lives in a house in the UK that she built herself out of rubbish.‎ build/make ... out of 用……建造/制造 e.g. He built a model ship out of wood. 他用木头造了个模型船。‎ ‎ Some birds build nests out of twigs. 一些鸟用小枝筑巢 。‎ ‎4. The top of the house is an old boat turned upside down.‎ ‎ turned upside down 意为“被翻转过来的；被颠倒过来的”，做后置定语修饰boat。‎ ‎ e.g. Tony had an upside-down map of Britain on his wall. ‎ ‎ 托尼的墙上倒挂了一张英国地图。‎ ‎ The lid, turned upside down, served as a coffee table. ‎ ‎ 那个盖子被翻过来当作咖啡桌。‎ ‎5. And the gate in front of her house is made of rocks and old glass bottles.‎ be made of和be made from都表示“由……制成”，但二者的用法有区别。be made of常常表示原材料未发生化学变化，从成品中仍可看出原材料；而be made from常常表示原材料经过化学变化，从成品中看不出原材料。 ‎ e.g. The desks and chairs are made of wood. 这些课桌椅是木材制成的。‎ ‎ This kind of wine is made from wheat. 这种酒是用小麦制成的。‎ ‎6. He is known for using iron.‎ be known for 因……而著名 ‎ be known as 作为……而著名 ‎ be known to 对于某人来说是著名的 e.g. He was known for his friendly. 他以友好而著称。‎ He is known to the police as a thief. 对警察来说是一个小偷。‎ Zhou Jielun is known as a rap singer. 周杰伦是作为一个说唱歌手而出名。 ‎ ‎7. Not only can the art bring happiness to others, but it also shows that even cold, hard iron can be brought back to life with a little creativity (n. 创造力).‎ bring back 恢复；使想起；归还 not only ... but (also) ... 表示“不但……而且……”。本句中的not only位于句首，其后的主谓要部分倒装，即根据主语的人称和数以及时态的变化，将不同的助动词提到主语前，需要注意的是but (also)后面的主谓不用倒装。例如：‎ Not only did my aunt teach at school, but (also) she wrote articles for newspapers.‎ 我阿姨不仅在学校教书而且还给报纸写稿。‎ VII. Practice 2c and 2d (1) Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the phrases in the box.‎ put to good use build… out of pull down （拆下） set up known for not only… but also 1. Amy Hayes lives in the UK. Many of the old buildings in her neighborhood were _________________.‎ 1. All the rubbish and old things in Amy’s neighborhood were then ‎_______________ when Amy built her house.‎ ‎3. Amy is very creative. She _______ her front gate ___________ rocks and old glass bottles. She put an old boat on top of her house.‎ ‎4. Jessica Wong sells her bags in a small shop, but she has also ________ an online business to sell them.‎ ‎5. Though Jessica’s bags are make from old clothes, her bags are ____________ being cute and useful.‎ ‎6. Wang Tao _________ makes large pieces of metal art that look like animals or humans, __________ makes smaller pieces for the home.‎ Keys: plled down; put to good use; built out of; set up; known for; not only; but also ‎(2)Underline the words in the passage based on the words below. What are the differences?‎ ‎ think use environment usual recycle build create special recent important protect inspire keys: think – rethink special – especially ‎ use – reuse, useful recent – recently ‎ usual – unusual environment – environmental recycle – recycling important – importance build – building protect – protection create – creative; creativity inspire – inspiration ‎1. Rethink, Reuse, Recycle ! ‎ re-是最常用的前缀之一。它可以加在名词或动词前面，构成新的名词或动词。re-表示以下三方面的意义： ‎ ‎1)表示“回”或“向后”的意思。例如：return（回来）recall（回忆，召回）retract（缩回，取回） ‎ ‎2)表示“再”、“重新”、“重复”的意思。‎ ‎ 例如：rethink（再思考）reuse（再运用）restart（重新开始）recycle ‎ （再利用） ‎ ‎3)表示“相反”、“反对”的意思。‎ ‎ 例如：rebel（反叛，谋反）reverse （反转，颠倒）resist（反抗，抵抗） ‎ ‎2. She is a most unusual woman.‎ un-前缀，常加在形容词、副词、分词、动词和名词之前；第一，表示否定意义。第二，表示“反动作”。即“相反的动作”。‎ 例如： uneconomic不经济的 uncomfortable不舒服的 unending无尽的 unfortunate不幸的 unusual不平常的 unkind不仁慈的 unbind解开，释放 uncover揭开……的盖子 unearth由地下掘出 unbutton 解开钮扣 ‎ ‎3. Nothing is a waste if you have a creative mind.‎ ‎-ive是形容词后缀 一般表示有......的 create ﹢ -ive = creative ‎ ‎4. Amy recently won a prize from the Help Save Our Planet Society.‎ ‎ recent ﹢-ly = recently形容词加 ly变副词 ‎5. Amy is an inspiration (n.灵感) to us all.‎ 后缀-tion附在动词后面构成名词 ‎ ‎1)当单词最后是t, d, te, de时，变名词加tion或者ation, ition； ‎ ‎2)当单词最后是元音字母时，变名词加sion等。 ‎ ‎6. She especially likes to use old jeans to make handbags.‎ ‎ special 和especial 是同义词，‎ ‎ especially 是especial 的副词。‎ ‎7. The theme park to show people the importance of environmental protection.‎ importance是important的名词。 ‎ environmental 是environment 的形容词形式。‎ protect ﹢-ion = protection VIII. Discussion 2e Make a list of things that need to be done to save the environment. Which things can be done by common people every day? Which things have to be done by governments and organizations? Discuss these with your group.‎ Keys: ‎ Things which can be done by people every day: ‎ • take your own bags when you go shopping • spend less time in the shower • turn off the lights when you leave a room • take public transport rather than drive • avoid using air conditioners Things which have to be done by governments and organizations:‎ • educate the public • ensure that factories get rid of waste in a responsible way • preserve the forests • preserve endangered species • not allow activities that seriously endanger the environment IX. Homework Survey the students in our class.‎ Then take a class vote.‎ Do you…‎ Names ‎ recycle paper?‎ ‎ ‎ turn off lights in the house?‎ ‎ ‎ ‎…‎ Section B 2 (3a-Self Check)‎ I. Revision (1) Write down these phrases.‎ ‎ 停止乘小汽车 回收纸 用纸巾 好好利用 用垃圾建造房 倒置 经营小生意 回复，归还 旧玻璃瓶 拆下 一个有创意的大脑 开一个小店 更受欢迎的作品 给他人带来欢乐 (1) Talk about 2b with your partner.‎ II. Presentation (1) What should we do to save the earth?‎ Turn off the lights when we leave a room.‎ Take our own bags when shopping.‎ Ride a bike.‎ Recycle paper.‎ Don’t use paper napkins.‎ (2) What should governments do to save the earth?‎ ‎ They should close down the factories that put waste into the river.‎ Set up a lot of dustbins on the street.‎ Stop people from using wooden chopsticks, plastic bowls and bags.‎ Organize people to clean up the streets and rivers.‎ III. Writing ‎ ‎(1) Work on 3a. Which parts of the town/ city have a nice environment? Why are they nice? Which parts need to be improved? Why?‎ Good environment ‎ Why ‎ Bad environment ‎ Why ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ Fill in the chart about your city.‎ ‎(2) Work on 3b.‎ Write a letter to the city major about the problem and your suggestions.‎ ‎ In your letter, describe the environmental problems in your town/city.‎ ‎ ① What are the problems?‎ ‎ ② Where are they?‎ ‎ ③ What or who is causing these problems?‎ Then, give suggestions or possible ways to solve the problems.‎ Ø I think that…‎ Ø We should/ could…‎ Ø I suggest…‎ 本次写作内容是一封书信,信中首先要介绍你所在城市存在有哪些环境问题，是谁造成的这些问题，然后提出解决这些环境问题的方法和措施，可以结合3a中列举的问题和前面学过的解决办法来完成这封信。‎ ‎ One possible version ‎ Dear Sir/ Madam, ‎ Environmental problems are becoming more and more serious all over the world. With the development of the society, there are too many cars on the streets in our city. Cars have made the air unhealthy for people to breathe. Black smoke and poisonous gas are given off by factories. Factories also put waste into the river. And wherever we go, we can find rubbish.‎ Now more and more people have realized these problems. I think that governments should close down the factories and develop laws to stop people from driving cars every day. I suggest everyone in this town should help to clean up the river and the streets. We should call on everyone in the town to throw rubbish in the dustbins.‎ ‎ I hope the problem will be solved in the near future and our home will become better and better. ‎ IV. Self Check 1. ‎ Write different forms of the words. Then add more to each group.‎ ‎ v.— n. ‎ pollute --- act --- protect--- inspire ---‎ build --- create --- farm --- sing ---‎ travel--- drive --- run --- write ---‎ n.— adj.‎ fame --- wood --- science--- health ---‎ south --- care --- rain --- cloud---‎ luck --- help --- color --- day ---‎ adj.— n.‎ sunny --- noisy --- harmful --- beautiful ---‎ different --- important--- woolen ---‎ adj.— adv.‎ slow --- wide --- sudden --- real ---‎ quick --- true --- possible--- happy ---‎ loud --- quiet --- heavy --- easy ---‎ angry--- good ---‎ 1. Match each statement with the grammar structure.‎ Statement ‎ Grammar ‎ The river used to be so clean.‎ Present progressive We have seen many changes in the environment.‎ Modal verbs People should take public transportation more.‎ Passive voice The river is polluted by factories.‎ used to ‎ The air pollution is getting worse and worse.‎ Present perfect 2. ‎ Write ways to cut down on these kinds of pollution.‎ Kinds of pollution ‎ Ways to cut down water pollution land pollution ‎ noise pollution air pollution V. Homework Finish your passage of 3b.‎ Unit 14 I remember meeting all of you in Grade 7.‎ 教学目标：‎ ‎1语言目标：掌握本单元重点词汇及复习语言点。‎ ‎2 技能目标：能谈论过去和未来的生活.‎ ‎3 情感目标：珍惜初中生活的点滴，培养对高中、未来生活的憧憬。树立远大人生目标。‎ 教学重点：‎ 词汇: survey, standard, row, keyboard, method, instruction, text, level, degree, manager, gentleman, task, wing, double, shall, overcome, congratulate, caring, senior, thirsty, thankful, separate, ours, ahead 短语: in a row, look back at, make a mess, keep one’s cool, senior high, go by, believe in, first of all, be thirsty for, be thankful to sb., ahead of, along with, be responsible for, set out, separate from 句子: She helped you to worked out the answers yourself no matter how difficulty they were.‎ ‎ How have you changed since you started junior high school?‎ ‎ I’ve become much better at speaking English.‎ ‎ What are you looking forward to?‎ ‎ I’m looking forward to going to senior high school.‎ 教学难点：对过去事件的描述。‎ 课时划分：‎ Period 1 Section A 1 1a – 2d Period 2 Section A 2 3a-3c Period 3 Section A 3 Grammar Focus-4b Period 4 Section B 1 1a-2e Period 5 Section B 2 3a-Self Check Section A 1 (1a – 2d)‎ I. Warming up ‎1. Do you have any special memories of junior high school?‎ ‎2. Which teachers will you miss the most after junior high school?‎ II. Work on 1a. ‎ Check the things you remember doing at junior high school. Add more to the list.‎ Practice in pairs using the information in 1a.‎ At junior high school,‎ I remember:‎ ‎_____winning a prize ‎_____being a volunteer ‎_____doing a school survey ‎_____a friend helping me with a problem Learn the new word: survey III. Listening ‎ ‎1. Work on 1b. Listen and match the memory with the person.‎ Mary a. did homework carefully to meet the standards of a strict teacher Frank b. remembers losing a schoolbag Sarah c. remembers meeting this group of friends Peter d. has enjoyed every year of junior high school First, let Ss understand the meaning of these sentences. Then play the record. Check the answer with the Ss.‎ Learn the new word: standard ‎2. Listen again and answer the questions.‎ ‎ 1) What did Mary lose in Grade 7?‎ ‎2) Who helped her find it?‎ ‎3) What kind of person is Mr. Brown? Is he strict with students?‎ ‎4) What did Peter do to meet Mr. Brown’s standards?‎ ‎3. Work on 1c. List some memories and experiences from junior high school. Share your lists with your partner.‎ Possible answers:‎ I remember...‎ scoring two goals in a row during a soccer competition.‎ ‎ winning a basketball competition.‎ ‎ putting a plastic snake into a classmate's desk.‎ ‎ getting a wish card in Christmas Day.‎ ‎ I have...‎ learned to play the keyboard in music class.‎ learned to sing many English songs. ‎ learned to play basketball with my friends.‎ ‎ Learn some new words.‎ ‎4. Work on 2a. Listen to the conversation. Check(√) the facts you hear.‎ First, let Ss read the sentences. Then play the record and check the answer.‎ ‎______Someone didn’t like P.E.‎ ‎______Someone was advised to take a break from running by a teacher.‎ ‎______Someone had a health problem.‎ ‎______Someone joined the school band.‎ ‎______Someone liked Mr. Hunt’s teaching methods.‎ ‎5. Work on 2b. Listen again. Match each question with the name of the person.‎ Question Answer ‎____1.Who wants to study medicine?‎ a.Luke ‎____2.Who told someone to take a break from running?‎ b.Brian ‎____3.Who hurt his or her knee?‎ c.Mr. Hunt ‎____4.Who thinks the That's Life concert is the best memory?‎ d.Lisa ‎6. Listen again and fill in the blanks.‎ ‎ Lisa remembers they had a great _____ teacher. He gave clear ___________ and he was ______, too. Luke remembers when That’s life _______ at school. They wrote a _____ to the band _______ to come.‎ Junior high has been ______, but it has been a lot of __________.‎ IV. Practice ‎1. Work on 2c. Role-play a conversation in your group using the information in 2a and 2b.‎ A: Do you remember Mr. Hunt?‎ B: Of course! He is a great teacher. He gave really clear instructions during the P.E. class.‎ C: Yeah, he was kind when I hurt my knee. He told me to take a break from running.‎ Learn the new word: instruction.‎ ‎2. Work on 2d. Role-play the conversation.‎ Let Ss read the text and answer the questions.‎ ‎1) Which teachers will they miss?‎ ‎2) What subjects do the teachers teach?‎ ‎3) Why will they miss them?‎ ‎4) What will they do to thank them?‎ V. Language points ‎1. I remember scoring two goals in a row during a soccer competition.‎ ‎ in a row 连续几次地 ‎ e.g. This is the third Sunday in a row that it's rained.‎ ‎ 这是接连着的第三个星期天下雨了。‎ ‎2. … I put in more effort and my exam scores doubled.‎ ‎ double v. 加倍; 是……的两倍 ‎ adj. 两倍的; 加倍的 ‎ e.g. They bought a double bed. 他们买了一张双人床。 ‎ ‎ I think we can double our marks in one year. ‎ 我认为我们可以在一年内把成绩翻一番。‎ ‎3. Shall we get each of them a card and gift to say thank you?‎ ‎ shall modal v. 将要; 将会 ‎ e.g. Shall we all go to the film tonight?‎ ‎ 我们今晚都去看电影吗?‎ ‎ Everything shall be in good order.‎ ‎ 一切都应该井然有序。‎ ‎ I shall follow all your instructions.‎ ‎ 我一定照您的指示去做。‎ VI. Homework ‎1. Recite the conversation in 2d.‎ ‎2. Finish the exercises in the workbook. ‎ Section A 2 (3a–3b)‎ I. Revision 学校调查 school survey 连续几次地 in a row 达标 meet the standard 休息 take a break 清楚地指示 clear instructions 对某人有耐心的 be patient with sb 解决 work out 指导某人做事 guide sb to do 投入更多的努力 put in more effort II. Warming up What activities can the writer remember about his or her life in junior high?‎ I remember…‎ III. Reading ‎1. Work on 3a. Read the passage and answer the questions.‎ ‎1) What kind of writing is this? ‎ ‎2) What is the main subject of this writing?‎ 3) Who do you think the writer is?‎ ‎2. Work on 3b. Read the poem again. Write the words that rhyme with the words below.‎ things rings year _______ class ________‎ land ________ school ________ flowers ________‎ ‎3. Work on 3c. Have you experienced any of the following things? How did you feel? How does the writer feel about them?‎ ‎1) trying to be on time for morning readings ‎2) running to the dining hall when the lunch bell rings ‎3) training for sports day ‎4) starting the first day in Grade 7‎ ‎5) slowly making some new friends ‎6) helping classmates with homework ‎7) preparing for art festivals ‎8) going to New Year’s parties ‎9) learning English IV. Language points ‎1. Looking back at these past three years I remember many things Trying to be on time for morning readings Running when the lunch bell rings look back at 回顾 e.g. Every time I look back at my childhood, I cannot help missing my dear ‎ grandma. 每当回忆童年生活，我总是忍不住想念我亲爱的祖母。‎ ‎ I like to look back at my high-school days, which were among the happiest days ‎ in my life. 我喜欢回顾我的高中生活，那是我一生中最快乐的生活。‎ on time准时 in time 及时 in time和on time都可在句中作状语，但二者意思不同。‎ 选用in time或on time填空。‎ ‎1) We students should go to school ________.‎ ‎2) The doctor came _______ and saved the little boy’s life.‎ Keys: on time  in time ‎2. I remember the excitement Of the school sports day each year The many long hours of training Pride of overcoming fear excitement n. 兴奋 excite v. 激动，兴奋 excited adj. 兴奋的 exciting adj. 令人兴奋的 pride n. 自豪，骄傲 proud adj. 自豪，骄傲 不同点：‎ pride为名词，常用搭配为take pride in或be the pride of。‎ proud为形容词，常用搭配为be proud of。‎ 根据句意选用恰当的选项填空。‎ ‎1) I’m ________ (pride / proud) to be your friend.‎ ‎2) He wore his medals with ______ (pride / proud). ‎ ‎3) I’m proud _____ (of / on) my hometown.‎ ‎4) He loved his daughter and took pride _____ (of / in) her.‎ ‎5) She is the ________ (pride / proud) of China.‎ Keys: proud  pride  of  in  pride ‎ overcome v. 克服，战胜 (overcame, overcome) ‎ e.g. We can and must overcome our shortcomings.‎ ‎ 我们能够而且必须克服我们的缺点.‎ ‎3. I remember starting day one The shyest in my whole class Never speaking to anyone And thinking I would not pass remember doing sth.意为“记得做过某事”，表示动作已经发生 ‎ remember to do sth. 意为“记着去做某事”，表示动作尚未发生 ‎ 根据句意及括号内所给动词的提示填空。‎ ‎1) Remember ________ (call) us when you get there. ‎ ‎2) I remember ________ (tell) you about it last week.‎ Keys: to call  telling ‎ ‎4. Then slowly I made some new friends To remember forever Helping each other with homework Getting better together Preparing for art festivals And making a great big mess Having fun at New Year’s parties Wishing everyone the best prepare for 为......做准备 make a mess 搞得一团糟 have fun 玩得愉快= have a great time+doing wish sb the best 给某人最好的祝愿 ‎5. We have learned a different language That is from a foreign land English brings many challenges We work hard to understand And now it’s time to graduate We will leave our lovely school I can’t believe it’s been three years I’m trying to keep my cool That is from a foreign land 定语从句 keep one’s cool 沉住气；保持冷静 cool用作名词。‎ e.g. “I must keep my cool,” she thought. “Losing my temper isn’t going to help.”‎ ‎ 她想：“我要保持冷静，发脾气是不会起作用的。”‎ keep one’s cool意思相似的有keep cool。‎ e.g. Keep cool! 保持冷静！‎ 注意：‎ keep cool中的cool用作形容词，而keep one’s cool中的cool为名词。‎ ‎6. But it’s difficult not to cry I’ll miss the school trees and flowers And our kind and caring teachers Wonderful memories of ours care adj. 体贴人的；关心他人的 V. Homework Read the poem after class.‎ Remember the language points.‎ ‎ ‎ Section A 3 (Grammar focus-4b)‎ I. Revision 回顾 look back at 弄得一团乱 make a mess 沉住气 keep one's cool 准时 on time 以......为自豪 take pride of ‎ 记得做了某事 remember doing sth 为......做准备 prepare for II. Grammar focus. Read the sentences and understand them.‎ Translate the sentences.‎ ‎1. 在七年级发生了什么特别的事?‎ ‎ ______ _________ in Grade 7 that was special?‎ ‎ 我们队赢得了学校篮球赛。‎ ‎ Our team won the ______ __________ _____________.‎ ‎2. 自你开始读初中以来，你有怎样的变化？‎ ‎ How _____ you ________ since you started junior high school?‎ ‎ 我更擅长说英语了。‎ ‎ I've become much better at _________ _________.‎ ‎3. 你认为高中会有什么不同？‎ ‎ How do you think things will ‎ ‎ ___ ________ ___ senior high school?‎ ‎ 我认为我会更加努力为考试作准备。‎ ‎ I think that I’ll have to _____ _____ ______ for exams. ‎ ‎4. 明年你有什么计划？‎ ‎ _____ ____ _____ ______ for next year?‎ ‎ 我要参加学校排球队。‎ ‎ I’m going to _____ the school volleyball team.‎ ‎5. 你记得八年级的什么事吗？‎ ‎ What do you remember about Grade 8?‎ ‎ 我记得当过志愿者。‎ ‎ I remember _____ ___ ________.‎ ‎6. 你过去常做但是现在不做的事？‎ ‎ What ___ ___ ___ __ __ that you don't do now?‎ ‎ 我过去常上舞蹈课，但是现在不了。‎ ‎ I used to ____ _____ _______, but I don’t anymore.‎ ‎7. 你期盼着什么？‎ ‎ What are you _______ _______ ___?‎ ‎ 我盼望着能进入高中。‎ ‎ I'm looking forward to going to senior high school.‎ III. Work on 4a. Number the sentences to make a paragraph.‎ ‎_____When I get to senior high, I will join the school swim team.‎ ‎__1__My time in junior high school has been enjoyable.‎ ‎_____In Grade 8, I studied harder but I still got poor grades in English. I had problems with pronunciation and reading texts. So the next year, I worked much harder and got better grades.‎ ‎_____ Next year, I will be in senior high school. I can’t believe how fast the time went by!‎ ‎_____This year, with Mr. Trent’s help, my English level has been improving and I hope to get good grades at the end of the year.‎ ‎_____In the first year, I didn’t work very hard in class, but I joined many different school clubs and had a lot of fun.‎ IV. Work on 4b. Write your own answers to the questions.‎ Let Ss finish the exercises first. Then let Ss check the answers with their partners. And ask some Ss to speak out their answers.‎ ‎1. What do you remember about Grade 7?‎ ‎ _________________________________‎ ‎2. What happened in Grade 8 that was special?‎ ‎ __________________________________‎ ‎3. What did you use to do that you don’t do now?‎ ‎ ___________________________________‎ ‎4. How have you changed since you started junior high school?‎ ‎___________________________________‎ ‎5. How do you think things will be different in senior high school?‎ ‎___________________________________‎ ‎6. What are your plans for next year?‎ ‎ ___________________________________‎ ‎7. What are you looking forward to?‎ ‎ ___________________________________‎ V. Homework Review the grammar focus.‎ Section B 1 (1a-2e)‎ I. Revision 发生什么事了? What happened?‎ 擅长于be good at 与......不同be different in 考试复习study for exams 过去常常used to do 上舞蹈课take dance lessons 期盼look forward to ‎(时间)逝去, 消逝go by 希望做hope to do II. Discussion Let Ss talk about their dream jobs.‎ Talk with your partner about what you would like to do in the future?‎ A: What do you hope to do in the future?‎ B: I hope to get a business degree and become a manager.‎ III. Work on 1a. ‎ Write about what you would like to do in the future.‎ ‎1. get a business degree and become a manager ‎2. ____________________________________‎ ‎3. ____________________________________‎ ‎ Possible answers: ‎ 1. get a business degree and become a manager 2. become an English or Chinese teacher 3. become an astronaut or a doctor IV. Pair work Talk about what you hope to do in the future. ‎ A: What do you hope to do in the future?‎ B: I hope to …‎ V. Listening ‎1. 1c Listen to a class discussion. Check the hopes you hear.‎ ‎ 1) Write down the job name according to the pictures.‎ ‎ 2) Play the record and check the answers.‎ ‎ 1d Listen again and complete the passage.‎ ‎ 1) Let Ss understand the passage and write down some words meaning.‎ Today is the students’ last class. Bob feels ______ about it and thinks Mrs. Chen’s classes have been ______. The students talk about what they want to do in the future. Bob hopes to _____ the exam to get into senior high school. Shirley wants to get into a _______ school. ‎ Ken is good at _______ and he won a _____ for it. So he wants to be a(n) _________.‎ Mrs. Chen believes in all of them and tells them to “___________”. To celebrate the end of junior high, they are having a ________. They ask Mrs. Chen to come, and she is happy to accept the invitation.‎ ‎ 2) Play the tape. Check some of the answers but without making sure them all.‎ ‎ 3) Play the tape again. Let Ss listening carefully and pay attention to not sure part above. Check the answers. ‎ Answers: sad great pass music science prize astronaut go for it party VI. Practice. ‎ ‎ Prepare a speech for your graduation. Use the questions to help you.‎ ‎ Present your speech to your group.‎ ‎ How have you changed since you started junior high school?‎ Who has helped you most?‎ What advice have your parents given you?‎ What will you do after you graduate?‎ What are you looking forward to?‎ ‎ 1) Let Ss answer the questions one by one.‎ ‎ 2) Ask Ss to write down a passage according to the information above.‎ ‎ 3) Let some Ss read it out. ‎ VII. 2a Discussion What is the most important thing you have learned in junior high school? Discuss the question with a partner.‎ VIII. Reading ‎ ‎ 1. 2b Read the passage and answer the questions.‎ ‎1) What kind of text is this? Is it a story, a speech or a notice?‎ ‎2) Who do you think wrote it?‎ ‎3) Who is it for?‎ ‎ Possible answers:‎ It is a speech.‎ The principal of the school is probably the person who wrote it.‎ It is for the graduating students of the school.‎ ‎2. 2c Read the passage again and answer the questions. ‎ ‎ 1) What were the students like in Grade7? ‎ ‎ 2) How have the students changed? ‎ ‎ 3) Who should the students thank and why? ‎ ‎ 4) What will senior high be like? ‎ ‎ 5) How should the students deal with the future?‎ ‎ 6) What advice would you give to students who are just starting junior high ‎ ‎ school? ‎ ‎ Key: 1) They were all so full of energy and thirsty for knowledge.‎ ‎ 2) They are now talented young adults who are full of hope for the ‎ future.‎ ‎ 3) Their should thank the important people in their lives – their parents, teachers and friends – because these are the people who have helped and supported them. ‎ ‎ 4) Life in senior high will be harder and they will have many difficult tasks ahead of them.‎ ‎ 5) They should learn from their mistakes and never give up, choose wisely and be responsible for their own decisions and actions, and not forget where they came from.‎ ‎ 3. 2d Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the words in the box. ‎ ‎ attend be thirsty for none set out be proud of ‎1) It is time to say goodbye, but _______ of us want to leave.‎ ‎2) It is always hard to separate from those whom you have spent so much time with for the past three years. However, we are still excited to ___________on a new journey when we enter senior high school.‎ ‎3) The teacher can see in our eyes that we ______________ knowledge. She tells us that knowledge will give us wings to fly.‎ ‎4) We will _____________ the junior high graduation ceremony tomorrow. It is a very special time for us.‎ ‎5) Our teachers and parents will __________ us because we have grown up and can be responsible for ourselves.‎ Key: 1) none 2) set out 3) are thirsty 4) attend 5) be proud of ‎2e Underline the sentences you like in the passage. Tell your partner what they mean and why you like them.‎ X. Language points 1. Thank you for coming today to attend the graduation ceremony at No. 3 Junior H igh ‎ ‎ graduation ceremony 毕业典礼 1. You were all so full of energy and thirsty for knowledge.‎ ‎ be full of 充满...‎ ‎ e.g. Her life was full of excitement. 她的生活充满激动人心的事情。‎ ‎ be thirsty for 渴望，渴求 ‎ e.g. He was thirsty for power. 他渴望拥有权力。‎ 3. ‎ Some of you were a little difficult to deal with!‎ ‎ deal with 处理，对付 ‎ e.g. I have a matter of importance to deal with.我有要事要处理。‎ XI. Homework Write about what you have gotten in the junior high school and your plan in ‎ the senior high school.‎ Section B 2 (3a—Self Check)‎ I. Revision 对某人心存感激be thankful to sb.‎ 连同along with 对......有责任be responsible for 渴求，渴望be thirsty for ‎（时间）过去go by 弄得一团乱make a mess 沉住气；保持冷静keep one's cool 骄傲 be proud of 出发；启程set out 犯错make mistakes 放弃give up 在......之前ahead of 充满…...be full of ‎ 处理deal with 成长grow up 学校调查school survey 连续几次地in a row 达标meet the standard 休息take a break 清楚地指示clear instructions 对某人有耐心的be patient with sb 解决work out 指导某人做事guide sb to do 投入更多的努力put in more effort Ⅱ. Writing ‎1. Work on 3a. Think of a person or an event from junior high school that you will never forget. Make some notes about how this person or event changed your life in some way.‎ Who is the person? / What is the event?‎ When and where did you first meet this person?/ When and where did this event happen?‎ How did you feel when you met this person?/ How did you feel when this event happened?‎ How did this person help you?/ What happened later?‎ How has this person’s advice/event changed your life?‎ ‎2. Work on 3b. Write a passage about the person or vent you thought abut in 3a.‎ Describe the person/event.‎ Explain how you feel about this person/event.‎ Describe how this person/event has changed your life.‎ 写作指导：‎ ‎1. 写中学生活中的难忘的人/事。‎ ‎2. 事件要有五要素：when, where, who, what, how, why ‎3. 最后阐述这件事对自己所产生的影响。‎ Sample writing ‎ Te one person from my junior high school days that I will never forget is Mrs. Wong, my English teacher in Grade 7.‎ ‎ When I first started Grade 7, I was shy and did not dare t speak to anyone. My English was not very good and I felt nervous when I had to answer questions in class. I would have problems speaking even though I knew the answer. I felt quite unhappy with myself.‎ One day Mrs. Wong spoke to me after class. She encouraged me to speak slowly. She also told me that she believed I could speak well if I practise more. I was touched by what she said and it made me work harder on my speaking skills.‎ Mrs. Wong continued to encourage me and I became even more confident. I improved so much that I won an English speech contest that year! I will always be grateful to Mrs. Wong for her advice and support. ‎ Ⅲ. Self-Check 1. What happened in junior high that made you have these feelings? Complete the chart.‎ Feelings Memories/experiences excited Our class won the sports meeting.‎ happy My friends hold a birthday party for me.‎ worried I didn't finish my homework and my teachers were strict.‎ sad I lost my living cost.‎ tired I was tired after staying up late to study.‎ proud I got the first in the final examination.‎ shy I fell down in front of my classmates on the playground.‎ ‎2. Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the verbs in brackets.‎ I can’t believe (believe) that today is the last day of junior high school. I still remember (remember) the first day of Grade 7 like it was yesterday. I used to be (be) a really shy person, so on the first day of junior high, I was(be) so scared and ‎ nervous. ‎ I _thought (think) that I would never make any friends. But now, I realize (realize) that I was just being silly. Since then, I have made (make) so many good friends and I have shared (share) so many good memories with them. Even though I _am_ (be) sad that junior high is over, I _am looking_ (look) forward to new experiences in senior high!‎ Ⅳ. Homework Finish your passage in 3b.‎ 新目标九年级上学期期末测试卷 一、听力（共25分）‎ I. 根据所听到的句子，选择正确的答语。（5分）‎ ‎( )1. A. February. B. Monday. C. Weekday.‎ ‎( )2. A. At 6:00 am. B. At 5:00 pm. C. At school.‎ ‎( )3. A. It’s on the floor. B. It’s red. C. You’re right.‎ ‎( )4. A. She’ll be a doctor. B. He’s a worker. C. I’ll be a reporter.‎ ‎( )5. A. Changchun. B. China. C. USA.‎ Ⅱ．听简短对话和对话后的问题，选择正确答案。（5分）‎ ‎( )6. A. Awful. B. Boring. C. Relaxed.‎ ‎( )7. A. By bus. B. On foot. C. By car.‎ ‎( )8. A. The water aquarium. B. The Children's Palace. C. The Great Wall.‎ ‎( )9.A. 12 yuan. B.36 yuan. C.24 yuan. ‎ ‎( )10.A. Her sister. B. Her parent. C. Her friend.‎ Ⅲ．听描述，选出与其相符的图片。其中有一幅图片是多余的。（5分）‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ A B C ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ D E F ‎11. ________ 12. ________ 13. _________ 14. ________ 15. _________‎ Ⅳ．听较长对话，选择正确答案。（5分）‎ 听第一段对话，作答第16 ~ 17小题。‎ ‎( )16. What food would the man like?‎ ‎ A. Fish and meat. B. Meat and beer. C. Beef and vegetables.‎ ‎( )17. How much is the beer?‎ ‎ A. Thirty-five yuan. B. Forty yuan. C. Five yuan.‎ 听第二段对话，作答第18 ~ 20小题。‎ ‎( )18. How many tests should the boy take before the big exam?‎ ‎ A．2． B．3． C．4．‎ ‎( )19. Why does the boy feel nervous?‎ ‎ A. Because he can do nothing with the exam. ‎ B. Because he doesn't know what to do.‎ ‎ C. Because he is worrying about the exam.‎ ‎( )20. What will the boy do to relax himself?‎ ‎ A. To make himself busy. B. To listen to light music. C. To try to do many things.‎ V．听短文, 选择正确答案。（5分）‎ ‎( )21. How does Tony like his daily life in Grade 9?‎ ‎ A. Very relaxing. B. Very busy. C. Very interesting.‎ ‎( )22. Where does Tony spend most of his time on weekdays?‎ ‎ A. At school. B. At home. C. In a swimming club.‎ ‎( )23. How long does Tony study on weekends?‎ ‎ A. About four hours. B. About five to six hours. C. We don't know.‎ ‎( )24. When did Tony use to go to bed?‎ ‎ A. At 8:00 pm. B. At 9:00 pm. C. At 10:00 pm.‎ ‎( )25. What did Tony usually do in the past ?‎ A. He watched TV, did homework and sang. ‎ B. He did homework, talked and cooked.‎ C. He watched TV, talked online and played basketball.‎ 二、基础知识（共25分）‎ VI.根据句意及汉语提示完成句子。（5分）‎ ‎26. We can buy some __________in the post office.‎ ‎27. What’s your e-mail __________? I want to send the work plan to you.‎ ‎28. These rings look quite pretty. They are all __________ of silver.‎ ‎29. You will __________ the examinations if you don’t work hard.‎ ‎30. The sun is rising in the __________ and it’s very beautiful.‎ VII.用括号内所给单词的适当形式填空。（5分）‎ ‎31. My parents take___________ (proud) in everything good that I do. ‎ ‎32. I believe these suggestions are _________ (help)to us.‎ ‎33. He’d like to be a good __________ (speak) in public.‎ ‎34. It is _________ (polite) to talk loudly to the old.‎ ‎35. Mike is no more afraid of the dark and he ________ (dare) to be alone in the dark.‎ VIII．单项选择。（15分）‎ ‎( )36. There is ________ supermarket down the street and you can buy some food.‎ ‎ A. the B. an C. a D. /‎ ‎( )37. We get up so early that we are __________ late for school.‎ ‎ A. seldom B. always C. sometimes D. often ‎( )38.Paul used to_________ computer games after school, but now he doesn’t.‎ ‎ A. playing B. plays C. play D. played ‎( )39. The bookstore is on the _________ floor, between the flower store and the bank.‎ ‎ A. one B. thirds C. four D. second ‎( )40. The silent boy has learned how to _________his shyness.‎ ‎ A. take care of B. deal with C. come on D. turn left ‎( )41. You__________ a lot in the past few years.‎ ‎ A. changed B. has changed C. have changed D. had changed ‎( )42.He becomes famous now and gets tons of ________ everywhere he goes.‎ ‎ A. postcard B. attention C. introduction D. courses ‎( )43.--- Excuse me, sir. Where is my chair?‎ ‎ --- It’s in the front of the classroom, just________ the door. ‎ ‎ A. under B. in C. beside D. between ‎( )44. Mario is so weak that he is often_________ from classes.‎ ‎ A. convenient B. absent C. private D. direct ‎( )45. It has been two and a half years _________ we left our primary school.‎ ‎ A. because B. than C. unless D. since ‎( )46. Most of us love reading books on _________ history.‎ ‎ A. France B. Africa C. Asian D. Germany ‎( )47. Linda still plays the piano from time to time,_________?‎ ‎ A. isn’t she B. can’t she C. didn’t she D. doesn’t she ‎( )48. Could you please tell me __________?‎ ‎ A. where is the guard B. how far is it C. when KFC closes D. what was it ‎( )49. Li Xing no more causes __________ problems in school.‎ ‎ A. some B. any C. a little D. much ‎( )50. Which picture means “ He’s giving a speech.”?‎ ‎ ‎ A. B. C D 三、交际运用（共5分）‎ IX.根据对话内容及方框中所给的句子补全对话。选项中有一项是多余选项。‎ A: Excuse me, could you tell me how to get to the Longjia Airport from here?‎ B: First, walk down this street, then turn right at the second crossing, next…‎ A: Wait a minute, please.(51)__________‎ B: OK, next go straight until you see a bus stop.(52)__________‎ A: Do you know how long it takes to get there by bus?‎ B: About 50 minutes.(53)__________ You’d better take a taxi.‎ A: (54)__________‎ B: You can stand here and wait for a taxi.‎ A: How long does it take to go there for taxi?‎ B: I think it will take about half an hour .‎ A:(55)__________‎ B: You are welcome.‎ A. Sorry, I don’t know.‎ B. You can take a bus there.‎ C. It’s pretty far from here.‎ D. Let me write it down in my notebook.‎ E. Where can I take a taxi?‎ F. Thank you for your kindness.‎ 四、阅读（共45分）‎ X.完形填空。（15分）‎ Lisa and Mike were celebrating their anniversary(周年纪念日).The couple used to be sweet. But now 56 had changed since they got married. The once lovely couple had turned bitter（痛 苦）.They fought over every little thing. 57 of them hated the way things had changed.‎ Lisa was 58 for Mike to come home. She hoped that Mike would remember their anniversary. She 59 imagined that her husband would bring her flowers. In this 60 , they could remember the old happiness again and forget the unhappiness. But her imagination was cut short when the phone in the bedroom 61 .‎ Lisa answered to the sound of a man. "Hello madam, I'm calling from the police station. Do you know Mike Green?” “Yes, he is my 62 .” “I'm sorry madam but there was a traffic accident and the man has 63 . We got this 64 from his wallet. We need you to come and identify (辨认 ) his body.”‎ Lisa was shocked! 65 could this happen! She lay and cried 66 the floor in pain. She lost her husband. Forever! 67 , there was a noise at the doorway. The door opened and Mike came in. "My dear, it's a 68 day today. My wallet was stolen."‎ ‎"That's the best 69 I've ever heard," Lisa said 70 a smile as her eyes were watering.‎ ‎56．A. others B. things C. habits D. friendship ‎57．A. All B. One C. None D. Both ‎58．A. searching B. singing C. waiting D. starting ‎59．A. even B. seldom C. hardly D. never ‎60．A. time B. day C. way D. fact ‎61．A. sounded B. rang C. knocked D. made ‎62．A. brother B. husband C. friend D. wife ‎63．A. lost B. arrived C. died D. hurt ‎64．A. number B. money C. e-mail D. letter ‎65．A. How B. When C. Where D. What ‎66．A. above B. on C. beside D. to ‎67．A. Unluckily B. Slowly C. Quietly D. Suddenly ‎68．A. nice B. bad C. cool D. warm ‎69．A. news B. advice C. lie D. gift ‎70．A. with B. has C. without D. on XI. 阅读理解。（30分）‎ ‎(A)‎ When I was a boy, I was a football fan. I always played football with some other boys in the backyard all the time. My mom was worried that I would get ill in the hot summer.‎ One day my brother gave me a new football. I came into the yard and played it excitedly. But suddenly, the ball flew through the window and nearly hit my dad. Dad said nothing. He took my football and cut it in half.‎ I didn’t cry because I knew how terrible my mistake was. I didn’t expect to get another football. But to my surprise, Dad bought another one the next month and told me to be more careful. I was really thankful for my father’s forgiveness(宽恕).He showed me that even when I made a mistake, he still loved me and gave me another chance.‎ Parents always give us their unconditional(无条件的)love and forgiveness. We should always give our love and forgiveness to them, too.‎ 根据短文内容,选择最佳答案。（5分） ‎ ‎( ) 71.The writer played football in the backyard all the time because________. ‎ ‎ A. he was easy to get ill B. his father was a football player ‎ C. he was a football fan D. his mother was worried about him ‎( ) 72.How did the writer feel when he got the football from his brother?‎ ‎ A. Sad. B. Worried. C. Terrible. D. Excited.‎ ‎( ) 73.The writer didn’t cry because ___________.‎ ‎ A. he knew his mistake B. his father cut the football in half ‎ C. his father was very happy D. he hit his father ‎ ‎( ) 74.After his dad bought him another football, the writer__________.‎ ‎ A. forgot his mistake B. was angry ‎ C. was thankful to his father D. didn’t like it ‎( ) 75.What can we learn from the story?‎ ‎ A. We should learn to play football.‎ ‎ B. We should play football with our parents.‎ ‎ C. We shouldn’t make mistakes.‎ ‎ D. We should give our love and forgiveness to our parents.‎ ‎(B)‎ Charles Chaplin was born in London on April 16, 1889. His parents were music hall actors. The Chaplin family were very poor and their life was difficult in London. Charles Chaplin used to do his mother’s job when she was ill.‎ When he was only 17 years old, Chaplin got his first real job as an actor. What he did was to do silly things to make people laugh in the theater. Seven years later he went to the USA. And over the next four years, he formed his own way of art. He developed the character of a homeless gentleman which became very popular.‎ From the 1920s to the 1950s, Chaplin made his most famous film. The film Modern Times (1936) shows his care about the modern industry workers. Many of his films describe the poor life and hard time of the working time of the people during that period.‎ Although Charles Chaplin was British, he lived in the USA until 1953.But he never got American nationality(国籍). Then Chaplin, his wife and his five children had to move to Switzerland where he lived until he died. When he was 83 years old, he won his only Oscar for the music he wrote for the movie Limelight. He was named Sir Charles Chaplin at the age of 85. Charles Chaplin died in Switzerland on December 25th, 1975.‎ 根据短文内容,选择最佳答案。（5分） ‎ ‎( ) 76.Chaplin used to ___________ when his mother was ill.‎ ‎ A. look after her B. do the housework ‎ C. do his mother’s job D. do his father’s job ‎ ‎( ) 77.Which of the following is TRUE ?‎ ‎ A. Chaplin went to the USA when he was 24 years old.‎ ‎ B. Chaplin became famous when he was 17 years old.‎ ‎ C. Chaplin did silly things to make people laugh in the street.‎ ‎ D. People liked Chaplin because he was homeless.‎ ‎( ) 78.__________,Chaplin made his most famous films.‎ ‎ A. From 1889 to 1936 B. From the 1920s to the 1950s ‎ C. From 1953 to 1975 D. From the 1950s to the 1980s ‎( ) 79. Chaplin died in _____________.‎ ‎ A. London B. the USA C. Switzerland D. Canada ‎ ‎( ) 80.Chaplin won the Oscar for ___________ when he was 83 years old.‎ ‎ A. the art B. the music C. the acting D. the film ‎(C) ‎ The class in the America is almost the same as that in China. But something is different. In America, if the teacher asks you a question but you don’t understand, you should put up your hand and ask the teacher to repeat. If you don’t know the answer, it is all right to tell the teacher you don’t know. Then he or she knows what you need to learn. You mustn’t be absent on a test day. If you are seriously ill, call and let the teacher know you will not be there for the test. If your teacher allows a make-up test(补考), you should take the test in one or two days after you go back to school. Be on time! It is impolite to be late. If you come in late, be sure to do it quietly. Take your books out of your bag after you enter the room. Then go to your seat and sit down quietly. In the US, you needn’t knock before you come into the classroom. If you have to leave during the class, do it quietly, too. You don’t need to ask the teacher’s agreement.‎ 阅读短文，判断正误。（T/F）(5分)‎ ‎( ) 81. When a teacher asks you a question, you should repeat the question.‎ ‎( ) 82. Although a student is sick and can’t take the test, he is not allowed to take a make-up test.‎ ‎( ) 83.It is impolite for a student to get to school late.‎ ‎( ) 84. In the US, you need to knock before you com into the classroom.‎ ‎( ) 85. One can leave the classroom without the teacher’s agreement.‎ ‎ (D)‎ 下面(a)栏是五位同学倾诉的烦恼，(b)栏是专家给他们提供的解决方案，请为各位同学选择合适的方案，并将答案的字母编号填写在题前的括号内。（5分）‎ ‎(a)‎ ‎( )86. I enjoy eating very much. I’m getting fatter and fatter. What can I do?‎ ‎( )87. Lily’s English is poor while mine is very good. She often asks me for help with it. I’m also glad to. But some of my classmates think I’m falling into love with her. I feel unhappy about this.‎ ‎( )88 Since we have moved to the new school, I only can go home once a week. I miss my parents so much that it makes my study worse and worse. ‎ ‎( )89. Some years ago, I saw some of my friends smoking. I also tried. Now, I can’t be happy without smoking. I feel very upset.‎ ‎( )90. My father has lost his job and my mother is ill seriously. We have spent a lot of money because of it. It’s hard for me to go on with my study at school.‎ ‎(b)‎ A. Don’t eat too much junk food. Do more sports.‎ B. Try writing a letter to your headmaster and tell him about your difficulty. He may try to find a rich man to help you with your problem.‎ C. Don’t think in that way. You will live alone sooner or later. You should try to be used to the new life in school.‎ D.I don’t think you really fall into love with her. In fact, this is only friendship between classmates. You may talk with your teacher about this and let your teacher talk with those classmates.‎ E. I never think it is good to smoke. You are still a student. You should try to stop it. Maybe you aren’t able to stop it within a short time, but just try hard, and you will see the good result!‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ (E)‎ Everyone may play a joke on others on April Fool’s Day. And my father did last April Fool’s Day.‎ It was Sunday and we were all sitting at the table when father suddenly smiled and said to us, “Oh, dear, I forget to tell you the good news. There’s a letter from Granny. She is coming to see us this afternoon. I’m going to meet her at the station.” With these words he went out.‎ How happy we were! We hadn’t seen Granny for nearly a year and we missed her very much. After lunch, my mother and I went shopping. We bought a lot of food that Granny like. My sister cleaned the house. It was four o’clock when we finished and we sat around the table, waiting for Granny. At last the door opened and came in my father, alone.‎ ‎“Where’s Granny?” we asked.‎ Father laughed and said,“April Fools! Today is April Fool’s Day.”‎ ‎ We were disappointed after we heard this, but we all laughed. ‎ 根据短文内容,回答下列问题。（10分）‎ ‎91. When do people like to play jokes?‎ ‎92. Where did my father say that he was going to meet my Granny?‎ ‎93.How long hadn’t we seen Granny?‎ ‎94. Who came in when the door opened?‎ ‎95.Did my Granny come?‎ 五、书面表达（共20分）‎ XII.(A) 根据文章内容补全所缺单词，每空一词。（5分）‎ Jack Ma is the chief executive officer (CEO) of Alibaba Group. He is a 96 businessman. He was 97 in the city of Hangzhou in 1964, and grew up there. Ma 98 to be an English teacher in a university when he was young. Later on, he made a 99 to build websites for Chinese companies. 100 the help of friends in the US, he succeeded. Now many people know his Alibaba Group and Ma is also famous all over the world.‎ ‎（B）朋友是我们生活中不可或缺的一部分。朋友可以在失败时给你安慰；在你成功时和你一起分享快乐。请你以Good friends light your way bright《好朋友照亮你前进的路》为题，写一篇短文。(15分)‎ 提示： 1.表达你对朋友的看法。‎ ‎2.你为什么会这样认为呢？通过自身经历，阐明观点。‎ ‎3.提出你的希望或祝福。‎ 要求： 1.内容完整，语句通顺，书写工整。‎ ‎2.文中不得出现真是人名或校名；‎ ‎3.不得少于80词。‎ 九年级英语期中考试试题附参考答案 ‎（时间：90分钟，满分 120分）‎ 温馨提示:亲爱的同学们,请你们在这次测试中做到细心、用心、‎ 安心、耐心，考出你们应有的水平。祝你们成功！‎ ‎（请将答案写在对应题号的答题纸上）‎ 一. 单项选择：（共20小题；每小题1分，满分20分)‎ ‎( )1. How nice the fish tastes! Could you tell me who taught you to cook it?‎ ‎ To be honest, I learnt it ______watching TV. I learn to cook many dishes______TV.‎ ‎ A. by; in B. by; on C. in; on D. in; in ‎( )2. The boy studies very hard. He always pay attention to___ to his teachers in class.‎ ‎ A. listen B. listens C. listening D. to listen ‎( )3. I don’t know how ________this computer.‎ ‎ A. use B. to use C. used D. uses ‎( )4. —My teachers often encourage me___more friends but I find it difficult.　　‎ ‎ —Your teachers’ idea is right. The more friends you make, ______ you will be.‎ ‎ A. to make; the more happy B. to make; happier ‎ C. making; the happier D. to make; the happier ‎( )5. He was so______when he heard the______news that he got the first prize in ‎ ‎ the contest.‎ ‎ A. exciting, exciting B. exciting, excited ‎ C. excited, excited D. excited, exciting ‎( )6. His grandparents live _______ in a small house, but he don’t feel________.‎ ‎ A. lonely alone B. alone lonely C. lonely Lonely D. alone alone ‎ ‎( )7.What about ______ to practice pronunciation?‎ ‎ A read loudly B read aloud C read loud D reading aloud ‎( )8. Could you tell me yesterday?‎ ‎ A. when did you arrive B. when do you arrive ‎ ‎ C. when you arrived D. when you arrive ‎( )9. bad news it is !‎ ‎ A. What a B. What C. How D. How a ‎ ‎( )10. — Could you tell me____ about Valentine’s Day in Japan?‎ ‎ — Well, not only adults but children celebrate it.‎ ‎ A. something B. anything C. everything D. Nothing ‎( )11. — Will we go shopping tomorrow?‎ ‎ — Maybe We will go to the mall if it ____sunny. But I don’t know if Mary _____with us.‎ ‎ A. will be, will go B. is , go C. is , will go D. will be , goes ‎( )12. I keep _________ a diary in English .‎ ‎ A. write B. to write C. wrote D. writing ‎( )13. You don’t have to worry me. I’m old enough to __________ myself.‎ ‎ A. look for B. look up C. take care of D. care of ‎( )14. Her son_______Coke，but now he________milk. ‎ ‎ A. used to drink, is used to drinking B. used to drinking , drinks ‎ C. is used to drinking, used to drink D. is used to drinking,drinks ‎( )15. They won’t go to school tomorrow.They’ll go to the park _________.‎ ‎ A. instead B.instead of C. besides D. Either ‎( )16. On Christmas Eve, my father often Father Christmas and give us gifts.‎ ‎ A.dresses up B. dresses in C. dresses up as D. dress like ‎( )17. Mary is ________ girl.She lives with her grandmother. ‎ ‎ A. a 8-years-old B. a 8-year-old C.an 8-year-old D. An 8 years old ‎ ‎( )18. His mother used to get up early, __________?‎ ‎ A.did she B.didn’t she C. does she D.doesn’t she ‎( )19. He suggested ________ by plane,but I thought it would cost too much.‎ ‎ A. go B.goes C. going D. to go ‎( )20. — I am going back to America for Thanksgiving Day. ‎ ‎ —____. And we will miss you.‎ ‎ A. Have a good time B. You’re welcome ‎ C. That’s interesting D. The same to you 二. 完型填空（本题共10小题，每小题1分，共计10分）‎ ‎ Now more than 40 million (百万) foreigners around the world are learning Chinese, according to a report. The relationship (关系) between the United States and China is becoming 21 . It has really 22 the growth of Chinese language learning in the US.‎ ‎ I am Chris from the US. I am one of the many people learning 23 . I am studying at a Confucius institute (孔子学院) in New York. There are 10 24 in our class. Some are over 30 years old. Some are middle school students. Our Chinese teacher 25 Beijing. He often tells us some interesting things in China.‎ ‎ I think Chinese is 26 to learn. The biggest challenge for American learners is the writing. Chinese is 27 different from any other language in the world. ‎ ‎ It will 28 me a lot of time to learn enough Chinese characters (汉字). But I think there are many advantages of spending time 29 the language. One big advantage is that it makes me see things from a different point of view, 30 Chinese is such a different language from English. ‎ ‎ I think for American students the most important advantage is that learning a different language can open up their mind. ‎ ‎( )21. A. worse B. poorer C. friendlier D. politer ‎( )22. A. stopped B. practiced C. started D. influenced ‎( )23. A. English B. Chinese C. French D. Japanese ‎( )24. A. students B. workers C. teachers D. volunteers ‎ ‎( )25. A. comes to B. leaves for C. goes around D. comes from ‎( )26. A. easy B. surprised C. difficult D. boring ‎( )27. A. slowly B. quickly C. easily D. completely ‎ ‎( )28. A. get B. take C. spend D. waste ‎( )29. A. on B. in C. at D. with ‎( )30. A. if B. because C. while D. when 三.阅读理解（本题共15小题，每小题2分，共计30分）‎ A ‎ ‎ Mobile phone (手机)has become a problem for middle schools. Some middle schools in Australia have banned (禁止) students from carrying mobile phones during school hours.‎ ‎ Mobile phone use among children has become a problem for the schools this year. Several children have got mobile phones as Christmas presents, and more students want them.‎ ‎ Mary Bluett, an official(官员), said mobile phone use is a distraction(分心) to students during school hours and it also gives teachers so much trouble in their classrooms. Teachers were also saying that sometimes students might use phone messages to cheat during exams.‎ ‎ She said some schools had tried to ban (禁止) mobile phones. Some parents felt unhappy, because they couldn’t get in touch with their children.‎ ‎ Many teachers said students should not have mobile phones at school, but if there was a good reason, they could leave their phones at school office. They also said there were many reasons why the students should not have mobile phones at school; they were easy to lose and were a distraction(分心) from studies.‎ Many people say that they understand why parents would like their children to have phones, but they think schools should let the students know when they can use their mobile phones.‎ ‎（ ）31. Some middle schools in Australia have banned students from carrying mobile phones ‎ ‎ __________.‎ ‎ A. because they are students B. when they are free ‎ C. when they are at school D. because they are children ‎（ ）32. We know from the passage(文章) that some children get mobile phones from_______ ‎ ‎ A. the makers and sellers B. the passers-by and strangers ‎ C. their parents and friends D. some mobile phone users ‎（ ）33. What does the word “cheat” mean in the passage in Chinese?‎ ‎ A. 聊天 B.核对 C.查询 D. 作弊 ‎（ ）34. Some parents felt unhappy because they couldn’t________ during school hours.‎ ‎ A. use their mobile phones B. leave their mobile phones at school office ‎ C. help the teachers with their work D. get in touch with their children ‎（ ）35. The passage tells us that_______.‎ ‎ A. students shouldn’t have mobile phones at school except for some special reasons ‎ B. it is impossible to ban students from using mobile phone at school ‎ C. some parents felt unhappy because they couldn’t use their phones at school ‎ D. parents should teach their children how to use mobile phones during school hours B ‎ A man came home from work late, tired, to find his 5-year-old son waiting for him at the door.‎ ‎ “ Daddy, how much money do you make each hour?”‎ ‎ “If you must know, I make $20 each hour.”‎ ‎ “Oh,” the little boy answered, with his head down. He thought for a moment, looked up and said, “Daddy, could you lend me $10?”‎ ‎ The father was furious, “If you ask for the money to buy a toy or some other rubbish, then go straight to your room and think about why are you so selfish!”‎ ‎ The little boy went to his room without words and shut the door. After a shout while, the father calmed down, and started to think, “Maybe he really needs to buy something and he didn’t really ask for money very often.” So he went to the little boy’s room.‎ ‎ “Sorry! Maybe I was too hard on you just now.” said the man, “Here’s $10.”‎ ‎ “Oh, thank you, Daddy!” he said happily. Then the boy took out some coins. When the father found that the boy already had money, he got angry again.‎ ‎ “Why do you want more money since you already have some?” the father shouted angrily.‎ ‎ “Because I didn’t have enough, but now I do.” The little boy replied, “Daddy, I have $20 now. Can I buy one hour of your time? Please come home early tomorrow. I would like to have dinner with you.”‎ ‎（ ）36. How much does the boy’s father make one hour?‎ ‎ A. $10 B. $20 C. $30 D. $40‎ ‎（ ）37. In this passage, the underlined word “furious” means ____________ ‎ ‎ A. very angry B. quite happy C. too excited D. a little nervous ‎（ ）38. At first, the father refused to lend the money because_____________ ‎ ‎ A. He thought the boy wanted to keep the money for himself ‎ B. He did not have enough money at that moment ‎ C. He though the boy would buy something of no use ‎ D. The boy always borrowed the money from him ‎（ ）39.The boy wanted to buy___________ with twenty dollars.‎ ‎ A. A new novel for himself B. A nice present for his father ‎ C. A toy for his own birthday D. One hour of his father’s time ‎（ ) 40.From the passage, we can infer that the boy’s father ____ .‎ ‎ A. Often played with his son B. Spent little time with his son ‎ C. Didn’t love his son at all D. Often came home early C 配对：找出每段文章的段落大意 ‎( )41.On October8，ZhouHuajian gave a performance in Tianjin. About 2500 fans went to the concert to see him.Almost of them were students. Some of them were even from Beijing, the capital city of China, which is about kilometres from Tianjin.‎ ‎( )42.English is now an international language. In the modern world, people need English for work and for international communication. You can use English to help you meet new people and to make new friends in every country of the world.‎ ‎( )43.Everyone has his own way of relaxing. Perhaps the most popular form is to take part in sports.. There are team sports, such as basketball and football. There are also individual(个人的) sports, such as swimming and running. Skating and mountain climbing are the most popular recreation for people who like to be outdoor.‎ ‎( )44.When you are reading something in English, you may often come across a new word. What’s the best way to know it? You may look it up in the English-Chinese dictionary. It will tell you a lot about the word, The pronunciation, the part of speech, the Chinese meaning and also how to use this word.‎ ‎( )45. Students in many countries are learning English. Some of these students are small children. Others are teenagers. Many are adults. Some learn it at school, others by themselves, a few learn English by listening to the language over the radio, on TV, or in films. One must work hard to learn another language.‎ A.English can be learnt in some way B.Different ways of relaxing C.A dictionary can help you with words D.English is very important E.All the people need recreation F.A popular singer ‎ ‎ ‎              ‎ 四．用所给单词的正确形式填空。（共5小题；每小题1分，满分5分)‎ ‎46.________ (create) an interest in what you learn is a good way to learn English.‎ ‎47.He put on five __________ (pound).every month ‎48.It’s hard for us __________ (finish) this task in two days.‎ ‎49.If you want to learn English well, you must practice__________(speak) it often.‎ ‎50. Teacher Li gave us some __________(suggest) about how to improve our pronunciation.‎ 五．按要求下列各题（共6小题；每空1分，满分15分)‎ ‎51. The math problem is so difficult that I can’t work it out.（改为同义句）‎ ‎ The math problem is _________ difficult ___________ work it out.‎ ‎52. Mary wonders. Will they have an English evening? （改为同义句） ‎ ‎ Mary wonders__________ they ________have an English evening.‎ 53. ‎ Most student were no longer interested in studying.（改为同义句） ‎ ‎ Most student were ___________ interested in studying_________ ___________.‎ 54. ‎54.那个小女孩害怕晚上出去。(汉译英)‎ ‎ The little girl __________ ________ _________ going out at night.‎ ‎55. 我为自己的工作感到自豪。(汉译英)‎ ‎ I ________ _________ _________ my work.‎ ‎56. 尽管他24岁了，但还是像个孩子。(汉译英)‎ ‎ _________ ____________ he’s 24, he’s still like a child.‎ 六． 任务型阅读（共5小题；每小题2分，满分10分）‎ ‎ This is Red Star Town. My grandfather has lived here all his life. He met my grandmother here and they got married(结婚). Red Star Town was called Taping Village before. When the Red Star Town underground station was built，the government started to pull down the wooden houses in this area. Since June 2000，Taping Village has become a history. My grandfather missed many things about Taping Village. (1)He used to be a doctor and everyone in the village knew him well. Now he is old and he can only sell medicine to people in the hospital. In the past, there were many stone and wooden houses around here. Also，there were big trees in the village. (2)现在到处是高楼。The streets are wide and clean. There are all kinds of shops and you can buy anything you want easily. My grandfather is glad that life has improved so much，but he really misses everything in the past and feels lonely. Many of his friends moved away because the government let them live in new flats in new towns. Although the village has disappeared, （3）is ,in, it , heart, still, his, beautiful. ‎ 按要求完成下面任务。‎ 任务一：将短文（1）处的句子翻译成汉语。‎ ‎57.________ ____________________________________________________________________‎ 任务一：将短文（2）处的句子翻译成英语。‎ ‎58.____________________________________________________________________________‎ 任务一：将短文（3）处的单词组成一个意思完整的句子。‎ ‎59.____________________________________________________________________________‎ 任务四：根据短文内容，回答下面的问题。‎ ‎60.How long did the writer’s grandfather lived in Red Star Town?‎ ‎_______________________________________________________________________________‎ 61. How long did Taiping Village become a history?‎ 七. 补全对话﹙10分﹚‎ A: Excuse me, sir. 62‎ B: Certainly. Go along this street. Turn left into Xingfu Street, and the museum is on your right. .‎ A. I will go to the History Museum.‎ B.You’re welcome.‎ C.Can I take a bus?‎ D.How long will it take me to walk there?‎ E. That’s such a pity!‎ F.Where is the bus stop? ‎ G.Could you tell me the way to the History Museum?‎ A: 63‎ B : It’s about thirty minutes.‎ A: I see. 64 .‎ B:Yes, you can. A No.103 bus will take you there.‎ A: 65.‎ B: Over there. Look! The bus is coming. ‎ A: Thank you very much.‎ B: 66‎ 八.书面表达 ﹙20分﹚‎ 假如你是李华，这个学期刚转到一所新学校。请根据下面表格中的信息，介绍你的一些变化。80词左右，开头已给出，不计入总词数。‎ 过去 现在 有很多朋友，性格开朗。‎ 几乎没有朋友，变得沉默寡言。‎ 花很多时间和朋友们在一起玩。‎ 多数时间用在功课上。‎ 对功课没有兴趣，成绩很差。‎ 变得爱学习，成绩提高很大。‎ ‎ I have changed a lot since I moved to this new school this term. ____________________‎ ‎______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ 九年级期中考试 英语答题卡 请将答案写在对应题号的答题纸上 题号 一 二 三 四 五 六 七 八 总分 得分 一. 单项选择 ( 20 分)‎ ‎1‎ ‎2‎ ‎3‎ ‎4‎ ‎5‎ ‎6‎ ‎7‎ ‎8‎ ‎9‎ ‎10‎ ‎11‎ ‎12‎ ‎13‎ ‎14‎ ‎15‎ ‎16‎ ‎17‎ ‎18‎ ‎19‎ ‎20‎ 二. 完形填空 ( 10 分 )‎ ‎21‎ ‎22‎ ‎23‎ ‎24‎ ‎25‎ ‎26‎ ‎27‎ ‎28‎ ‎29‎ ‎30‎ 三． 阅读理解 ( 30 分)‎ ‎31‎ ‎32‎ ‎33‎ ‎34‎ ‎35‎ ‎36‎ ‎37‎ ‎38‎ ‎39‎ ‎40‎ ‎41‎ ‎42‎ ‎43‎ ‎44‎ ‎45‎ 四． 用所给单词的正确形式填空。（5分)‎ ‎ 46.______________ 47._____________ 48.____________ ‎ ‎ 49.______________ 50._____________‎ 五．按要求下列各题（15分)‎ ‎ 51. _____________ ___________ ‎ ‎ 52. _____________ ___________ ‎ ‎ 53. _____________ ___________ ____________ ‎ ‎ 54. _____________ ___________ ____________.‎ ‎ 55. _____________ ___________ ____________ ‎ ‎ 56. _____________ ___________ ‎ 六． 任务型阅读（10分）‎ ‎57. _________________________________________________________________‎ ‎58.__________________________________________________________________‎ ‎59._________________________________________________________________‎ ‎60._________________________________________________________________‎ ‎61._________________________________________________________________‎ 七. 补全对话 （ 10 ）‎ ‎62‎ ‎63‎ ‎64‎ ‎65‎ ‎66‎ 八. 书面表达 ( 20 )‎ ‎ I have changed a lot since I moved to this new school this term. __________________‎ ‎ ‎ ‎_______________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎ ‎ ‎_______________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎ ‎ ‎_______________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎ ‎ ‎_______________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎ ‎ ‎_______________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎ ‎ ‎_______________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎ ‎ ‎_______________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎ ‎ ‎_______________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎ _____________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎_______________________________________________________________________________‎ 答题卡 请将答案写在对应题号的答题纸上 题号 一 二 三 四 五 六 七 八 总分 得分 一. 单项选择 ( 20 分)‎ ‎1‎ ‎2‎ ‎3‎ ‎4‎ ‎5‎ ‎6‎ ‎7‎ ‎8‎ ‎9‎ ‎10‎ B C B D D B D C B A ‎11‎ ‎12‎ ‎13‎ ‎14‎ ‎15‎ ‎16‎ ‎17‎ ‎18‎ ‎19‎ ‎20‎ C D C A A C C B C A 二. 完形填空 ( 10 分 )‎ ‎21‎ ‎22‎ ‎23‎ ‎24‎ ‎25‎ ‎26‎ ‎27‎ ‎28‎ ‎29‎ ‎30‎ C D B A D C D B A B 三． 阅读理解 ( 30 分)‎ ‎31‎ ‎32‎ ‎33‎ ‎34‎ ‎35‎ ‎36‎ ‎37‎ ‎38‎ ‎39‎ ‎40‎ ‎41‎ ‎42‎ ‎43‎ ‎44‎ ‎45‎ C C D D A B A C D B F D B C A 四． 用所给单词的正确形式填空。（5分)‎ ‎ 46. Creating 47. pounds 48.to finish ‎ 49 speaking 50.suggestions 五．按要求下列各题（15分)‎ ‎ 51. too to ‎ ‎ 52. if willl ‎ ‎ 53. not any more ‎ ‎ 54. is afraid of ‎ ‎ 55. am proud of ‎ ‎ 56. Even though ‎ 六. 任务型阅读（10分）‎ ‎ 57. 他过去是个医生，村子里的每个人对他都熟悉 ‎ 58.Now tall buildings are here and there.‎ ‎ 59.It is still beautiful in his heart.‎ ‎ 60.All his life ‎ 61.Since June 2000‎ 七. 补全对话 （ 10 ）‎ ‎62‎ ‎63‎ ‎64‎ ‎65‎ ‎66‎ B F A E C 八. 书面表达 ( 20 )‎ ‎ 略